KR20220065899A - Devices, methods, and graphical user interfaces for system-wide behavior for 3d models - Google Patents

Abstract

A computer system having a display creation component, one or more input devices, and one or more cameras receives a request to display a virtual object within a first user interface area that includes a field of view of the one or more cameras. In response to the request, in accordance with a determination that the object placement criteria are not met, the representation of the virtual object is presented with a first set of visual attributes and a first orientation independent of which part of the physical environment is displayed within the field of view of the one or more cameras. is displayed as Upon determining that the object placement criteria are met, the representation of the virtual object is displayed with a second set of visual properties distinct from the first set of visual properties and in a second orientation corresponding to the plane.

Description

DEVICES, METHODS, AND GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACES FOR SYSTEM-WIDE BEHAVIOR FOR 3D MODELS

FIELD OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates generally to electronic devices for displaying virtual objects, including, but not limited to, electronic devices for displaying virtual objects in various contexts.

The development of computer systems for augmented reality has increased significantly in recent years. Example augmented reality environments include at least some virtual elements that replace or augment the physical world. Input devices, such as touch-sensitive surfaces, to computer systems and other electronic computing devices are used to interact with virtual/augmented reality environments. Exemplary touch-sensitive surfaces include touchpads, touch-sensitive remote controls, and touch screen displays. Such surfaces are used to manipulate user interfaces on the display and objects therein. Exemplary user interface objects include digital images, video, text, icons, control elements such as buttons, and other graphics.

However, methods and interfaces for interacting with environments that include at least some virtual elements (eg, applications, augmented reality environments, mixed reality environments, and virtual reality environments) are cumbersome, inefficient and , is limited. For example, using a sequence of inputs to orient and position a virtual object in an augmented reality environment is tedious, creates a significant cognitive burden on the user, and compromises the experience in the virtual/augmented reality environment. Moreover, these methods take longer than necessary, and energy is wasted. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-operated devices.

Accordingly, there is a need for computer systems with improved methods and interfaces for interacting with virtual objects. Such methods and interfaces optionally complement or replace conventional methods for interacting with virtual objects. Such methods and interfaces reduce the number, size, and/or kind of inputs from the user and create a more efficient human-machine interface. For battery-operated devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.

The above shortcomings and other problems associated with interfaces for interacting with virtual objects (eg, user interfaces for augmented reality (AR) and related non-AR interfaces) are reduced or eliminated by the disclosed computer systems. . In some embodiments, the computer system comprises a desktop computer. In some embodiments, the computer system is portable (eg, a notebook computer, tablet computer, or handheld device). In some embodiments, the computer system includes a personal electronic device (eg, a wearable electronic device such as a watch). In some embodiments, the computer system has (and/or communicates with) a touchpad. In some embodiments, the computer system has (and/or communicates with) a touch-sensitive display (also known as a “touch screen” or “touch screen display”). In some embodiments, the computer system has a graphical user interface (GUI), one or more processors, memory, and sets of one or more modules, programs, or instructions stored in the memory to perform a number of functions. In some embodiments, the user interacts with the GUI through gestures and stylus and/or finger contacts, in part, on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, functions selectively include: playing games, editing images, drawing, presenting, word processing, creating spreadsheets, making phone calls, video conferencing, sending emails, instant messaging, exercise support, digital photography, digital video recording, web browsing, digital music playback, note taking, and/or digital video playback. Executable instructions for performing these functions are optionally included in a non-transitory computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.

In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed in a computer system having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more cameras. The method includes displaying a representation of the virtual object within a first user interface area on the display. The method also includes, while displaying a first representation of the virtual object within a first user interface area on the display, detecting a first input by contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the representation of the virtual object on the display. includes The method also includes, in response to detecting the first input by the contact, according to a determination that the first input by the contact meets the first criteria, a display of at least a portion of the first user interface area of the one or more cameras display a second user interface area on the display, comprising replacing with a representation of the field of view; continuously displaying the representation of the virtual object while switching from displaying the first user interface area to displaying the second user interface area.

In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed in a computer system having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more cameras. The method includes displaying a first representation of the virtual object within a first user interface area on the display. The method also includes, while displaying a first representation of the virtual object within a first user interface area on the display, a first input by a first contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the first representation of the virtual object on the display. It includes the step of detecting The method is also responsive to detecting the first input by the first contact and in accordance with determining that the input by the first contact meets first criteria, within a second user interface region different from the first user interface region. and displaying the representation of the virtual object. The method also includes, while displaying a second representation of the virtual object within the second user interface area, detecting a second input; and in response to detecting the second input, according to a determination that the second input corresponds to a request to manipulate the virtual object in the second user interface area, the second input of the virtual object in the second user interface area based on the second input. 2 change the display properties of the representation; according to a determination that the second input corresponds to a request to display the virtual object in the augmented reality environment, displaying a third representation of the virtual object along with a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras.

In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed in a computer system having a display and a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes, in response to a request to display the first user interface, displaying the first user interface with a representation of the first item. The method also includes, according to a determination that the first item corresponds to a respective virtual three-dimensional object, displaying a representation of the first item with a visual indication indicating that the first item corresponds to the first respective virtual three-dimensional object including the steps of The method also includes, in accordance with a determination that the first item does not correspond to the respective virtual three-dimensional object, displaying a representation of the first item without a visual indication. The method also includes, after displaying the representation of the first item, receiving a request to display a second user interface including the second item. The method also includes, in response to the request to display the second user interface, displaying the second user interface with the presentation of the second item. The method also includes, according to a determination that the second item corresponds to a respective virtual three-dimensional object, displaying a representation of the second item with a visual indication indicating that the second item corresponds to a second respective virtual three-dimensional object including the steps of The method also includes, in accordance with a determination that the second item does not correspond to the respective virtual three-dimensional object, displaying the representation of the second item without a visual indication.

According to some embodiments, a method is performed in a computer system having a display generating component, one or more input devices, and one or more cameras. The method includes receiving a request to display a virtual object within a first user interface area that includes at least a portion of a field of view of one or more cameras. The method also includes, in response to a request to display the virtual object within the first user interface area, displaying, via the display creation component, a representation of the virtual object over at least a portion of a field of view of one or more cameras included in the first user interface area. wherein the field of view of the one or more cameras is a view of the physical environment in which the one or more cameras are located. displaying the representation of the virtual object, in accordance with a determination that the object placement criteria are not met - the object placement criteria require that a placement location for the virtual object be identified within the field of view of one or more cameras for the object placement criteria to be met - displaying the representation of the virtual object with a first set of visual properties and in a first orientation independent of which part of the physical environment is displayed within the field of view of the one or more cameras; and in accordance with a determination that the object placement criteria are met, in a second set of visual attributes distinct from the first set of visual attributes and in a second orientation corresponding to a plane in the physical environment detected within the field of view of the one or more cameras. and displaying the representation of the virtual object.

According to some embodiments, a method is performed in a computer system having a display generating component, one or more input devices, one or more cameras, and one or more pose sensors for detecting changes in pose of a device comprising the one or more cameras. do. The method includes receiving a request to display an augmented reality view of the physical environment within a first user interface area that includes a representation of a field of view of one or more cameras. The method also includes, in response to receiving the request to display the augmented reality view of the physical environment, display a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras, in accordance with a determination that calibration criteria are not met for the augmented reality view of the physical environment. , displaying a calibration user interface object that is dynamically animated in response to movement of the one or more cameras in the physical environment, wherein displaying the calibration user interface object comprises, while displaying the calibration user interface object, one or more postures; detecting, via sensors, a change in pose of one or more cameras in the physical environment; and in response to detecting a change in the pose of the one or more cameras in the physical environment, adjusting at least one display parameter of the calibration user interface object according to the detected change in the pose of the one or more cameras in the physical environment. do. The method also includes detecting that calibration criteria are met while displaying a calibration user interface object that moves on the display according to the detected change in pose of the one or more cameras in the physical environment. The method also includes, in response to detecting that the calibration criteria are met, ceasing to display the calibration user interface object.

According to some embodiments, a method is performed in a computer system having a display generating component and one or more input devices including a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes displaying, by a display creation component, a representation of a first perspective of the virtual three-dimensional object within a first user interface area. The method also includes, while displaying a representation of the first viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area on the display, for displaying a portion of the virtual three-dimensional object that is not visible from the first viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object. detecting a first input corresponding to a request to rotate the virtual three-dimensional object relative to the display. The method further includes, in response to detecting the first input, determining that the first input corresponds to a request to rotate the three-dimensional object about the first axis, based on a magnitude of the first input; and rotate the virtual three-dimensional object about the first axis by an amount constrained by a limit on movement that limits rotation of the virtual three-dimensional object by rotation about the first axis by more than a threshold amount; Upon determining that the first input corresponds to a request to rotate the three-dimensional object about a second axis different from the first axis, the virtual three-dimensional object is moved along the second axis by an amount determined based on the size of the first input. rotating the virtual three-dimensional object about the second axis by a rotation greater than the threshold amount for an input having a magnitude greater than the respective threshold.

According to some embodiments, a method is performed in a computer system having a display generating component and a touch-sensitive surface. The method includes, via a display creation component, a first object manipulation behavior performed in response to inputs that meet first gesture recognition criteria and a second object manipulation behavior performed in response to inputs that meet second gesture recognition criteria and displaying a first user interface region comprising a user interface object associated with a plurality of object manipulation behaviors comprising: The method also includes, while displaying the first user interface region, detecting movement of one or more contacts across the touch-sensitive surface, detecting a first portion of the input to the user interface object, the one or more evaluating movement of the one or more contacts relative to both the first gesture recognition criteria and the second gesture recognition criteria while the contacts are detected on the touch-sensitive surface. The method also includes, in response to detecting the first portion of the input, updating an appearance of the user interface object based on the first portion of the input, wherein updating the appearance of the user interface object comprises: change the appearance of the user interface object according to the first object manipulation behavior based on the first portion of the input, according to a determination that the first portion of the user meets the first gesture recognition criteria before meeting the second gesture recognition criteria; updating the second gesture recognition criteria by increasing a threshold for the second gesture recognition criteria; and according to determining that the input meets the second gesture recognition criteria before meeting the first gesture recognition criteria, change the appearance of the user interface object according to the second object manipulation behavior based on the first portion of the input; and updating the first gesture recognition criteria by increasing a threshold for the first gesture recognition criteria.

According to some embodiments, a method is performed in a computer system having a display generating component, one or more input devices, one or more audio output generators, and one or more cameras. The method includes, via a display creation component, displaying a representation of the virtual object in a first user interface area comprising a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras, wherein the displaying is captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras. maintaining a first spatial relationship between the plane detected in the physical environment and the representation of the virtual object. The method also includes detecting movement of the device adjusting the field of view of the one or more cameras. The method also includes, in response to detecting movement of the device adjusting the field of view of the one or more cameras, a first spatial distance between the virtual object and the plane detected within the field of view of the one or more cameras as the field of view of the one or more cameras is adjusted. adjust the display of the representation of the virtual object within the first user interface area according to the relationship, and upon determining that movement of the device causes more than a threshold amount of the virtual object to move outside the displayed portion of the field of view of the one or more cameras, one and generating, via the above audio output generators, a first audio alert.

According to some embodiments, the electronic device is a display generating component, optionally one or more input devices, optionally one or more touch-sensitive surfaces, optionally one or more cameras, optionally an intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. one or more sensors to detect , optionally one or more audio output generators, optionally one or more device orientation sensors, optionally one or more tactile output generators, optionally one or more attitude sensor to detect changes in pose. one or more processors, and a memory to store one or more programs; The one or more programs are configured to be executed by the one or more processors, and the one or more programs include instructions for performing or causing performance of any of the methods described herein. According to some embodiments, a computer-readable storage medium comprises a display generating component, optionally one or more input devices, optionally one or more touch-sensitive surfaces, optionally one or more cameras, optionally a touch-sensitive surface; having one or more sensors for detecting intensities of contacts of, optionally one or more audio output generators, optionally one or more device orientation sensors, optionally one or more tactile output generators, and optionally one or more posture sensors stored thereon instructions that, when executed by the electronic device, cause the device to perform or cause performance of any of the methods described herein. Detecting intensities of contacts with the display generating component, optionally one or more input devices, optionally one or more touch-sensitive surfaces, optionally one or more cameras, optionally the touch-sensitive surface, according to some embodiments one or more sensors, optionally one or more audio output generators, optionally one or more device orientation sensors, optionally one or more tactile output generators, optionally one or more posture sensors, memory, and one or more stored in the memory. Any of the methods described herein, wherein the graphical user interface on the electronic device having one or more processors for executing programs is updated in response to inputs, as described in any of the methods described herein. including one or more of the elements displayed in any manner. According to some embodiments, the electronic device comprises a display generating component, optionally one or more input devices, optionally one or more touch-sensitive surfaces, optionally one or more cameras, optionally of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. one or more sensors to detect intensities, optionally one or more audio output generators, optionally one or more device orientation sensors, optionally one or more tactile output generators, and optionally one or more sensors to detect changes in posture. posture sensors; and means for performing or causing performance of any of the methods described herein. Detecting intensities of contacts with the display generating component, optionally one or more input devices, optionally one or more touch-sensitive surfaces, optionally one or more cameras, optionally the touch-sensitive surface, according to some embodiments having one or more sensors for, optionally one or more audio output generators, optionally one or more device orientation sensors, optionally one or more tactile output generators, and optionally one or more orientation sensors for detecting changes in pose. An information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device comprises means for performing or causing performance of any of the methods described herein.

Accordingly, display generating components, optionally one or more input devices, optionally one or more touch-sensitive surfaces, optionally one or more cameras, optionally one or more sensors for detecting intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. Electronic devices having, optionally one or more audio output generators, optionally one or more device orientation sensors, optionally one or more tactile output generators, and optionally one or more posture sensors, include virtual objects in various contexts. Improved methods and interfaces for displaying are provided, thereby increasing effectiveness, efficiency and user satisfaction with such devices. Such methods and interfaces may complement or replace conventional methods for displaying virtual objects in various contexts.

For a better understanding of the variously described embodiments, reference should be made to the specific details for carrying out the following invention in connection with the following drawings in which like reference numerals indicate corresponding parts throughout.
1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display, in accordance with some embodiments.
1B is a block diagram illustrating example components for event processing, in accordance with some embodiments.
1C is a block diagram illustrating a tactile output module in accordance with some embodiments.
2 illustrates a portable multifunction device with a touch screen, in accordance with some embodiments.
3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, in accordance with some embodiments.
4A illustrates an example user interface for a menu of applications on a portable multifunction device, in accordance with some embodiments.
4B illustrates an example user interface for a multifunction device having a touch-sensitive surface separate from a display, in accordance with some embodiments.
4C-4E illustrate examples of dynamic intensity thresholds in accordance with some embodiments.
4F-4K illustrate a set of sample tactile output patterns in accordance with some embodiments.
5A-5A illustrate example user interfaces for displaying a representation of a virtual object while switching from displaying a first user interface area to displaying a second user interface area, in accordance with some embodiments; .
6A-6J illustrate a first representation of a virtual object within a first user interface area, a second representation of a virtual object within a second user interface area, and a representation of a field of view of one or more cameras, in accordance with some embodiments; Together illustrate example user interfaces for displaying a third representation of a virtual object.
7A-7E, 7F1, 7F2, 7G1, 7G2, and 7H-7P display an item with a visual indication indicating that the item corresponds to a virtual three-dimensional object, in accordance with some embodiments. Examples of user interfaces for doing so are illustrated.
8A-8E are flow diagrams of a process for displaying a representation of a virtual object while switching from displaying a first user interface area to displaying a second user interface area, in accordance with some embodiments.
9A-9D illustrate a first representation of a virtual object within a first user interface area, a second representation of a virtual object within a second user interface area, and a representation of a field of view of one or more cameras, in accordance with some embodiments; Together are flow diagrams of a process for displaying a third representation of the virtual object.
10A-10D are flow diagrams of a process for displaying an item with a visual indication that the item corresponds to a virtual three-dimensional object, in accordance with some embodiments.
11A-11V illustrate example user interfaces for displaying a virtual object having different visual properties depending on whether object placement criteria are met, in accordance with some embodiments.
12A to 12D, 12E-1, 12E-2, 12F-1, 12F-2, 12G-1, 12G-2, 12H-1, 12H-2, 12I-1 , FIGS. 12I-2 , 12J , 12K-1 , 12K-2 , 12L-1 , and 12L-2 are dynamically animated according to movement of one or more cameras of the device, in accordance with some embodiments. Illustrates example user interfaces for displaying a calibration user interface object.
13A-13M illustrate example user interfaces for constraining rotation of a virtual object about an axis, in accordance with some embodiments.
14A-14Z illustrate a method for increasing a second threshold magnitude of movement required for a second object manipulation behavior in accordance with a determination that the first threshold magnitude of movement is satisfied for the first object manipulation behavior, in accordance with some embodiments; Example user interfaces are illustrated.
14AA-14A illustrate a method for increasing a second threshold magnitude of movement required for a second object manipulation behavior in accordance with a determination that the first threshold magnitude of motion is satisfied for the first object manipulation behavior, in accordance with some embodiments. Illustrated flowcharts illustrating operations.
15A-15AI illustrate example user interfaces for generating an audio alert upon determining that movement of the device causes a virtual object to move outside of the displayed field of view of one or more device cameras, in accordance with some embodiments. do.
16A-16G are flow diagrams of a process for displaying a virtual object having different visual properties depending on whether object placement criteria are met, in accordance with some embodiments.
17A-17D are flow diagrams of a process for displaying a calibration user interface object that is dynamically animated in response to movement of one or more cameras of a device, in accordance with some embodiments.
18A-18I are flow diagrams of a process for constraining rotation of a virtual object about an axis, in accordance with some embodiments.
19A-19H illustrate a method for increasing a second threshold magnitude of movement required for a second object manipulation behavior in accordance with a determination that the first threshold magnitude of movement is satisfied for the first object manipulation behavior, in accordance with some embodiments. These are the flow charts of the process.
20A-20F are flow diagrams of a process for generating an audio alert upon determining that movement of a device causes a virtual object to move outside of the displayed field of view of one or more device cameras, in accordance with some embodiments.

A virtual object is a graphical representation of a three-dimensional object within a virtual environment. Interacting with the virtual objects to transform the virtual objects from being displayed in the context of the application user interface (eg, a two-dimensional application user interface that does not display the augmented reality environment) to the augmented reality environment (eg, additions not available in the physical world). Conventional methods of transitioning information to being displayed in the context of an environment in which the view of the physical world is augmented with supplemental information providing the user (eg, the size of the virtual object relative to the real or desired appearance in the augmented reality environment) , position, and/or orientation) often require multiple discrete inputs (eg, a sequence of gestures and button presses, etc.) to achieve an intended result. Additionally, conventional input methods often involve the time necessary to activate one or more device cameras to capture a view of the physical world and/or virtual objects that may be placed in the augmented reality environment (eg, capture of the physical world). involves a delay between receiving a request to display the augmented reality environment and displaying the augmented reality environment due to the time required to analyze and characterize the view of the physical world (detecting planes and/or surfaces in the rendered view) do. Embodiments herein provide a method for displaying a virtual object in an augmented reality environment (eg, by causing a user to provide input to switch from displaying the virtual object in the context of an application user interface to displaying the virtual object in the augmented reality environment). By allowing the user to change the display properties of the virtual object (eg, in a three-dimensional staging environment) prior to doing so, by providing an indication that allows the user to easily identify the virtual objects throughout the system across multiple applications. , rotation of the displayed virtual object about an axis by changing the visual properties of the object while determining placement information for the object, thereby providing an animated calibration user interface object to represent the movement of the device required for calibration by increasing the threshold magnitude of movement for the second object manipulation behavior when the threshold magnitude of movement is met for the first object manipulation behavior, and to indicate that the virtual object has moved outside the displayed field of view. Provides an intuitive way for a user to display and/or interact with virtual objects in various contexts (by providing audio alerts).

The systems, methods, and GUIs described herein improve user interface interactions with virtual/augmented reality environments in a number of ways. For example, they make it easier to display the virtual object in the augmented reality environment and, in response to different inputs, adjust the appearance of the virtual object for display in the augmented reality environment.

In the following, FIGS. 1A-1C , 2 , and 3 provide descriptions of exemplary devices. 4A, 4B, 5A-5A, 6A-6J, 7A-7P, 11A-11V, 12A-12L, 13A-13M, 14A-14Z, and FIGS. 15A-15AI illustrate example user interfaces for displaying virtual objects in various contexts. 8A-8E illustrate a process for displaying a representation of a virtual object while switching from displaying a first user interface area to displaying a second user interface area. 9A-9D illustrate a first representation of the virtual object within a first user interface area, a second representation of the virtual object within a second user interface area, and a third representation of the virtual object with a representation of a field of view of one or more cameras; A process for displaying is exemplified. 10A-10D illustrate a process for displaying an item with a visual indication indicating that the item corresponds to a virtual three-dimensional object. 16A-16G illustrate a process for displaying a virtual object with different visual properties depending on whether object placement criteria are met. 17A-17D illustrate a process for displaying a calibration user interface object that is dynamically animated in response to movement of one or more cameras of a device. 18A-18I illustrate a process for constraining rotation of a virtual object about an axis. 14AA-14A and 19A-19H show a process for increasing a second threshold magnitude of movement required for a second object manipulation behavior in accordance with a determination that the first threshold magnitude of motion is satisfied for the first object manipulation behavior to exemplify 20A-20F illustrate a process for generating an audio alert upon a determination that movement of the device causes the virtual object to move outside of the displayed field of view of one or more device cameras. 5A-5AT, 6A-6J, 7A-7P, 11A-11V, 12A-12L, 13A-13M, 14A-14Z, and 15A-15AI The interfaces are shown in FIGS. 8A-8E, 9A-9D, 10A-10D, 14AA-14A, 16A-16G, 17A-17D, 18A-18I, 19A-19H, and to illustrate the processes of FIGS. 20A-20F.

Exemplary devices

Reference will now be made in detail to embodiments, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. In the following detailed description, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the variously described embodiments. It will be apparent, however, to one skilled in the art, that the various described embodiments may be practiced without these specific details. In other instances, well-known methods, procedures, components, circuits, and networks have not been described in detail in order not to unnecessarily obscure aspects of the embodiments.

It will also be understood that, in some instances, the terms first, second, etc. are used herein to describe various elements, but these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish one element from another. For example, a first contact may be referred to as a second contact, and similarly, a second contact may be referred to as a first contact, without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments. The first contact and the second contact are both contacts, but they are not the same contact, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.

The terminology used in the description of the variously described embodiments herein is for the purpose of describing the specific embodiments only, and is not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and in the appended claims, the singular forms "a", "an", and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. It is intended It will also be understood that the term “and/or” as used herein represents and encompasses any and all possible combinations of one or more of the listed associated items. The terms “include,” “including,” “comprise,” and/or “comprising,” as used herein, refer to the recited features, integers, Specifies the presence of steps, steps, actions, elements, and/or components, but the presence of one or more other features, integers, steps, actions, elements, components, and/or groups thereof. Or it will be further understood that the addition is not excluded.

As used herein, the term "if" is, optionally, depending on the context, "when" or "upon" or "in response to determining ( It is interpreted to mean "in response to determining" or "in response to detecting". Similarly, the phrases “when it is determined that” or “when [the stated condition or event] is detected” are, optionally, depending on the context, “when determined to be” or “in response to determining that” or “ be construed to mean "on detecting [the stated condition or event]" or "in response to detecting [the stated condition or event]."

Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communication device, such as a mobile phone, that also includes other functions such as PDA and/or music player functions. Illustrative embodiments of portable multifunction devices are limited to iPhone®, iPod Touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, CA. include without Other portable electronic devices such as laptop or tablet computers with touch-sensitive surfaces (eg, touch screen displays and/or touchpads) are optionally used. It should also be understood that in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communication device, but a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (eg, a touch screen display and/or a touchpad).

In the discussion below, an electronic device including a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. However, it should be understood that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user interface devices such as a physical keyboard, mouse and/or joystick.

A device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following: note-taking applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, word processing applications, website creation applications, disk authoring applications, spreadsheet applications, gaming applications, phone applications, imaging Conferencing applications, email applications, instant messaging applications, athletic support applications, photo management applications, digital camera applications, digital video camera applications, web browsing applications, digital music player applications, and/or digital video player applications.

Various applications running on the device optionally use at least one common physical user interface device, such as a touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface as well as corresponding information displayed on the device are optionally adjusted and/or changed from one application to the next and/or within each application. In this way, the universal physical architecture (such as a touch-sensitive surface) of the device supports a variety of applications, optionally with user interfaces that are intuitive and transparent to the user.

Attention is now directed to embodiments of portable devices having touch-sensitive displays. 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device 100 having a touch-sensitive display system 112 in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display system 112 is sometimes referred to as a “touch screen” for convenience, and is sometimes simply referred to as a touch-sensitive display. Device 100 includes memory 102 (optionally including one or more computer-readable storage media), memory controller 122 , one or more processing units (CPUs) 120 , peripherals interface 118 , RF Circuitry 108 , audio circuitry 110 , speaker 111 , microphone 113 , input/output (I/O) subsystem 106 , other input or control devices 116 , and external port 124 . ) is included. Device 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164 . Device 100 may optionally include one or more intensity sensors for detecting intensities of contacts on device 100 (eg, a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 ). 165). Device 100 optionally includes a touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or a touchpad 355 of device 300 for generating tactile outputs on device 100 (eg, a touchpad 355 of device 100 ). one or more tactile output generators 167 (for generating tactile outputs on the same touch-sensitive surface). These components optionally communicate via one or more communication buses or signal lines 103 .

Device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and device 100 may optionally have more or fewer components than shown, optionally combine two or more components, or optionally a component It should be understood that they have a different configuration or arrangement of the The various components shown in FIG. 1A are implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or combinations thereof, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.

Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory and, optionally, one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. non-volatile memory such as Access to memory 102 by other components of device 100 , such as CPU(s) 120 and peripherals interface 118 , is optionally controlled by memory controller 122 .

Peripherals interface 118 may be used to couple input and output peripherals of the device to CPU(s) 120 and memory 102 . One or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs and/or sets of instructions stored in memory 102 to process data and to perform various functions for device 100 .

In some embodiments, peripherals interface 118 , CPU(s) 120 and memory controller 122 are optionally implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104 . In some other embodiments, they are optionally implemented on separate chips.

Radio frequency (RF) circuitry 108 receives and transmits RF signals, also referred to as electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals to/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with communication networks and other communication devices via the electromagnetic signals. The RF circuitry 108 may optionally include, but is not limited to, an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, and the like. However, well-known circuitry for performing these functions is included. The RF circuitry 108 may optionally include networks such as the Internet, an intranet, and/or a wireless network, also referred to as the World Wide Web (WWW), such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN) and/or a MAN (metropolitan area network), and communicates with other devices by wireless communication. Wireless communication, optionally, Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), high-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA), high-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA), Evolution (EV-DO), Data-Only), HSPA, HSPA+, DC-HSPA (Dual-Cell HSPA), LTE (long term evolution), NFC (near field communication), W-CDMA (wideband code division multiple access), CDMA (code division multiple access) ), time division multiple access (TDMA), Bluetooth (Bluetooth), Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (eg, IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11ac, IEEE 802.11ax, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g and/or IEEE 802.11n) ), voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP), Wi-MAX, protocols for email (eg, Internet message access protocol (IMAP) and/or post office protocol (POP)), instant messaging (eg, extensible messaging and presence protocol (XMPP) ), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Leveraging Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Service (IMPS), and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or communication protocols not yet developed as of the filing date of this document. , including any other suitable communication protocol, but It utilizes any of a plurality of communication standards, protocols and technologies, including but not limited to these.

The audio circuitry 110 , the speaker 111 , and the microphone 113 provide an audio interface between the user and the device 100 . The audio circuit unit 110 receives audio data from the peripheral device interface 118 , converts the audio data into an electrical signal, and transmits the electrical signal to the speaker 111 . The speaker 111 converts the electrical signal into sound waves that humans can hear. The audio circuitry 110 also receives an electrical signal converted from sound waves by the microphone 113 . The audio circuitry 110 converts the electrical signal into audio data and transmits the audio data to the peripherals interface 118 for processing. Audio data is optionally fetched from and/or transmitted to memory 102 and/or RF circuitry 108 by peripherals interface 118 . In some embodiments, audio circuitry 110 also includes a headset jack (eg, 212 in FIG. 2 ). The headset jack is a connection between the audio circuitry 110 and detachable audio input/output peripherals, such as output-only headphones, or a headset that has both an output (eg, one or both ear headphones) and an input (eg, a microphone). Provides an interface.

I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripherals on device 100 , such as touch-sensitive display system 112 and other input or control devices 116 , with peripherals interface 118 . I/O subsystem 106 optionally includes one or more input controllers for display controller 156 , light sensor controller 158 , intensity sensor controller 159 , haptic feedback controller 161 , and other input or control devices. 160). One or more input controllers 160 receive/transmit electrical signals to/from other input or control devices 116 . Other input or control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (eg, push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slider switches, joysticks, click wheels, and the like. In some other embodiments, input controller(s) 160 is optionally coupled to (or coupled to any of a keyboard, infrared port, USB port, stylus, and/or pointer device such as a mouse). doesn't work). One or more buttons (eg, 208 in FIG. 2 ) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of the speaker 111 and/or the microphone 113 . The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (eg, 206 in FIG. 2 ).

The touch-sensitive display system 112 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and the user. The display controller 156 receives and/or transmits electrical signals to/from the touch-sensitive display system 112 . The touch-sensitive display system 112 displays a visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively referred to as “graphics”). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output corresponds to user interface objects. As used herein, the term “affordance” refers to a user-interactive graphical user interface object (eg, a graphical user interface object that is configured to respond to inputs directed towards the graphical user interface object). . Examples of user-interactive graphical user interface objects include, without limitation, buttons, sliders, icons, selectable menu items, switches, hyperlinks, or other user interface controls.

The touch-sensitive display system 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or set of sensors that receives input from a user based on haptic and/or tactile contact. Touch-sensitive display system 112 and display controller 156 (along with any associated modules and/or sets of instructions within memory 102) contact (and contact) on touch-sensitive display system 112 . detect any movement or interruption of the user interface object (eg, one or more soft keys, icons, web pages or images) displayed on the touch-sensitive display system 112 ; ) into an interaction with In some embodiments, the point of contact between the touch-sensitive display system 112 and the user corresponds to the user's finger or stylus.

Touch-sensitive display system 112 optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments. The touch-sensitive display system 112 and display controller 156 may optionally include one or more of capacitive, resistive, infrared and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or touch-sensitive display system 112 . Detecting a contact and any movement or interruption thereof using any of a plurality of touch sensing technologies currently known or to be developed in the future, including but not limited to other factors for determining points of contact. In some embodiments, a projected mutual capacitance sensing technology such as that found in the iPhone®, iPod touch®, and iPad® from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, CA is used. .

The touch-sensitive display system 112 optionally has a video resolution greater than 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen video resolution exceeds 400 dpi (eg, 500 dpi, 800 dpi, or more). The user optionally makes contact with the touch-sensitive display system 112 using any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, finger, or the like. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to operate using finger-based contacts and gestures, which may be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger contact area of the finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device converts coarse finger-based input into precise pointer/cursor positions or commands for the user to perform desired actions.

In some embodiments, in addition to a touch screen, device 100 optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating certain functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is optionally a touch-sensitive surface separate from the touch-sensitive display system 112 , or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.

Device 100 also includes a power system 162 for powering various components. Power system 162 may optionally include a power management system, one or more power sources (eg, a battery, alternating current (AC)), a recharge system, a power failure detection circuit, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator ( light emitting diodes (LEDs), for example), and any other components associated with the generation, management, and distribution of power within portable devices.

Device 100 also optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164 . 1A shows a light sensor coupled with a light sensor controller 158 in the I/O subsystem 106 . The optical sensor(s) 164 optionally include charge-coupled device (CCD) or complementary metal-oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistors. The light sensor(s) 164 receives light from the environment, projected through one or more lenses, and converts the light into data representing an image. In conjunction with imaging module 143 (also referred to as camera module), optical sensor(s) 164 optionally captures still images and/or video. In some embodiments, the optical sensor is located on the back of the device opposite the touch-sensitive display system 112 on the front of the device 100 so that the touch screen acts as a viewfinder for still and/or video image acquisition. make it usable In some embodiments, another light sensor is placed on the front of the device to obtain an image of the user (eg, for a selfie, for the user to videoconference while viewing other videoconference participants on the touch screen, etc.) is located in

Device 100 also optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors 165 . 1A shows a contact intensity sensor coupled with an intensity sensor controller 159 in the I/O subsystem 106 . Contact intensity sensor(s) 165 may optionally include one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electrical force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other intensity sensors. (eg, sensors used to measure the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact intensity sensor(s) 165 receives contact intensity information (eg, pressure information or a proxy for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact intensity sensor is collocated with or proximate to a touch-sensitive surface (eg, touch-sensitive display system 112 ). In some embodiments, the at least one contact intensity sensor is located on the back of the device 100 opposite the touch screen display system 112 positioned on the front of the device 100 .

Device 100 also optionally includes one or more proximity sensors 166 . 1A shows a proximity sensor 166 coupled with a peripherals interface 118 . Alternatively, proximity sensor 166 is coupled with input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106 . In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables the touch-sensitive display system 112 when the multifunction device is placed near the user's ear (eg, when the user is on a phone call).

Device 100 also optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 . 1A shows a tactile output generator coupled with a haptic feedback controller 161 in the I/O subsystem 106 . In some embodiments, tactile output generator(s) 167 may be connected to one or more electroacoustic devices, such as speakers or other audio components, and/or a motor, a solenoid, an electroactive polymer, a piezoelectric actuator, an electrostatic actuator, or Electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion, such as other tactile output generating components (eg, components that convert electrical signals to tactile outputs on the device). Tactile output generator(s) 167 receive tactile feedback generation instructions from haptic feedback module 133 and generate tactile outputs on device 100 that can be sensed by a user of device 100 . . In some embodiments, the at least one tactile output generator is positioned with or proximate a touch-sensitive surface (eg, touch-sensitive display system 112 ) and, optionally, vertically (eg, vertically) the touch-sensitive surface. , generate a tactile output by moving it into/out of the surface of the device 100 ) or laterally (eg, back and forth in the same plane as the surface of the device 100 ). In some embodiments, the at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back side of the device 100 opposite the touch-sensitive display system 112 located on the front side of the device 100 .

Device 100 also optionally includes one or more accelerometers 168 . 1A shows an accelerometer 168 coupled with a peripherals interface 118 . Alternatively, the accelerometer 168 is optionally coupled with an input controller 160 in the I/O subsystem 106 . In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on analysis of data received from one or more accelerometers. Device 100 may optionally include, in addition to accelerometer(s) 168 , a magnetometer (not shown), and a GPS (eg, vertical or horizontal) for obtaining information regarding the position and orientation of device 100 (eg, longitudinal or transverse). or a GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown).

In some embodiments, software components stored in memory 102 include operating system 126 , communication module (or set of instructions) 128 , contact/motion module (or set of instructions) 130 , graphics module ( or set of instructions) 132 , a haptic feedback module (or set of instructions) 133 , a text input module (or set of instructions) 134 , a GPS module (or set of instructions) 135 , and applications (or sets of instructions) 136 . Furthermore, in some embodiments, memory 102 stores device/global internal state 157 as shown in FIGS. 1A and 3 . The device/global internal state 157, if present, includes an active application state indicating which applications are currently active; a display state indicating which applications, views, or other information occupy the various areas of the touch-sensitive display system 112 ; sensor status, including information obtained from the device's various sensors and other input or control devices 116; and location and/or position information regarding the location and/or posture of the device.

Operating system 126 (eg, an embedded operating system such as iOS, Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, WINDOWS, or VxWorks) performs general system tasks (eg, memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) It includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing the software, and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.

Communication module 128 enables communication with other devices via one or more external ports 124 , and also provides various functions for processing data received by RF circuitry 108 and/or external ports 124 . Includes software components. External port 124 (eg, USB, FIREWIRE, etc.) is configured to couple directly to other devices or indirectly through a network (eg, Internet, wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is the same as, similar to, and/or compatible with the 30-pin connector used in some iPhone®, iPod touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, CA. Possible multi-pin (eg 30-pin) connectors. In some embodiments, the external port is the same as or similar to the Lightning connector used in some iPhone®, iPod touch®, and iPad® devices from Apple Inc. of Cupertino, CA and/or or a compatible Lightning connector.

Contact/motion module 130 may optionally (along with display controller 156) contact touch-sensitive display system 112, and other touch-sensitive devices (eg, a touchpad or physical click wheel). to detect The contact/motion module 130 is configured to determine whether a contact has occurred (eg, to detect a finger-down event), the strength of the contact (eg, force or pressure of the contact, or determining a force or substitute for pressure of a contact, determining whether there is movement of the contact to track movement across the touch-sensitive surface (eg, one or more finger-dragging events); )), and determining whether contact has ceased (eg, detecting a finger-up event or contact cessation) (eg, by a finger). , or with a stylus) for performing various operations related to detection of contact. The contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining the movement of the point of contact represented by the set of contact data optionally determines a speed (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or acceleration (change in magnitude and/or direction) of the point of contact. includes doing These actions are optionally applied to single contacts (eg, one finger contacts or stylus contacts) or to multiple simultaneous contacts (eg, "multi-touch"/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contact on the touchpad.

The contact/motion module 130 optionally detects a gesture input by the user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns (eg, different motions, timings, and/or intensities of the detected contacts). Thus, the gesture is, optionally, detected by detecting a specific contact pattern. For example, detecting a finger tap gesture may include detecting a finger-down event followed by a finger-down event at the same (or substantially the same location) as the finger-down event (eg, at the location of the icon). and detecting an up (liftoff) event. As another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface detects a finger-down event followed by one or more finger-dragging events, followed by a finger-up (lift-off) event. ) to detect the event. Similarly, tap, swipe, drag, and other gestures are detected for the stylus by optionally detecting a specific contact pattern for the stylus.

In some embodiments, detecting a finger tap gesture depends on the length of time between detecting a finger-down event and a finger-up event, but between detecting a finger-down event and a finger-up event. is independent of the intensity of finger contact. In some embodiments, the tap gesture is, independently of whether the intensity of the finger contact during the tap meets a given intensity threshold (greater than a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold), such as a light press or deep press intensity threshold, the finger- is detected according to a determination that the length of time between the down event and the finger-up event is less than a predetermined value (eg, less than 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, or 0.5 seconds). Thus, a finger tap gesture may meet certain input criteria that do not require the characteristic intensity of the contact to meet a given intensity threshold in order for the specific input criteria to be met. For clarity, a finger contact in a tap gesture typically needs to meet a nominal contact-detection intensity threshold below which no contact is detected for a finger-down event to be detected. A similar analysis applies to detecting a tap gesture by a stylus or other contact. In cases where the device is capable of detecting a finger or stylus contact hovering over the touch-sensitive surface, the nominal contact-detection intensity threshold optionally does not correspond to physical contact between the finger or stylus and the touch-sensitive surface.

The same concepts apply in a similar way to other types of gestures. For example, a swipe gesture, a pinch gesture, a deep pinch gesture, and/or a long press gesture is optionally independent of the intensities of the contacts included in the gesture, or the contact performing the gesture. The(s) are detected based on the satisfaction of criteria that do not require reaching intensity thresholds in order to be recognized. For example, the swipe gesture is detected based on an amount of movement of the one or more contacts; a pinch gesture is detected based on movement of two or more contacts towards each other; a de-pinch gesture is detected based on movement of two or more contacts away from each other; The long press gesture is detected based on a duration of contact on the touch-sensitive surface that has less than a threshold amount of movement. As such, a statement that particular gesture recognition criteria does not require that the intensity of the contact(s) meet its respective intensity threshold in order for the particular gesture recognition criteria to be met is that the particular gesture recognition criteria ) may be satisfied if the respective intensity threshold is not reached, and may also be satisfied in situations where one or more of the contacts in the gesture reach or exceed the respective intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the tap gesture is based on determining that a finger-down and finger-up event is detected within a predefined time period, regardless of whether the contact is above or below a respective intensity threshold for a predefined time period. and a swipe gesture is detected based on a determination that the contact movement is greater than a predefined amount, even if the contact exceeds a respective intensity threshold at the end of the contact movement. Implementations in which the detection of the gesture is affected by the strength of the contacts performing the gesture (eg, the device detects the long press more quickly when the strength of the contact is above an strength threshold, or the strength of the contact is higher Even when high, which delays detection of a tap input), detection of such gestures is still possible as long as the criteria for recognizing a gesture can be met (e.g., recognizing a gesture in situations where the contact does not reach a certain intensity threshold). It does not require that contacts reach a specific intensity threshold (even if the time taken to do so changes).

Contact intensity thresholds, duration thresholds, and movement thresholds may, in some circumstances, be configured with the same input element or They are combined in various different combinations to create heuristics for distinguishing between two or more different gestures directed to an area. A statement that a particular set of gesture recognition criteria does not require that the intensity of the contact(s) meet a respective intensity threshold for the particular gesture recognition criteria to be met includes a contact for which the gesture has an intensity above the respective intensity threshold. does not preclude simultaneous evaluation of different intensity-dependent gesture recognition criteria to identify different gestures with criteria met when doing so. For example, in some situations, first gesture recognition criteria for a first gesture, which does not require that the intensity of the contact(s) meet a respective intensity threshold for the first gesture recognition criteria to be met. is in competition with second gesture recognition criteria for a second gesture, which depend on the contact(s) reaching their respective intensity threshold. In such competitions, the gesture is optionally not recognized as meeting the first gesture recognition criteria for the first gesture if the second gesture recognition criteria for the second gesture are first met. For example, if a contact reaches their respective intensity threshold before moving by a predefined amount of movement, a deep press gesture rather than a swipe gesture is detected. Conversely, if the contact moves a predefined amount of movement before reaching its respective intensity threshold, a swipe gesture is detected rather than a deep press gesture. Even in such situations, the first gesture recognition criteria for a first gesture still do not require that the intensity of the contact(s) meet a respective intensity threshold for the first gesture recognition criteria to be met, which means that the contact If the gesture remained below the respective intensity threshold until the end of the (eg, a swipe gesture with a contact that did not increase in intensity above the respective intensity threshold), the gesture would have been recognized as a swipe gesture by the first gesture recognition criteria. because it will As such, certain gesture recognition criteria that do not require that the intensity of the contact(s) meet their respective intensity threshold in order for the specific gesture recognition criteria to be met are: (A) in some situations (e.g., of a tap gesture case) ignores the intensity of the contact relative to the intensity threshold and/or (B) in some situations (eg, for a long press gesture competing with a deep press gesture for recognition) that certain gesture recognition criteria Prior to recognizing a gesture, if a competing set of intensity-dependent gesture recognition criteria (e.g., for a deep press gesture) recognizes an input as corresponding to a force-dependent gesture (e.g., for a long press gesture) It will still depend on the intensity of the contact relative to the intensity threshold in the sense that gesture recognition criteria will fail.

The graphics module 132 is configured to provide graphics on a touch-sensitive display system 112 or other display, including components for changing a visual effect (eg, brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual property) of a displayed graphic. various well-known software components for rendering and displaying As used herein, the term “graphic” includes, without limitation, text, web pages, icons (eg, user interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like. , including any object that can be displayed to the user.

In some embodiments, graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is optionally assigned a corresponding code. Graphics module 132 receives one or more codes from applications, etc. that specify a graphic to be displayed, along with coordinate data and other graphic attribute data, if necessary, and then generates screen image data to display controller 156 . print out

The haptic feedback module 133 is configured to generate tactile outputs using the tactile output generator(s) 167 at one or more locations on the device 100 in response to user interactions with the device 100 . It includes various software components for generating instructions (eg, instructions used by haptic feedback controller 161 ).

The text input module 134 , optionally a component of the graphics module 132 , can be used for various applications (eg, contacts 137 , email 140 , IM 141 , browser 147 , and text input It provides soft keyboards for entering text into any other application).

The GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and uses this information to the phone 138 for use in various applications (eg, in location-based dialing) and the camera as photo/video metadata. 143), and to applications that provide location-based services such as weather widgets, local yellow page widgets and map/navigation widgets).

Applications 136 optionally include the following modules (or sets of instructions), or a subset or superset thereof:

연락처 모듈(137)(때때로 주소록 또는 연락처 목록으로 지칭됨);

Contacts module 137 (sometimes referred to as an address book or contact list);

전화 모듈(138);

phone module 138;

화상 회의 모듈(139);

video conferencing module 139;

이메일 클라이언트 모듈(140);

email client module 140;

인스턴트 메시징(IM) 모듈(141);

an instant messaging (IM) module 141;

운동 지원 모듈(142);

exercise support module 142;

정지 및/또는 비디오 이미지들을 위한 카메라 모듈(143);

a camera module 143 for still and/or video images;

이미지 관리 모듈(144);

image management module 144;

브라우저 모듈(147);

browser module 147;

캘린더 모듈(148);

calendar module 148;

날씨 위젯(149-1), 주식 위젯(149-2), 계산기 위젯(149-3), 알람 시계 위젯(149-4), 사전 위젯(149-5), 및 사용자에 의해 얻어지는 다른 위젯들뿐 아니라 사용자-생성 위젯들(149-6) 중 하나 이상을 선택적으로 포함하는 위젯 모듈들(149);

Weather widget 149-1, stock widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4, dictionary widget 149-5, and other widgets obtained by the user only but also widget modules 149, optionally including one or more of user-created widgets 149-6;

사용자-생성 위젯들(149-6)을 만들기 위한 위젯 생성기 모듈(150);

a widget generator module 150 for creating user-created widgets 149-6;

검색 모듈(151);

search module 151;

비디오 재생기 모듈 및 음악 재생기 모듈로 선택적으로 구성된 비디오 및 음악 재생기 모듈(152);

a video and music player module 152 optionally configured with a video player module and a music player module;

메모 모듈(153);

memo module 153;

지도 모듈(154); 및/또는

map module 154; and/or

온라인 비디오 모듈(155).

Online video module (155).

Examples of other applications 136 optionally stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, presentation applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption , digital rights management, voice recognition and voice replication.

Along with the touch-sensitive display system 112 , the display controller 156 , the contact module 130 , the graphics module 132 , and the text input module 134 , the contacts module 137 may include an address book or contacts executable instructions to manage a list (eg, stored in the application internal state 192 of the contact module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370): to add; deleting name(s) from the address book; associating a name with a phone number(s), email address(es), physical address(es), or other information; associating an image with a name; sorting and sorting names; providing phone numbers and/or email addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communication by phone 138 , video conferencing 139 , email 140 , or IM 141 , and the like.

RF circuitry 108 , audio circuitry 110 , speaker 111 , microphone 113 , touch-sensitive display system 112 , display controller 156 , contact module 130 , graphics module 132 , and In conjunction with the text entry module 134 , the phone module 138 enters a sequence of characters corresponding to a phone number, accesses one or more phone numbers in the address book 137 , modifies the entered phone number, and each Contains executable commands to dial the phone number of a user, initiate a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is complete. As noted above, wireless communications optionally use any of a plurality of communication standards, protocols and technologies.

RF circuitry 108 , audio circuitry 110 , speaker 111 , microphone 113 , touch-sensitive display system 112 , display controller 156 , optical sensor(s) 164 , optical sensor controller ( 158 ), along with contact module 130 , graphics module 132 , text input module 134 , contact list 137 and phone module 138 , video conferencing module 139 communicates with the user according to user instructions. and executable instructions for initiating, conducting, and terminating a video conference between one or more other participants.

Along with RF circuitry 108 , touch-sensitive display system 112 , display controller 156 , contact module 130 , graphics module 132 , and text input module 134 , email client module 140 is a user and executable instructions for composing, sending, receiving, and managing email in response to the instructions. Together with the image management module 144 , the email client module 140 greatly facilitates creating and sending emails with still or video images captured with the camera module 143 .

The instant messaging module 141, along with the RF circuitry 108, the touch-sensitive display system 112, the display controller 156, the contact module 130, the graphics module 132, and the text input module 134, Enter a sequence of characters corresponding to an instant message, modify previously entered characters (eg, a Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Message Service (MMS) for phone-based instant messages); Executable to send each instant message, receive instant messages and view received instant messages using XMPP, SIMPLE, APNs (Apple Push Notification Service) or IMPS protocol or using XMPP, SIMPLE, APNs (Apple Push Notification Service) for Internet based instant messages contains commands. In some embodiments, transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files and/or other attachments as supported by MMS and/or Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, “instant messaging” refers to phone-based messages (eg, messages sent using SMS or MMS) and internet-based messages (eg, using XMPP, SIMPLE, APNs, or IMPS). messages that are transmitted).

RF circuitry 108 , touch sensitive display system 112 , display controller 156 , contact module 130 , graphics module 132 , text input module 134 , GPS module 135 , map module 154 . ), and in conjunction with the video and music player module 152 , the exercise support module 142 devises exercises (eg, along with time, distance, and/or calorie expenditure goals); communicate with motion sensors (in sports devices and smart watches); receive motion sensor data; calibrate sensors used to monitor movement; select and play music for exercise; executable instructions to display, store, and transmit athletic data.

a touch-sensitive display system 112 , a display controller 156 , an optical sensor(s) 164 , an optical sensor controller 158 , a contact module 130 , a graphics module 132 , and an image management module 144 ; Together, the camera module 143 captures still images or video (including a video stream) and stores them in the memory 102 , modifies characteristics of the still image or video, and/or the memory 102 ) to delete a still image or video from

Along with the touch-sensitive display system 112 , the display controller 156 , the contact module 130 , the graphics module 132 , the text input module 134 , and the camera module 143 , the image management module 144 is stopped. and/or executable instructions to arrange, modify (eg, edit), or otherwise manipulate, label, delete, present (eg, in a digital slide show or album), and store video images do.

With RF circuitry 108 , touch-sensitive display system 112 , display system controller 156 , contact module 130 , graphics module 132 and text input module 134 , browser module 147 includes: Execution to browse the Internet according to user instructions, including retrieving, linking to, receiving, and displaying web pages or portions thereof, as well as attachments and other files linked to web pages Includes possible commands.

RF circuitry 108 , touch-sensitive display system 112 , display system controller 156 , contact module 130 , graphics module 132 , text input module 134 , email client module 140 , and browser In conjunction with module 147 , calendar module 148 creates, displays, modifies, and stores calendars and data associated with calendars (eg, calendar entries, to-do lists, etc.) according to user instructions. Contains executable instructions to make

Widget, along with RF circuitry 108 , touch-sensitive display system 112 , display system controller 156 , contact module 130 , graphics module 132 , text input module 134 and browser module 147 . Modules 149 are optionally downloaded and used by the user (eg, weather widget 149-1, stock widget 149-2, calculator widget 149-3, alarm clock widget 149-4). and dictionary widget 149-5), or mini-applications created by the user (eg, user-created widget 149-6). In some embodiments, the widget includes a Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) file, a Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, a widget includes an Extensible Markup Language (XML) file and a JavaScript file (eg, Yahoo! widgets).

Widget, along with RF circuitry 108 , touch-sensitive display system 112 , display system controller 156 , contact module 130 , graphics module 132 , text input module 134 and browser module 147 . The generator module 150 includes executable instructions to create widgets (eg, change a user-specified portion of a web page into a widget).

Together with the touch-sensitive display system 112 , the display system controller 156 , the contact module 130 , the graphics module 132 , and the text input module 134 , the search module 151 may be configured to perform one or more functions according to user instructions. executable instructions to search for text, music, sound, image, video, and/or other files in memory 102 that match search criteria (eg, one or more user-specific search terms).

Touch-sensitive display system 112 , display system controller 156 , contact module 130 , graphics module 132 , audio circuitry 110 , speaker 111 , RF circuitry 108 , and browser module 147 . ), the video and music player module 152 generates executable instructions that allow a user to download and play recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats, such as MP3 or AAC files, and videos. executable instructions to display, present, or otherwise play (eg, on touch-sensitive display system 112 , or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 124 ). In some embodiments, device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player, such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).

Along with the touch-sensitive display system 112 , the display controller 156 , the contact module 130 , the graphics module 132 and the text input module 134 , the memo module 153 is configured to take notes according to user instructions; Contains executable instructions for creating and managing to-do lists and the like.

RF circuitry 108 , touch-sensitive display system 112 , display system controller 156 , contact module 130 , graphics module 132 , text input module 134 , GPS module 135 , and browser module In conjunction with 147 , the map module 154 provides maps and data associated with the maps (eg, driving directions; to shops and other points of interest at or near a specific location) according to user instructions. data; and other location-based data).

Touch-sensitive display system 112 , display system controller 156 , contact module 130 , graphics module 132 , audio circuitry 110 , speaker 111 , RF circuitry 108 , text input module 134 . ), email client module 140, and browser module 147, online video module 155, allows a user to access, browse online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264, (e.g., Receive (eg, by streaming and/or download), play (eg, on touch screen 112 , or on an external display connected wirelessly or via external port 124 ), and with specific online video Sends an email with a link to and contains executable commands that allow it to be managed otherwise. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 141 rather than email client module 140 is used to send a link to a particular online video.

Each of the modules and applications identified above includes executable instructions for performing one or more of the functions described above and the methods described herein (eg, the computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). corresponding to a set of These modules (ie, sets of instructions) need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules are optionally combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. . In some embodiments, memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. In addition, the memory 102 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

In some embodiments, device 100 is a device in which operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively via a touch screen and/or touchpad. By using a touch screen and/or touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 100 , the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, etc.) on device 100 is selectively reduced.

The predefined set of functions performed entirely via the touch screen and/or touchpad optionally include navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by a user, navigates device 100 to a main, home, or root menu from any user interface displayed on device 100 . In these embodiments, a “menu button” is implemented using a touchpad. In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device instead of a touchpad.

1B is a block diagram illustrating example components for event processing, in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 ( FIG. 1A ) or 370 ( FIG. 3 ) includes event classifier 170 (eg, in operating system 126 ) and respective application 136 - 1 (eg, above applications 136, any of 137-155, 380-390).

The event classifier 170 receives the event information, and determines an application 136 - 1 to which to forward the event information, and an application view 191 of the application 136 - 1 . The event sorter 170 includes an event monitor 171 and an event dispatcher module 174 . In some embodiments, application 136 - 1 includes an application internal state 192 representing the current application view(s) displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112 when the application is active or running. In some embodiments, device/global internal state 157 is used by event classifier 170 to determine which application(s) is currently active, and application internal state 192 is sent to event classifier 170 It is used to determine the application views 191 to which the event information by the

In some embodiments, application internal state 192 is a user indicating resume information to be used when application 136 - 1 resumes execution, information being displayed by application 136 - 1 or ready to be displayed. Interface state information, a state queue to enable the user to return to a previous state or view of the application 136 - 1 , and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user. Include additional information, such as one or more.

The event monitor 171 receives event information from the peripheral interface 118 . The event information includes information about a subevent (eg, a user touch on the touch-sensitive display system 112 as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripheral interface 118 is from I/O subsystem 106 or sensors, such as proximity sensor 166 , accelerometer(s) 168 , and/or microphone 113 (via audio circuitry 110 ). Transmits the information it receives. Information that peripherals interface 118 receives from I/O subsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive display system 112 or a touch-sensitive surface.

In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to peripherals interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (eg, receiving input exceeding a predetermined noise threshold and/or input for exceeding a predetermined duration). .

In some embodiments, the event classifier 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 173 .

Hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures for determining where a subevent occurred within one or more views when touch-sensitive display system 112 displays more than one view. Views are made up of controls and other elements that the user can see on the display.

Another aspect of a user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes referred to herein as application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of each application) for which touch is detected optionally correspond to program levels in the application's program or view hierarchy. For example, the lowest-level view in which a touch is detected is optionally referred to as a hit view, and the set of events recognized as appropriate inputs is, optionally, based at least in part on the hit view of the initial touch that initiates the touch-based gesture. is decided

The hit view determination module 172 receives information related to sub-events of the touch-based gesture. If the application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172 identifies the hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy that should handle the subevent. In most situations, the hit view is the lowest level view in which the initiated subevent (ie, the first subevent in the sequence of subevents forming the event or potential event) occurs. Once a hit view is identified by the hit view determination module, the hit view typically receives all subevents related to the same touch or input source that caused it to be identified as the hit view.

The active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views within the view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of subevents. In some embodiments, the active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of subevents. In other embodiments, the active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that all views including the physical location of the subevent are actively involved views, so that all actively involved views are specific to the subevents. It decides that it should receive the sequence. In other embodiments, even if the touch subevents are exclusively confined to the area associated with one particular view, the top views in the hierarchy will still remain as actively engaged views.

The event dispatcher module 174 dispatches event information to an event recognizer (eg, event recognizer 180 ). In embodiments that include an active event recognizer determination module 173 , the event dispatcher module 174 communicates event information to the event recognizer determined by the active event recognizer determination module 173 . In some embodiments, the event dispatcher module 174 stores event information in an event queue, which event information is fetched by each event receiver module 182 .

In some embodiments, operating system 126 includes event classifier 170 . Alternatively, application 136 - 1 includes event classifier 170 . In still other embodiments, event classifier 170 is a standalone module or is part of another module stored in memory 102 , such as contact/motion module 130 .

In some embodiments, application 136 - 1 includes a plurality of event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191 , each of which is a touch event occurring within a respective view of the application's user interface. Includes instructions for processing them. Each application view 191 of application 136 - 1 includes one or more event recognizers 180 . Typically, each application view 191 includes a plurality of event recognizers 180 . In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers 180 may be part of a separate module, such as a user interface kit (not shown) or a higher-level object from which application 136-1 inherits methods and other properties. am. In some embodiments, each event handler 190 is one of data updater 176 , object updater 177 , GUI updater 178 , and/or event data 179 received from event classifier 170 . includes more than Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 , object updater 177 , or GUI updater 178 to update application internal state 192 . Alternatively, one or more of the application views 191 include one or more respective event handlers 190 . Also, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater 176 , object updater 177 , and GUI updater 178 are included within each application view 191 .

Each event recognizer 180 receives event information (eg, event data 179 ) from the event classifier 170 and identifies an event from the event information. The event recognizer 180 includes an event receiver 182 and an event comparator 184 . In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 also includes at least a subset of metadata 183 and event delivery instructions 188 (optionally including subevent delivery instructions).

The event receiver 182 receives event information from the event classifier 170 . The event information includes information about a sub-event, for example, a touch or a touch movement. Depending on the subevent, the event information also includes additional information such as the location of the subevent. If the sub-event relates to motion of the touch, the event information also optionally includes the speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, the events include rotation of the device from one orientation to another (eg, from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes the current orientation of the device (also referred to as device pose). ) and corresponding information about

The event comparator 184 compares the event information to predefined event or subevent definitions, and based on the comparison, determines an event or subevent, or determines or updates the status of the event or subevent. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 includes event definitions 186 . Event definitions 186 include definitions of events (eg, predefined sequences of sub-events), eg, Event 1 187-1, Event 2 187-2, and the like. In some embodiments, subevents within event 187 include, for example, touch start, touch end, touch move, touch cancel, and multi-touch. In one example, the definition for event 1 187 - 1 is a double tap on the displayed object. A double tap is, for example, a first touch (touch start) on a displayed object during a predetermined phase, a first liftoff (touch end) during a predetermined phase, a displayed object during a predetermined phase a second touch on the upper body (touch start), and a second liftoff (touch end) for a predetermined phase. In another example, the definition for event 2 187 - 2 is dragging on the displayed object. Dragging includes, for example, a touch (or contact) on the displayed object for a predetermined phase, movement of the touch across the touch-sensitive display system 112 , and liftoff of the touch (touch termination). In some embodiments, the event also includes information about one or more associated event handlers 190 .

In some embodiments, event definition 187 includes a definition of an event for each user interface object. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user interface object is associated with a subevent. For example, in an application view in which three user interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112 , if a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display system 112 , event comparator 184 may A hit test is performed to determine which of the interface objects is associated with a touch (subevent). When each displayed object is associated with a respective event handler 190, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, the event comparator 184 selects an event handler associated with the object and subevent that triggers the hit test.

In some embodiments, the definition for each event 187 also includes deferred actions of delaying delivery of event information until after it is determined whether the sequence of subevents corresponds to or does not correspond to an event type of the event recognizer. .

If each event recognizer 180 determines that the set of sub-events does not match any of the events in event definitions 186 , each event recognizer 180 determines that the event is impossible, event failed, or An event end state is entered, after which each event recognizer ignores subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture. In this situation, other event recognizers that remain active for the hit view, if any, continue to track and process sub-events of the touch-based gesture in progress.

In some embodiments, each event recognizer 180 includes configurable attributes, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform subevent delivery to actively participating event recognizers. and metadata 183 with In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable attributes, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact with, or become interactive, with each other. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether subevents are delivered to various levels in the view or program hierarchy.

In some embodiments, each event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the event when one or more specific subevents of the event are recognized. In some embodiments, each event recognizer 180 passes event information associated with the event to an event handler 190 . Activating the event handler 190 is separate from sending (and delayed sending) subevents to each hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 sends a flag associated with the recognized event, and event handler 190 associated with the flag catches the flag and performs a predefined process.

In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 188 include subevent delivery instructions that deliver event information about a subevent without activating an event handler. Instead, subevent delivery instructions pass event information to event handlers associated with a series of subevents or to actively engaged views. Event handlers associated with a series of subevents or actively engaged views receive event information and perform a predetermined process.

In some embodiments, data updater 176 creates and updates data used in application 136 - 1 . For example, the data updater 176 updates a phone number used in the contact module 137 or stores a video file used in the video and music player module 152 . In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates and updates objects used in application 136 - 1 . For example, the object updater 177 creates a new user interface object or updates the location of the user interface object. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 178 prepares display information for display on a touch-sensitive display and sends it to graphics module 132 .

In some embodiments, event handler(s) 190 includes or accesses data updater 176 , object updater 177 , and GUI updater 178 . In some embodiments, data updater 176 , object updater 177 , and GUI updater 178 are included within a single module of each application 136 - 1 or application view 191 . In other embodiments, they are included within two or more software modules.

The discussion above regarding event handling of user touches on a touch-sensitive display also applies to other forms of user inputs for operating multifunction devices 100 having input devices, but all of which are initiated on touch screens. You have to understand that it is not. mouse movement and mouse button presses optionally coordinated with, for example, single or multiple keyboard presses or holds; contact movements, such as tap, drag, scroll, etc., on the touchpad; pen stylus inputs; movement of the device; verbal commands; detected eye movements; biometric inputs; and/or any combination thereof is optionally used as inputs corresponding to subevents defining the event to be recognized.

1C is a block diagram illustrating a tactile output module in accordance with some embodiments. In some embodiments, I/O subsystem 106 (eg, haptic feedback controller 161 ( FIG. 1A ) and/or other input controller(s) 160 ( FIG. 1A )) may be configured as shown in FIG. 1C . It includes at least some of the example components. In some embodiments, peripherals interface 118 includes at least some of the example components shown in FIG. 1C .

In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes a haptic feedback module 133 . In some embodiments, the haptic feedback module 133 provides user interface feedback from software applications on the electronic device (eg, alerts and other notifications indicating the occurrence of events or performance of actions in user interfaces of the electronic device and Gathers and combines tactile outputs (feedback in response to user inputs corresponding to displayed user interfaces). The haptic feedback module 133 includes a waveform module 123 (for providing waveforms used to generate tactile outputs), a mixer 125 (for mixing waveforms, such as waveforms in different channels), Compressor 127 (for reducing or compressing the dynamic range of waveforms), low-pass filter 129 (for filtering high frequency signal components in the waveforms), and (for adjusting waveforms according to thermal conditions) ) thermal controller 131 . In some embodiments, the haptic feedback module 133 is included within the haptic feedback controller 161 ( FIG. 1A ). In some embodiments, a separate unit of haptic feedback module 133 (or a separate implementation of haptic feedback module 133 ) is also included within the audio controller (eg, audio circuitry 110 , FIG. 1A ) and includes audio used to generate signals. In some embodiments, a single haptic feedback module 133 is used to generate waveforms for tactile outputs and to generate audio signals.

In some embodiments, haptic feedback module 133 may also include trigger module 121 (eg, a software application, operating system, or other software modules). In some embodiments, trigger module 121 generates trigger signals to initiate generation of waveforms (eg, by waveform module 123 ). For example, the trigger module 121 generates trigger signals based on preset timing criteria. In some embodiments, the trigger module 121 receives trigger signals from outside of the haptic feedback module 133 (eg, in some embodiments, the haptic feedback module 133 is outside of the haptic feedback module 133 ) Receive trigger signals from a hardware input processing module 146 located in ), send trigger signals to a user interface element (eg, affordance in an application or application icon) or a hardware input device (eg, an intensity-sensitive touch screen, such as an intensity-sensitive touch screen). Software applications or other components within haptic feedback module 133 (eg, waveform module 123 ) that trigger actions (eg, using trigger module 121 ) based on activation of an input surface or home button) relayed by In some embodiments, the trigger module 121 also receives tactile feedback generation instructions (eg, from the haptic feedback module 133 of FIGS. 1A and 3 ). In some embodiments, the trigger module 121 (eg, from the haptic feedback module 133 of FIGS. 1A and 3 ) is the haptic feedback module 133 (or the trigger module 121 in the haptic feedback module 133 ). It generates trigger signals in response to receiving these tactile feedback commands.

Waveform module 123 receives trigger signals as input (eg, from trigger module 121 ), and in response to receiving the trigger signals, generates waveforms (eg, FIG. 4F and waveforms selected from a predefined set of waveforms designated for use by waveform module 123 , such as those described in more detail below with reference to FIG. 4G .

Mixer 125 receives waveforms as input (eg, from waveform module 123 ) and mixes the waveforms together. For example, when mixer 125 receives two or more waveforms (eg, a first waveform in a first channel, and a second waveform that at least partially overlaps with the first waveform in a second channel), the mixer 125 outputs a combined waveform corresponding to the summation of two or more waveforms. In some embodiments, mixer 125 also converts the particular waveform(s) to the remainder of the two or more waveforms (eg, by increasing the scale of the particular waveform(s) and/or decreasing the scale of the other of the waveforms). Modifies one or more of the two or more waveforms for emphasis in comparison. In some situations, mixer 125 selects one or more waveforms to remove from the combined waveform (eg, waveforms from more than three sources that have been requested to be output simultaneously by tactile output generator 167 are When present, the waveform from the oldest source is dropped).

Compressor 127 receives waveforms (eg, a combined waveform from mixer 125 ) as input and modifies the waveforms. In some embodiments, compressor 127 reduces waveforms (eg, according to the physical specifications of tactile output generators 167 of FIG. 1A or 357 of FIG. 3 ), such that a tactile corresponding waveform is causes the outputs to be reduced. In some embodiments, compressor 127 limits the waveforms, such as by forcing a predefined maximum amplitude for the waveforms. For example, compressor 127 reduces amplitudes of portions of waveforms that exceed a predefined amplitude threshold while maintaining amplitudes of portions of waveforms that do not exceed a predefined amplitude threshold. In some embodiments, compressor 127 reduces the dynamic range of the waveforms. In some embodiments, the compressor 127 dynamically reduces the dynamic range of the waveforms so that the combined waveforms meet the performance specifications of the tactile output generator 167 (eg, force and/or movable mass displacement limits). to be kept within

Low pass filter 129 receives waveforms (eg, compressed waveforms from compressor 127 ) as input, and filters (eg, smoothes) the waveforms (eg, removes high frequency signal components in the waveforms) or decrease). For example, in some cases, compressor 127, with compressed waveforms, exceeds performance specifications of tactile output generator 167 and/or tactile outputs when tactile outputs are generated according to the compressed waveforms. Includes extraneous signals (eg, high frequency signal components) that interfere with the generation of the outputs. Low pass filter 129 reduces or removes such extraneous signals in the waveforms.

Thermal controller 131 receives waveforms (eg, filtered waveforms from low pass filter 129 ) as input, and (eg, internal temperatures detected within device 100 , such as a haptic feedback controller ( Adjust the waveforms according to the thermal conditions of the device 100 (based on the temperature of 161 , and/or external temperatures detected by the device 100 ). For example, in some cases, the output of the haptic feedback controller 161 changes with temperature (eg, in response to receiving the same waveforms, the haptic feedback controller 161 causes the first generate a first tactile output when at a temperature, and the haptic feedback controller 161 generates a second tactile output when at a second temperature separate from the first temperature). For example, the magnitude (or amplitude) of the tactile outputs may change with temperature. To reduce the effect of temperature changes, the waveforms are modified (eg, the amplitude of the waveforms is increased or decreased based on the temperature).

In some embodiments, the haptic feedback module 133 (eg, the trigger module 121 ) is coupled to the hardware input processing module 146 . In some embodiments, the other input controller(s) 160 in FIG. 1A includes a hardware input processing module 146 . In some embodiments, the hardware input processing module 146 is configured with a hardware input device 145 (eg, other input or control devices 116 in FIG. 1A , such as an intensity-sensitive input surface, such as an intensity-sensitive touch screen). or home button). In some embodiments, hardware input device 145 may be any input device described herein, such as touch-sensitive display system 112 ( FIG. 1A ), keyboard/mouse 350 ( FIG. 3 ), touchpad. 355 ( FIG. 3 ), one of the other input or control devices 116 ( FIG. 1A ), or an intensity-sensitive home button. In some embodiments, the hardware input device 145 is not the touch-sensitive display system 112 ( FIG. 1A ), the keyboard/mouse 350 ( FIG. 3 ), or the touchpad 355 ( FIG. 3 ); It consists of a force-sensitive home button. In some embodiments, in response to inputs from a hardware input device 145 (eg, an intensity-sensitive home button or touch screen), the hardware input processing module 146 configures the user to satisfy predefined input criteria. One or more trigger signals are provided to the haptic feedback module 133 to indicate that an input corresponding to an input, eg, a “click” (eg, a “down click” or an “up click”) of the home button has been detected. In some embodiments, the haptic feedback module 133 provides waveforms corresponding to a “click” of the home button in response to an input corresponding to a “click” of the home button, simulating haptic feedback of pressing the physical home button. do.

In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes a haptic feedback controller 161 (eg, haptic feedback controller 161 in FIG. 1A ), which controls the generation of tactile outputs. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 is coupled to a plurality of tactile output generators and is configured to select one or more of the plurality of tactile output generators to generate tactile outputs. Send the waveforms to the selected one or more tactile output generators. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 provides tactile output requests corresponding to activation of hardware input device 145 and tactile output requests corresponding to software events (eg, a haptic feedback module (eg, haptic feedback module) 133), and (eg, to prioritize tactile outputs corresponding to activation of hardware input device 145 over tactile outputs corresponding to software events) , by increasing the scale of the particular waveform(s) and/or decreasing the scale of the rest of the waveforms) make corrections

In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 1C , the output of the haptic feedback controller 161 is coupled to audio circuitry of the device 100 (eg, the audio circuitry 110 of FIG. 1A ) and generates audio signals. It is provided in the audio circuit unit of the device 100 . In some embodiments, the haptic feedback controller 161 provides both the waveforms used to generate the tactile outputs and the audio signals used to provide the audio outputs in conjunction with the generation of the tactile outputs. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 modifies audio signals and/or waveforms (used to generate tactile outputs), thereby delaying audio signals and/or waveforms (eg, by delaying audio signals and/or waveforms). Let the outputs and tactile outputs be synchronized. In some embodiments, haptic feedback controller 161 includes a digital-to-analog converter used to convert digital waveforms to analog signals, which analog signals include amplifier 163 and/or tactile output generator 167 ) is received by

In some embodiments, the haptic output module includes an amplifier 163 . In some embodiments, amplifier 163 receives waveforms (eg, from haptic feedback controller 161 ), amplifies the waveforms, and then converts the amplified waveforms to tactile output generator 167 (eg, tactile output). to the generators (any of 167 in FIG. 1A or 357 in FIG. 3). For example, the amplifier 163 converts the received waveforms to signal levels conforming to the physical specifications of the tactile output generator 167 (eg, the signals transmitted to the tactile output generator 167 , the haptic feedback controller ( amplify (with a voltage and/or current required by tactile output generator 167 to generate tactile outputs) to generate tactile outputs corresponding to the waveforms received from 161; to the output generator 167 . In response, tactile output generator 167 generates tactile outputs (eg, by shifting the movable mass back and forth in one or more dimensions relative to the neutral position of the movable mass).

In some embodiments, the tactile output module includes a sensor 169 , which is coupled to a tactile output generator 167 . The sensor 169 is the tactile output generator 167 or one or more components of the tactile output generator 167 (eg, one or more moving parts, such as a membrane used to generate the tactile outputs). Detect states or state changes (eg, mechanical position, physical displacement, and/or movement). In some embodiments, sensor 169 is a magnetic field sensor (eg, a Hall effect sensor) or other displacement and/or movement sensor. In some embodiments, sensor 169 provides information (eg, position, displacement, and/or movement of one or more components within tactile output generator 167 ) to haptic feedback controller 161 , and a tactile output In accordance with the information provided by the sensor 169 regarding the state of the generator 167 , the haptic feedback controller 161 generates waveforms output from the haptic feedback controller 161 (eg, optionally via the amplifier 163 , the tactile sense). waveforms sent to the redundancy output generator 167).

2 illustrates portable multifunction device 100 having a touch screen (eg, touch-sensitive display system 112 , FIG. 1A ), in accordance with some embodiments. The touch screen, optionally, displays one or more graphics within user interface (UI) 200 . In these embodiments, as well as other embodiments described below, the user may, for example, use one or more fingers 202 (not to scale in the figures) or one or more styluses 203 (in the figures to scale). It becomes possible to select one or more of the graphics by making a gesture on the graphic using (not shown). In some embodiments, selection of the one or more graphics occurs when the user ceases to contact the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture may optionally include one or more taps of a finger in contact with device 100 , one or more swipes (left to right, right to left, up and/or down). , and/or rolling (right to left, left to right, up and/or down). In some implementations or situations, if inadvertently contacted with a graphic, the graphic is not selected. For example, when the gesture corresponding to the selection is a tap, the swipe gesture to sweep over the application icon optionally does not select the corresponding application.

Device 100 also optionally includes one or more physical buttons, such as a “home” or menu button 204 . As described above, the menu button 204 is optionally used to navigate to any application 136 in the set of applications that are selectively running on the device 100 . Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on a touch screen display.

In some embodiments, device 100 includes a touch screen display, a menu button 204 (sometimes called home button 204), a push button 206 for powering on/off the device and locking the device; volume control button(s) 208 , a subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot 210 , a headset jack 212 , and a docking/charging external port 124 . Push button 206 optionally powers on/off the device by pressing the button and holding the button depressed for a predefined time interval; lock the device by pressing the button and releasing the button before a predefined time interval elapses; Used to unlock a device or initiate an unlock process. In some embodiments, device 100 also accepts verbal input for activation or deactivation of some functions via microphone 113 . Device 100 may also optionally include one or more contact intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensities of contacts on touch-sensitive display system 112 and/or a tactile output for a user of device 100 . one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating

3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, in accordance with some embodiments. Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 300 is a laptop computer, desktop computer, tablet computer, multimedia player device, navigation device, educational device (such as a children's learning toy), gaming system, or control device (eg, home or industrial). controller). Device 300 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 310 , one or more network or other communication interfaces 360 , memory 370 , and one or more communication buses to interconnect these components ( 320). Communication buses 320 optionally include circuitry (sometimes referred to as a chipset) that interconnects system components and controls communication between them. Device 300 includes an input/output (I/O) interface 330 that includes a display 340 that is typically a touch screen display. I/O interface 330 may also, optionally, a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and touchpad 355 , tactile output for generating tactile outputs on device 300 . Generator 357 (eg, similar to tactile output generator(s) 167 described above with reference to FIG. 1A ), and sensors 359 (eg, light sensor, acceleration sensor, proximity sensor, touch sensitive) sensor, and/or a contact intensity sensor similar to the contact intensity sensor(s) 165 described above with reference to FIG. 1A . memory 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid state memory devices; optionally including non-volatile memory such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices located remotely from CPU(s) 310 . In some embodiments, memory 370 includes programs, modules, and data structures similar to programs, modules, and data structures stored in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 ( FIG. 1A ). , or a subset thereof. In addition, memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 . For example, memory 370 of device 300 may optionally include drawing module 380 , presentation module 382 , word processing module 384 , website creation module 386 , and disk authoring module 388 . ), and/or spreadsheet module 390 , while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 ( FIG. 1A ), optionally, does not store these modules.

Each of the previously identified elements in FIG. 3 is optionally stored in one or more of the aforementioned memory devices. Each of the modules identified above corresponds to a set of instructions for performing the functions described above. The modules or programs (ie, sets of instructions) identified above need not be implemented as separate software programs, procedures or modules, and thus various subsets of these modules may be selectively combined in various embodiments in various embodiments. or otherwise rearranged. In some embodiments, memory 370 optionally stores a subset of the modules and data structures identified above. Also, memory 370 optionally stores additional modules and data structures not described above.

Attention is now directed to embodiments of user interfaces (“UIs”) that are optionally implemented on portable multifunction device 100 .

4A illustrates an example user interface 400 for a menu of applications on portable multifunction device 100 in accordance with some embodiments. Similar user interfaces are optionally implemented on device 300 . In some embodiments, user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:

셀룰러 및 Wi-Fi 신호들과 같은 무선 통신(들)에 대한 신호 강도 표시자(들);

signal strength indicator(s) for wireless communication(s), such as cellular and Wi-Fi signals;

시간;

time;

블루투스 표시자;

bluetooth indicator;

배터리 상태 표시자;

battery status indicator;

다음과 같은, 빈번하게 사용되는 애플리케이션들에 대한 아이콘들을 갖는 트레이(408):

Tray 408 with icons for frequently used applications, such as:

o an icon 416 for the phone module 138 labeled “Call” optionally including an indicator 414 of a number of missed calls or voicemail messages;

o an icon 418 for the email client module 140 labeled "Mail" optionally including an indicator 410 of the number of unread emails;

o icon 420 for browser module 147 labeled “Browser”; and

o icon 422 for video and music player module 152 labeled "Music"; and

다음과 같은, 다른 애플리케이션들에 대한 아이콘들:

Icons for different applications, such as:

o icon 424 for IM module 141 labeled "Message";

o icon 426 for calendar module 148 labeled “Calendar”;

o icon 428 for image management module 144 labeled “Photos”;

o icon 430 for camera module 143 labeled “Camera”;

o icon 432 for online video module 155 labeled “Online Video”;

o icon 434 for stock widget 149-2 labeled "Stocks";

o icon 436 for map module 154 labeled “Map”;

o icon 438 for weather widget 149-1 labeled “weather”;

o icon 440 for alarm clock widget 149-4 labeled "Clock";

o icon 442 for workout support module 142 labeled “exercise support”;

o icon 444 for notes module 153 labeled “Notes”; and

o Icon 446 for a settings application or module that provides access to settings for device 100 and its various applications 136 .

It should be noted that the icon labels illustrated in FIG. 4A are merely examples. For example, different labels are optionally used for various application icons. In some embodiments, the label for each application icon includes the name of the application corresponding to each application icon. In some embodiments, the label for a particular application icon is separate from the name of the application corresponding to the particular application icon.

4B illustrates an exemplary user interface on a device (eg, device 300 , FIG. 3 ) having a touch-sensitive surface 451 (eg, tablet or touchpad 355 , FIG. 3 ) separate from display 450 . to exemplify Although many of the examples that follow will be provided with reference to inputs on a touch screen display 112 (a touch-sensitive surface and display combined), in some embodiments, the device is separate from the display as shown in FIG. 4B . Detect inputs on a personal touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (eg, 451 in FIG. 4B ) has a major axis (eg, 452 in FIG. 4B ) that corresponds to a major axis (eg, 453 in FIG. 4B ) on the display (eg, 450 ). According to these embodiments, the device is located on the touch-sensitive surface 451 at locations corresponding to respective locations on the display (eg, in FIG. 4B , 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470). Detect contacts (eg, 460 and 462 in FIG. 4B ). In this way, user inputs (eg, contacts 460 , 462 and their movements) detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (eg, 451 in FIG. 4B ) can be detected when the touch-sensitive surface is separate from the display. used to manipulate a user interface on the display (eg, 450 in FIG. 4B ) of the multifunction device by the device when . It should be understood that similar methods are, optionally, used with other user interfaces described herein.

Additionally, while the following examples are given primarily with reference to finger inputs (eg, finger contacts, finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures, etc.), in some embodiments, one or more of the finger inputs are another input. It should be understood that input from the device is replaced (eg, mouse-based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is optionally replaced with a mouse click (eg, instead of a contact) and subsequent movement of the cursor along the path of the swipe (eg, instead of movement of the contact). As another example, the tap gesture is optionally replaced with a mouse click while the cursor is positioned over the location of the tap gesture (eg, instead of ceasing to detect the contact following detection of the contact). Similarly, when multiple user inputs are detected simultaneously, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are selectively used simultaneously, or mouse and finger contacts are selectively used concurrently.

As used herein, the term “focus selector” refers to an input element that represents the current portion of a user interface with which the user is interacting. In some implementations that include a cursor or other location marker, a touch-sensitive surface (eg, FIG. 3 ) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (eg, a button, window, slider, or other user interface element) When an input (eg, a press input) is detected on the touchpad 355 of the or touch-sensitive surface 451 of FIG. 4B ), the cursor becomes a "focus selector" such that a particular user interface element is adjusted according to the detected input. function as In some implementations, including a touch screen display (eg, the touch-sensitive display system 112 of FIG. 1A or the touch screen of FIG. 4A ) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch screen display, When an input (eg, a touch input) is detected on a touch screen display at the location of a particular user interface element (eg, a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element responds to the detected input. A contact detected on the touch screen serves as a “focus selector” to be adjusted accordingly. In some implementations, focus is moved to one of the user interfaces without movement of a corresponding cursor or contact or movement of a corresponding cursor on the touch screen display (eg, by using a tab key or an arrow key to move focus from one button to another). moved from one area of the user interface to another area of the user interface; In such implementations, the focus selector moves in response to movement of focus between different areas of the user interface. Irrespective of the particular form a focus selector has, a focus selector generally uses a user interface to convey the user's intended interaction with the user interface (eg, by indicating to the device an element of the user interface with which the user wants to interact). A user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) controlled by For example, while a press input is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (eg, a touchpad or touch screen), the position of a focus selector (eg, cursor, contact, or selection box) over each button (eg, on the device's display) It will indicate that the user is about to activate the respective button (unlike other user interface elements shown).

As used in the specification and claims, the term “strength” of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (eg, finger contact or stylus contact) on the touch-sensitive surface. , or a substitute (surrogate) for the force or pressure of contact on a touch-sensitive surface. The intensity of the contact has a range of values including at least four distinct values and more typically including hundreds (eg, at least 256) distinct values. The intensity of the contact is optionally determined (or measured) using various approaches, and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors below or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are optionally used to measure force at various points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (eg, weighted averaged or summed) to determine an estimated force of a contact. Similarly, a pressure-sensitive tip of the stylus is optionally used to determine the pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size and/or changes thereto of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface, the capacitance and/or changes thereto of the touch-sensitive surface in the vicinity of the contact, and/or the touch-sensitive surface in the vicinity of the contact The resistance and/or changes thereto are optionally used as a substitute for the force or pressure of contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some implementations, the surrogate measurements for contact force or pressure are used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (eg, the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the surrogate measurements). In some implementations, alternative measurements for contact force or pressure are converted to an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (eg, an intensity threshold). is the pressure threshold measured in units of pressure). Using the intensity of the contact as an attribute of the user input may not otherwise display affordances (eg, on a touch-sensitive display) and/or (eg, a touch-sensitive display, a touch-sensitive surface, or User access to additional device functionality that may not be readily accessible by the user on a reduced size device with a limited footprint to receive user input (via a physical/mechanical control such as a knob or button) makes it possible

In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 is a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an action was performed by a user (eg, to determine whether a user "clicked" on an icon). use In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined according to software parameters (eg, the intensity thresholds are not determined by activation thresholds of specific physical actuators, but changing the physical hardware of the device 100 ) can be adjusted without). For example, the mouse "click" threshold of a trackpad or touch screen display may be set to any of a wide range of predefined threshold values without changing the trackpad or touch screen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations, a user of the device (eg, by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting a plurality of intensity thresholds at once with a system level click "intensity" parameter) can select one of a set of intensity thresholds. Software settings are provided to adjust the anomaly.

As used in the specification and claims, the term “characteristic intensity” of a contact refers to a property of a contact based on one or more intensities of the contact. In some embodiments, the feature intensity is based on multiple intensity samples. The characteristic intensity is optionally determined by a predefined number of intensity samples, or (eg, after detecting the contact, before detecting liftoff of the contact, before or after detecting the start of movement of the contact; A predetermined period of time (eg, before or after detecting an end of the contact, before or after detecting an increase in the intensity of the contact, and/or before or after detecting a decrease in the intensity of the contact) for the predefined event. 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 seconds). The characteristic intensity of the contact is, optionally, a maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a mean value of the intensities of the contact, an average value of the intensities of the contact, a top 10 percentile value of the intensities of the contact. ), a value of half the maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a value of 90 percent of the maximum value of the intensities of the contact, a value generated by low-pass filtering the intensity of the contact starting at a predefined time or over a predefined period of time based on one or more of, etc. In some embodiments, the duration of the contact is used to determine the feature intensity (eg, when the feature intensity is an average of the intensity of the contact over time). In some embodiments, the characteristic intensity is compared to a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an action was performed by the user. For example, the set of one or more intensity thresholds may include a first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. In this example, as a result of a contact having a characteristic intensity that does not exceed a first intensity threshold, a first action is performed, resulting in a contact having a characteristic intensity that exceeds the first intensity threshold but does not exceed a second intensity threshold, a second Two actions are performed, and as a result of the contact having a characteristic intensity above the second intensity threshold, a third action is performed. In some embodiments, a comparison between a characteristic intensity and one or more intensity thresholds is used to determine whether to perform one or more actions (e.g., each option It is used to decide whether to perform or whether to hold off performing each action).

In some embodiments, a portion of a gesture is identified to determine a characteristic strength. For example, the touch-sensitive surface may receive successive swipe contacts (eg, drag gestures) transitioning from a starting position to reach an ending position, at which point the intensity of the contact increases. In this example, the characteristic intensity of the contact at the end location may be based on only a portion of the successive swipe contacts (eg, only the portion of the swipe contact at the end location) and not the entire swipe contact. In some embodiments, a smoothing algorithm may be applied to the intensities of the swipe contact prior to determining the characteristic intensity of the contact. For example, the smoothing algorithm may optionally include an unweighted sliding-average smoothing algorithm, a triangular smoothing algorithm, a median filter smoothing algorithm, and/or an exponential smoothing algorithm. contains more than one. In some situations, these smoothing algorithms remove narrow spikes or dips in the intensities of the swipe contact to determine the characteristic intensity.

The user interface diagrams described herein may optionally include one or more intensity thresholds (eg, a touch detection intensity threshold (IT ₀ ), a light press intensity threshold (IT _L ), a deep press intensity threshold (IT _D ) (eg, Various intensity diagrams showing the current intensity of contact on the touch-sensitive surface for at least initially above IT _L ), and/or one or more other intensity thresholds (eg, an intensity threshold lower than IT _L , IT _H ). This intensity diagram is not typically part of the displayed user interface, but is provided to aid in the interpretation of the figures.In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold is the device's physical mouse button or trackpad. corresponds to the intensity at which the device will perform actions typically associated with clicking on In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold may cause the device to perform different actions than actions typically associated with clicking a button or trackpad of a physical mouse. corresponds to the intensity to be performed.In some embodiments, the contact is less than a light press intensity threshold (eg, and above the nominal contact detection intensity threshold IT ₀ , below which the contact is no longer detected). When detected with a characteristic intensity, the device will move the focus selector in response to movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing an action associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. As long as these intensity thresholds are consistent between different sets of user interface drawings.

In some embodiments, the device's response to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria based on contact strength during input. For example, for some “tap” inputs, an intensity of the contact that exceeds a first intensity threshold during the input triggers a first response. In some embodiments, the device's response to inputs detected by the device depends on criteria including both contact strength during input and time-based criteria. For example, for some “deep press” inputs, an intensity of a contact that exceeds a second intensity threshold during input, which is greater than a first intensity threshold for a light press, is equal to meeting the first intensity threshold and a second intensity threshold. A second response is triggered only when a delay time has elapsed between satisfying . This delay time is typically less than 200 ms (milliseconds) duration (e.g., 40, 100, or 120 ms depending on the magnitude of the second intensity threshold, with increasing delay time as the second intensity threshold increases) )am. This delay time helps prevent accidental recognition of the deep press input. As another example, for some "deep press" inputs, there is a period of reduced sensitivity that occurs after the time the first intensity threshold is met. During the reduced sensitivity period, the second intensity threshold is increased. This temporary increase in the second intensity threshold also helps prevent accidental deep press input. For other deep press inputs, the response to detection of the deep press input does not depend on time-based criteria.

In some embodiments, one or more of the input intensity thresholds and/or corresponding outputs may depend on one or more factors, such as user setting, contact motion, input timing, application execution, speed at which the intensity is applied, number of simultaneous inputs, user Varies based on history, environmental factors (eg, ambient noise), focus selector position, and the like. Exemplary factors are described in US Patent Application Serial Nos. 14/399,606 and 14/624,296, which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

For example, FIG. 4C illustrates a dynamic intensity threshold 480 that changes over time based in part on the intensity of the touch input 476 over time. The dynamic intensity threshold 480 has two components: a first component 474 that decays over time after a predefined delay time p1 from when the touch input 476 is initially detected, and a time The sum of the second component 478 that follows the intensity of the touch input 476 over time. The initial high intensity threshold of the first component 474 reduces accidental triggering of a "deep press" response, but still allows for an immediate "deep press" response if the touch input 476 provides sufficient intensity. The second component 478 reduces unintentional triggering of a “deep press” response by a gradual change in intensity of the touch input. In some embodiments, when touch input 476 meets dynamic intensity threshold 480 (eg, at point 481 in FIG. 4C ), a “deep press” response is triggered.

4D illustrates another dynamic intensity threshold 486 (eg, intensity threshold I _D ). 4D also illustrates two other intensity thresholds, a first intensity threshold (I _H ) and a second intensity threshold (I _L ). In FIG. 4D , touch input 484 meets first intensity threshold I _H and second intensity threshold I _L before time p2 , but delay time p2 elapses time 482 . No response is provided until Also in FIG. 4D , the dynamic intensity threshold 486 decays over time, the decay being a predefined delay time p1 from time 482 (when the response associated with the second intensity threshold I _L is triggered). ) has elapsed, starting at time 488 . A dynamic intensity threshold of this type immediately after triggering a response associated with a lower intensity threshold, for example the first intensity threshold (I _H ) or the second intensity threshold (I _L ), or concurrently with the dynamic intensity threshold (I _{D )} ) to reduce the accidental triggering of a response associated with it.

4E illustrates another dynamic intensity threshold 492 (eg, intensity threshold I _D ). In FIG. 4E , the response associated with the intensity threshold I _L is triggered after a delay time p2 has elapsed from when the touch input 490 was initially detected. At the same time, the dynamic intensity threshold 492 decays after a predefined delay time p1 has elapsed from when the touch input 490 was initially detected. Thus, if the intensity of the touch input 490 decreases after triggering the response associated with the intensity threshold I _L , and then the intensity of the touch input 490 increases without releasing the touch input 490 , the touch input 490 . ) may trigger a response associated with the intensity threshold I _D (eg, at time 494 ) even when the intensity is below another intensity threshold, eg, the intensity threshold I _L .

An increase in the characteristic intensity of a contact from an intensity below the light press intensity threshold (IT _L ) to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold (IT _L ) and the deep press intensity threshold (IT _D ), sometimes referred to as a "light press" input do. An increase in the characteristic intensity of a contact from an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold IT _D to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold IT _D is sometimes referred to as a “deep press” input. An increase in the characteristic intensity of a contact from an intensity below the touch-detection intensity threshold (IT ₀ ) to an intensity between the touch-detection intensity threshold (IT ₀ ) and the light press intensity threshold (IT _L ) is sometimes a contact on the touch surface. is referred to as detecting A decrease in the characteristic intensity of a contact from an intensity above the contact detection intensity threshold IT ₀ to an intensity below the contact detection intensity threshold IT ₀ is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch surface. In some embodiments IT ₀ is 0 (zero). In some embodiments IT ₀ is greater than zero. In some embodiments, a shaded circle or ellipse is used to indicate the intensity of contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, an unshaded circle or ellipse is used to represent an individual contact on the touch-sensitive surface without specifying the intensity of the individual contact.

In some embodiments described herein, the one or more actions detect each press input performed with each contact (or plurality of contacts) or in response to detecting a gesture comprising the respective press input. and wherein each press input is detected based, at least in part, on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or plurality of contacts) above a press input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the respective action is performed in response to detecting an increase in intensity of the respective contact above a press input intensity threshold (eg, the respective action is a “down stroke of the respective press input”). )"). In some embodiments, the press input comprises an increase in the intensity of each contact above the press input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in the intensity of the contact below the press input intensity threshold, wherein each action is each below the press input intensity threshold is performed in response to detecting a subsequent decrease in the intensity of the contact of (eg, each operation is performed on an “up stroke” of each press input).

In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid accidental inputs, sometimes referred to as “jitter”, where the device has a hysteresis intensity threshold ( For example, the hysteresis intensity threshold is an X intensity unit lower than the press input intensity threshold, or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some suitable percentage of the press input intensity threshold). As such, in some embodiments, the press input comprises an increase in the intensity of each contact above the press input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in the intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press input intensity threshold, each The operation of is performed in response to detecting a subsequent decrease in the intensity of each contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (each operation is performed on the "up stroke" of each press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, the press input causes the device to increase the intensity of the contact from an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press input intensity threshold, and optionally, to an intensity below the hysteresis intensity threshold. It is detected only if a subsequent decrease in the intensity of the contact is detected, and each operation is performed in response to detecting a press input (eg, an increase in the intensity of the contact or a decrease in the intensity of the contact depending on the environment).

For convenience of description, descriptions of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press input intensity threshold or in response to a gesture comprising a press input include, optionally, an increase in an intensity of a contact above a press input intensity threshold, a hysteresis intensity threshold an increase in the intensity of the contact from an intensity below the press input intensity threshold to an intensity above the press input intensity threshold, a decrease in the intensity of the contact below the press input intensity threshold, or a decrease in the intensity of the contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press input intensity threshold triggered in response to detection. Further, in examples where the action is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in the intensity of the contact below the press input intensity threshold, the action is, optionally, less than a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to and lower than the press input intensity threshold. is performed in response to detecting a decrease in the intensity of the contact. As noted above, in some embodiments, the triggering of such responses is also that time-based criteria are met (eg, a delay time elapses between the first intensity threshold being met and the second intensity threshold being met) depends on

As used in the specification and claims, the term “tactile output” refers to a physical displacement of a device relative to its previous position, a component of the device (eg, a touch-sensitive surface) relative to another component of the device (eg, a housing). ), or the displacement of a component with respect to the center of mass of the device to be detected by the user using the user's tactile sense. For example, in situations where a device or component of a device is in contact with a touch-sensitive surface of a user (eg, a finger, palm, or other portion of a user's hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement may to be interpreted as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in the physical properties of a component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (eg, a touch-sensitive display or trackpad) is optionally interpreted by the user as a "down click" or "up click" of a physical actuator button. In some cases, the user will feel a tactile sensation such as a "down click" or "up click" even in the absence of movement of a physical actuator button associated with a touch-sensitive surface that is physically depressed (eg, displaced) by movement of the user. . As another example, movement of the touch-sensitive surface is optionally interpreted or sensed by the user as "roughness" of the touch-sensitive surface, even when there is no change in flatness of the touch-sensitive surface. Although these interpretations of touch by the user will be susceptible to the user's individualized sensory perception, there are many touch sensory perceptions common to the majority of users. Thus, when tactile output is described as corresponding to a user's specific sensory perception (eg, "up click", "down click", "roughness"), unless otherwise stated, the tactile output generated is typical (or average) corresponds to the physical displacement of the device or component thereof that will produce the described sensory perception for the user. Providing haptic feedback to a user using tactile outputs improves the operability of the device (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when actuating/interacting with the device) and It makes the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the tactile output pattern determines characteristics of the tactile output, such as the amplitude of the tactile output, the shape of the moving waveform of the tactile output, the frequency of the tactile output, and/or the duration of the tactile output. specify

When tactile outputs having different tactile output patterns are generated by a device (eg, via one or more tactile output generators that move a movable mass to generate tactile outputs), the tactile outputs are It can evoke different haptic sensations when holding or touching. While the user's senses are based on user perception of tactile output, most users will be able to discern changes in the waveform, frequency, and amplitude of tactile outputs generated by the device. Accordingly, the waveform, frequency, and amplitude may be adjusted to indicate to the user that different operations have been performed. As such, a given environment (eg, a user interface including graphical features and objects, a simulated physical environment with virtual boundaries and virtual objects, a real physical environment with physical boundaries and physical objects, and/or any of the foregoing properties of objects (eg, size, material, weight, stiffness, smoothness, etc.) in a combination of those of behaviors (eg, oscillation, displacement, acceleration, rotation, extension, etc.); and/or tactile outputs having tactile output patterns designed, selected and/or engineered to simulate interactions (eg, collision, adhesion, repulsion, attraction, friction, etc.) , will provide users with useful feedback that reduces input errors and increases the efficiency of user operation of the device. Additionally, tactile outputs are optionally generated to correspond to a simulated physical property, such as an input threshold or feedback not related to selection of an object. Such tactile outputs will, in some circumstances, provide users with useful feedback that reduces input errors and increases the efficiency of user operation of the device.

In some embodiments, a tactile output with a suitable tactile output pattern serves as a cue for the occurrence of an event of interest in a user interface or behind a scene within a device. Examples of events of interest include activation of an affordance (eg, a real or virtual button, or toggle switch) provided on a device or in a user interface, success or failure of a requested action, reaching or breaking a boundary in a user interface. traversing, entering a new state, switching input focus between objects, activating a new mode, reaching or crossing an input threshold, detecting or recognizing a type of input or gesture, and the like. In some embodiments, tactile outputs are provided to serve as a warning or alert for an impending event or result that would occur if a redirection or interruption input was not detected in a timely manner. Tactile outputs may also, in other contexts, enrich the user experience, improve accessibility of the device for users with visual or motor neuron impairments or other accessibility needs, and/or enhance user interface and/or or to improve the efficiency and functionality of the device. The tactile outputs optionally involve audio outputs and/or visual user interface changes, which further enhance the user's experience when the user interacts with the user interface and/or device, the user interface and/or or to facilitate better transfer of information about the state of the device, reduce input errors and increase the efficiency of user operation of the device.

4F-4H illustrate one or more diagrams for generating haptic feedback suitable for various purposes and in various scenarios, such as those previously mentioned and described in connection with the user interfaces and methods discussed herein. Provides a set of sample tactile output patterns that can be used either as is or through transformations (eg, modulation, amplification, truncation, etc.), individually or in combination. This example of a palette of tactile outputs shows how a set of three waveforms and eight frequencies can be used to create an array of tactile output patterns. In addition to the tactile output patterns shown in these figures, each of these tactile output patterns is optionally shown in Fig. 4i, which is shown in variants having, for example, gains of 1.0, 0.75, 0.5, and 0.25, respectively, respectively. Tactile output, as shown for FullTap 80 Hz, FullTap 200 Hz, MiniTap 80 Hz, MiniTap 200 Hz, MicroTap 80 Hz, and MicroTap 200 Hz in FIGS. By changing the gain value for the pattern, the amplitude is adjusted. 4I-4K, changing the gain of the tactile output pattern changes the amplitude of the pattern without changing the frequency of the pattern or changing the shape of the waveform. In some embodiments, changing the frequency of the tactile output pattern also results in a lower amplitude, which some tactile output generators are limited by how much force can be applied to the movable mass, and thus the waveform This is because higher frequency movements of the mass are constrained to lower amplitudes (e.g., 230 Hz, 270 Hz, and the peak amplitudes of the pull-tap at 300 Hz are lower than the amplitudes of the pull-tap at 80 Hz, 100 Hz, 125 Hz, and 200 Hz).

4F-4K show tactile output patterns with specific waveforms. The waveform of the tactile output pattern represents a pattern of physical displacements relative to a neutral position (eg, xzero) versus time that the movable mass traverses to produce a tactile output having the tactile output pattern. For example, the first set of tactile output patterns shown in FIG. 4F (eg, "pull tap" tactile output patterns) each have an oscillation (eg, starting and ending in a neutral position and ending in a neutral position) with two complete cycles. oscillation that traverses the position 3 times). The second set of tactile output patterns shown in FIG. 4G (eg, the tactile output patterns of a “minitab”) each contain an oscillation (eg, starting and ending in a neutral position and ending in a neutral position of 1) comprising one complete cycle. oscillation that crosses once). The third set of tactile output patterns shown in FIG. 4H (eg, "microtap" tactile output patterns) each includes an oscillation (eg, starting and ending in a neutral position and ending in a neutral position) comprising half a full cycle. oscillations that do not traverse position). The waveform of the tactile output pattern also includes a start buffer and an end buffer indicating the gradual acceleration and deceleration of the movable mass at the beginning and end of the tactile output. The example waveforms shown in FIGS. 4F-4K include xmin and xmax values representing the maximum and minimum limits of movement of the movable mass. For larger electronic devices with larger movable masses, there may be larger or smaller minimum and maximum limits of movement of the mass. Although the examples shown in FIGS. 4F-4K describe the movement of a mass in one dimension, similar principles would also apply to the movement of a movable mass in two or three dimensions.

As shown in Figures 4F-4K, each tactile output pattern also has a corresponding characteristic frequency that affects the "pitch" of the haptic sensation, which is generated by the user from the tactile output with that characteristic frequency. is felt by In the case of a continuous tactile output, the characteristic frequency represents the number of cycles (eg, cycles per second) completed within a given period by the movable mass of the tactile output generator. In the case of a discrete tactile output, a separate output signal (eg, having 0.5, 1, or 2 cycles) is generated, and the characteristic frequency value is determined by how much the movable mass produces a tactile output having that characteristic frequency. Determine if you need to move quickly. 4F-4H , for each type of tactile output (eg, as defined by the respective waveform, such as pull-tap, mini-tap, or micro-tap), the higher frequency value shifts faster movement(s) by the capable mass, and thus, generally, a shorter time to complete the tactile output (eg, time to complete the required number of cycle(s) for the individual tactile output + including start and end buffer times). For example, a pull-tap with a characteristic frequency of 80 Hz takes longer to complete than a pull-tap with a characteristic frequency of 100 Hz (eg, 28.3 ms versus 35.4 ms in FIG. 4F ). Also, for given frequencies, a tactile output that has more cycles of its waveform at each frequency takes longer to complete than a tactile output that has fewer cycles of its waveform at the same respective frequency. For example, a pull-tap at 150 Hz takes longer to complete than a mini-tap at 150 Hz (eg, 12.8 ms versus 19.4 ms), and a mini-tap at 150 Hz takes longer to complete than a micro-tap at 150 Hz. takes (eg, 9.4 ms versus 12.8 ms). However, for tactile output patterns with different frequencies, this rule may not apply (eg, tactile outputs with more cycles but higher frequency have fewer cycles but with lower frequency tactile outputs with lower frequency). may take less time to complete than outputs, and vice versa). For example, at 300 Hz, a full-tap takes as long as a mini-tap (eg, 9.9 ms).

4F-4K , the tactile output pattern also has a characteristic amplitude that affects the amount of energy contained in the tactile signal or the “strength” of the haptic sensation, which haptic sensation has its characteristic amplitude. can be felt by the user through a tactile output with In some embodiments, the characteristic amplitude of the tactile output pattern refers to an absolute or normalized value representing the maximum displacement of the movable mass from a neutral position when generating the tactile output. In some embodiments, the characteristic amplitude of the tactile output pattern is based on various conditions (eg, customized based on user interface situations and behaviors) and/or preconfigured metrics (eg, input-based metrics, and / or user interface based metrics), eg by a fixed or dynamically determined gain factor (eg a value of 0 to 1). In some embodiments, the input-based metric (eg, intensity change metric or input-velocity metric) is a characteristic of the input during the input that triggers generation of a tactile output (eg, a rate of change in intensity of a characteristic of a contact at a press input or a touch The speed of movement of the contact across the sensitive surface) is measured. In some embodiments, a user interface based metric (eg, a speed metric across a boundary) is a characteristic of a user interface element (eg, a hidden or visible boundary in the user interface) during a user interface change that triggers generation of a tactile output. Measure the speed of the element's movement across it). In some embodiments, the characteristic amplitude of the tactile output pattern may be modulated by an “envelope” and the peaks of adjacent cycles may have different amplitudes, wherein one of the waveforms shown above is a tactile The output is further modified by multiplication by a time-varying envelope parameter (eg, between 0 and 1) to gradually adjust the amplitude of portions of the tactile output over time as the output is being generated.

Although only specific frequencies, amplitudes, and waveforms are represented in the sample tactile output patterns in FIGS. 4F-4K for illustrative purposes, tactile output patterns with other frequencies, amplitudes and waveforms may be used for similar purposes. can be used For example, waveforms with 0.5 to 4 cycles may be used. Other frequencies ranging from 60 Hz to 400 Hz may also be used.

User Interfaces and Associated Processes

Now having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, (optionally) one or more tactile output generators for generating tactile outputs, and (optionally) one or more sensors to detect intensities of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface Attention is drawn to embodiments of user interfaces (“UI”) and associated processes that may be implemented on an electronic device, such as portable multifunction device 100 or device 300 .

5A-5A illustrate example user interfaces for displaying a representation of a virtual object while switching from displaying a first user interface area to displaying a second user interface area, in accordance with some embodiments; . The user interfaces of these figures are shown in FIGS. 8A-8E, 9A-9D, 10A-10D, 16A-16G, 17A-17D, 18A-18I, 19A-19H, and FIGS. 20A-20F are used to illustrate the processes described below. For ease of description, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device having a touch-sensitive display system 112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is optionally: an individual finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to the finger or stylus contact (eg, a center of an individual contact, or a point associated with the individual contact), or It is the center of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system 112 . Optionally, however, similar operations in response to detecting contacts on the touch-sensitive surface 451 are performed on the display 450 and the separate is performed on a device having a touch-sensitive surface 451 of

5A illustrates a real-world context in which the user interfaces described in connection with FIGS. 5B-5A are used.

5A illustrates a physical space 5002 in which table 5004 is located. The device 100 is held by the user in the user's hand 5006 .

5B illustrates a messaging user interface 5008 displayed on display 112 . Messaging user interface 5008 includes a message bubble 5010 containing a received text message 5012 , a message bubble 5014 containing a sent text message 5016 , and a virtual object (eg, virtual object) received within the message. A message including a virtual object indicator 5022 indicating that the chair 5020) and the virtual chair 5020 are observable objects in an augmented reality view (eg, within a representation of the field of view of one or more cameras of the device 100 ). and a speech bubble 5018 . Messaging user interface 5008 also includes a message input area 5024 configured to display message input.

5C-5G illustrate input that causes a portion of the messaging user interface 5008 to be replaced with the field of view of one or more cameras of the device 100 . In FIG. 5C , contact 5026 of device 100 with touch screen 112 is detected. The characteristic intensity of the contact is above the contact detection intensity threshold IT ₀ and below the hint press intensity threshold IT _H , as illustrated by the intensity level meter 5028 . In FIG. 5D , an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact 5026 that exceeds the hint press intensity threshold IT _H , as illustrated by the intensity level meter 5028 , causes the area of the message bubble 5018 to increase, and the virtual caused the chair 5020 to be increased in size, and the messaging user interface 5008 to begin to blur behind the message bubble 5018 (eg, to provide the user with visual feedback of the effect of increasing the characteristic intensity of the contact). did In FIG. 5E , an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact 5026 above the light press intensity threshold IT _L as illustrated by the intensity level meter 5028 causes the message bubble 5018 to platter. ) 5030 , the virtual chair 5020 was further increased in size, and the blurring of the messaging user interface 5008 behind the platter 5030 was increased. In FIG. 5F , an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact 5026 above the deep press intensity threshold IT _D as illustrated by the intensity level meter 5028 causes a portion of the messaging user interface 5008 to cause the tactile output generators 167 of the device 100 to output a tactile output (as illustrated by 5032 ) to indicate that criteria for replacement with the field of view of one or more cameras of the device 100 have been met. do.

In some embodiments, the progression shown in FIGS. 5C-5E is reversible before the characteristic intensity of contact 5026 reaches the deep press intensity threshold IT _D , as shown in FIG. 5F . For example, decreasing the characteristic intensity of contact 5026 after the increases illustrated in FIGS. 5D and/or 5E will cause an interface state corresponding to the decreased intensity level of contact 5026 to be displayed (eg, , the interface as shown in Fig. 5e is shown in accordance with a determination that the reduced characteristic intensity of the contact is above the light press intensity threshold (IT _L ), and the interface as shown in Fig. 5d shows that the reduced characteristic intensity of the contact is a hint shown in accordance with a determination that the press intensity threshold IT _H is exceeded, and the interface as shown in FIG. 5C is shown in accordance with a determination that the reduced characteristic intensity of the contact is less than the hint press intensity threshold IT _H ). In some embodiments, decreasing the characteristic intensity of contact 5026 after the increases illustrated in FIGS. 5D and/or 5E will cause the interface as shown in FIG. 5C to be redisplayed.

5F-5J illustrate an animated transition during which a portion of the messaging user interface is replaced with the field of view of one or more cameras (hereinafter “camera(s)”) of device 100 . 5F to 5G , contact 5026 has been lifted off from touch screen 112 and virtual chair 5020 has rotated toward its final position in FIG. 5I . 5G , the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) has begun to fade into view within the platter 5030 (as indicated by the dashed lines). In FIG. 5H , the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) (eg, showing a view of physical space 5002 as captured by the camera(s)) completes fading into view within the platter 5030 . did. From FIG. 5H to FIG. 5I , virtual chair 5020 continued its rotation towards its final position in FIG. 5I . In FIG. 5I , tactile output generators 167 are configured as illustrated at 5036 to indicate that at least one plane (eg, floor surface 5038 ) has been detected within the field of view 5034 of the camera(s). same) tactile output was output. The virtual chair 5020 is placed on the detected plane (eg, according to a determination by the device 100 that the virtual object is configured to be placed in an upright orientation on the detected horizontal surface, such as the floor surface 5038 ). The size of the virtual chair 5020 is continuously adjusted on the display 112 as a portion of the messaging user interface is transformed into a representation of the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) on the display 112 . For example, the scale of the virtual chair 5020 with respect to physical space 5002 as shown in the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) is the virtual chair 5020 within the field of view 5034 of the camera(s). is determined based on a predefined “real-world” size of <RTI ID=0.0> In FIG. 5J , the virtual chair 5020 is displayed in its final position with a predefined orientation relative to the detected floor surface within the field of view 5034 of the camera(s). In some embodiments, the initial landing position of virtual chair 5020 is a predefined position relative to the detected plane within the field of view of the camera(s), such as the center of the unoccupied area of the detected plane. In some embodiments, the initial landing position of the virtual chair 5020 is determined according to the liftoff position of the contact 5026 (eg, the liftoff position of the contact 5026 is a criterion for transitioning to the augmented reality environment). may be different from the initial touchdown position of contact 5026 due to movement of contact 5026 across touch screen 112 after being satisfied at 5f).

5K-5L illustrate movement (eg, by a user's hand 5006 ) of device 100 adjusting field of view 5034 of the camera(s). As the device 100 is moved relative to the physical space 5002 , the displayed field of view 5034 of the camera(s) changes, and the virtual chair 5020 is placed on the floor within the displayed field of view 5034 of the camera(s). It remains attached to the surface 5038 in the same position and in the same orientation.

5M-5Q illustrate an input that causes movement of the virtual chair 5020 across the floor surface 5038 within the displayed field of view 5034 of the camera(s). In FIG. 5N , contact 5040 of device 100 with touch screen 112 is detected at a location corresponding to virtual chair 5020 . 5N and 5O , as contact 5040 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5042 , virtual chair 5020 is dragged by contact 5040 . As the virtual chair 5020 is moved by the contact 5040 , the size of the virtual chair 5020 changes with the virtual chair 5020 relative to the physical space 5002 as shown in the field of view 5034 of the camera(s). is changed to keep the scale of For example, in FIGS. 5N-5P , virtual chair 5020 is further from device 100 from the foreground of field of view 5034 of camera(s) and table 5004 within field of view 5034 of camera(s). ), the size of the virtual chair 5020 is reduced (eg, such that the scale of the chair with respect to the table 5004 within the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) is maintained). Moreover, as the virtual chair 5020 is moved by the contact 5040 , the identified planes within the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) are highlighted. For example, the floor plane 5038 is highlighted in FIG. 5O . 5O-5P , as contact 5040 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5044 , virtual chair 5020 continues to be dragged by contact 5040 . In FIG. 5Q , contact 5040 has been lifted off from touch screen 112 . In some embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 5N-5Q , as virtual chair 5020 is dragged across floor surface 5038 by contact 5040 , the path of movement of virtual chair 5020 is It is constrained by the bottom surface 5038 within the field of view 5034 of the camera. In some embodiments, contact 5040 as described with respect to FIGS. 5N-5P is a continuation of contact 5026 as described with respect to FIGS. 5C-5F (eg, of contact 5026 ). There is no liftoff, and the same contact that causes a portion of the messaging user interface 5008 to be replaced with the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) also drags the virtual chair 5020 within the field of view 5034 of the camera(s). ).

5Q-5U illustrate an input that causes movement of the virtual chair 5020 from the floor surface 5038 to a different plane (eg, table surface 5046 ) that is detected within the field of view 5034 of the camera(s). exemplify In FIG. 5R , contact 5050 of device 100 with touch screen 112 is detected at a location corresponding to virtual chair 5020 . 5R and 5S , virtual chair 5020 is dragged by contact 5048 as contact 5048 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5050 . As the virtual chair 5020 is moved by the contact 5048 , the size of the virtual chair 5020 changes with the virtual chair 5020 relative to the physical space 5002 as shown in the field of view 5034 of the camera(s). is changed to keep the scale of Additionally, as virtual chair 5020 is moved by contact 5040 , table surface plane 5046 is highlighted (eg, as shown in FIG. 5S ). 5S and 5T , as contact 5048 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5052 , virtual chair 5020 continues to be dragged by contact 5040 . 5U , contact 5048 has been lifted off touch screen 112 and virtual chair 5020 is placed on table surface plane 5046 in an upright orientation facing the same direction as before.

5U-5Ad illustrate input of dragging virtual chair 5020 to the edge of touch screen display 112, causing the camera(s)' field of view 5034 to stop being displayed. In FIG. 5V , contact 5054 of device 100 with touch screen 112 is detected at a location corresponding to virtual chair 5020 . 5V and 5W , virtual chair 5020 is dragged by contact 5054 as contact 5054 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5056 . 5W and 5X , as contact 5054 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5058 , virtual chair 5020 continues to be dragged by contact 5054 to the position shown in FIG. 5X .

The input by contact 5054 illustrated in FIGS. 5U-5X , as shown in FIGS. 5Y-5A , is from displaying the camera(s) field of view 5034 within the platter 5030 to the camera(s) ) and causes a transition to stop displaying the field of view 5034 and return to fully displaying the messaging user interface 5008 . 5Y , the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) begins to fade out within the platter 5030 . 5Y and 5Z , platter 5030 transitions to message bubble 5018 . 5Z , the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) is no longer displayed. 5AA , the messaging user interface 5008 stops being blurred and the size of the message bubble 5018 returns to the original size of the message bubble 5018 (eg, as shown in FIG. 5B ).

5AA-5A show the original position of the virtual chair 5020 within the messaging user interface 5008 (eg, as shown in FIG. 5B ) from the position where the virtual chair 5020 corresponds to the contact 5054 of FIG. 5AA . An animated transition of the virtual chair 5020 that occurs as it moves is illustrated. In FIG. 5A , contact 5054 has been lifted off from touch screen 112 . 5A-B and 5AC, virtual chair 5020 progressively increases in size and rotates toward its final position in FIG. 5A-D.

5B-5A, the virtual chair 5020 has substantially the same three-dimensional appearance within the messaging user interface 5008 and within the displayed field of view 5034 of the camera(s), and the virtual chair 5020 includes: It maintains the same three-dimensional appearance during the transition from displaying the messaging user interface 5008 to displaying the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) and during the reverse transition. In some embodiments, the representation of virtual chair 5020 has a different appearance in the application user interface (eg, messaging user interface) than in the augmented reality environment (eg, the displayed field of view of the camera(s)). For example, virtual chair 5020 optionally has a two-dimensional or more stylized look in the application user interface while three-dimensional and more realistic and textured appearance in an augmented reality environment; The intermediate appearances of virtual chair 5020 during the transition between displaying the application user interface and displaying the augmented reality environment are a series of interpolated appearances between the two-dimensional and three-dimensional appearance of virtual chair 5020 .

5ae illustrates an internet browser user interface 5060 . Internet browser user interface 5060 includes a URL/search input area 5062 configured to display a URL/search input for a web browser and a navigation control including browser controls 5064 (eg, a back button and a forward button). , a sharing control unit for displaying a sharing interface, a bookmark control unit for displaying a bookmark interface, and a tab control unit for displaying a tab interface). Internet browser user interface 5060 also includes web objects 5066 , 5068 , 5070 , 5072 , 5074 , 5076 . In some embodiments, each web object includes a link such that, in response to a tap input on the respective web object, a linked internet location corresponding to the web object is displayed in internet browser user interface 5060 (eg, , replacing the display of each web object). Web objects 5066, 5068, and 5072 include two-dimensional representations of three-dimensional virtual objects as indicated by virtual object indicators 5078, 5080, and 5082, respectively. Web objects 5070, 5074, 5076 include two-dimensional images (however, the two-dimensional images of web objects 5070, 5074, 5076 are three-dimensional virtual, as indicated by the absence of virtual object indicators). does not correspond to objects). The virtual object corresponding to the web object 5068 is a lamp object 5084 .

5A-5A illustrate input that causes a portion of the Internet browser user interface 5060 to be replaced with the field of view 5034 of the camera(s). In FIG. 5A , contact 5086 of device 100 with touch screen 112 is detected. The characteristic intensity of the contact is above the contact detection intensity threshold IT ₀ and below the hint press intensity threshold IT _H , as illustrated by the intensity level meter 5028 . In FIG. 5Ag , an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact 5026 above the light press intensity threshold IT _L as illustrated by the intensity level meter 5028 indicates that the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) is (e.g., displayed within a web object 5068 (overlaid by a virtual ramp 5084). 5Ah , an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact 5086 above the deep press intensity threshold IT _D as illustrated by the intensity level meter 5028 indicates that the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) is allowing replacement of a larger portion of interface 5060 (eg, leaving only URL/search input area 5062 and browser controls 5064 ), tactile output generators 167 of device 100 provide access to the Internet Output a tactile output (as illustrated by 5088 ) to indicate that the criteria for replacing a portion of the browser user interface 5060 with the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) have been met. In some embodiments, in response to the input described with respect to FIGS. 5A-5A , the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) completely replaces the Internet browser user interface 506 on the touch screen display 112 .

5ai-5am illustrate the input causing movement of the virtual ramp 5084. 5AI and 5aj , virtual ramp 5084 is dragged by contact 5086 as contact 5086 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5090 . As the virtual ramp 5084 is moved by the contact 5086 , the size of the virtual ramp 5084 does not change, and the path of the virtual ramp 5084 is, optionally, a physical image captured within the field of view of the camera(s). It is not constrained by the structure of space. As the virtual ramp 5084 is moved by the contact 5086 , the identified planes within the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) are highlighted. For example, floor plane 5038 is highlighted in FIG. 5AJ as virtual ramp 5084 moves over floor plane 5038 . 5aj and 5ak , virtual ramp 5084 continues to be dragged by contact 5086 as contact 5086 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5092 . 5AK and 5A, as contact 5086 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5094, virtual ramp 5084 continues to be dragged by contact 5086, and floor plane 5038 is highlighted. Stopped, table surface 5046 is highlighted as virtual ramp 5084 moves over table 5004 . In FIG. 5am , contact 5086 has been lifted off from touch screen 112 . When the contact 5086 is lifted off, the size of the virtual ramp 5086 is adjusted to have the correct scale with respect to the table 5004 within the field of view 5034 of the camera(s), and the virtual ramp 5086 is the camera's field of view 5034 . placed in an upright orientation on table surface 5046 in 5034 .

5am-5aq show a virtual ramp 5084 to the edge of the touch screen display 112 that causes the camera(s)'s field of view 5034 to stop being displayed and the internet browser user interface 5060 to be restored. Example of dragging input. In FIG. 5A , contact 5096 with touch screen 112 of device 100 is detected at a location corresponding to virtual ramp 5084 . 5A and 5AO , virtual ramp 5084 is dragged by contact 5096 as contact 5096 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5098 . 5AO and 5AP , as contact 5054 moves along the path indicated by arrow 5100 , virtual ramp 5084 continues to be dragged by contact 5096 to the position shown in FIG. 5AP . In FIG. 5AQ , contact 5096 has been lifted off from touch screen 112 .

The input by contact 5096 illustrated in FIGS. 5am-5ap is, as shown in FIGS. 5aq-5at, from displaying field of view 5034 of the camera(s) to field of view 5034 of the camera(s). ) and causes a transition to returning to fully displaying the Internet browser user interface 5060 . 5A , the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) begins to fade out (as indicated by the dashed lines). 5A-5A , virtual ramp 5084 increases in size and moves toward its original position within Internet browser user interface 5060 . 5A , the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) is no longer displayed and the internet browser user interface 5060 begins to fade in (as indicated by the dashed lines). In FIG. 5A , the Internet browser user interface 5060 is fully displayed and the virtual ramp 5084 has returned to its original size and position within the Internet browser user interface 5060 .

6A-6J illustrate a first representation of a virtual object within a first user interface area, a second representation of a virtual object within a second user interface area, and a representation of a field of view of one or more cameras, in accordance with some embodiments; Together illustrate example user interfaces for displaying a third representation of a virtual object. The user interfaces of these figures are shown in FIGS. 8A-8E, 9A-9D, 10A-10D, 16A-16G, 17A-17D, 18A-18I, 19A-19H, and FIGS. 20A-20F are used to illustrate the processes described below. For ease of description, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device having a touch-sensitive display system 112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is optionally: an individual finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to the finger or stylus contact (eg, a center of an individual contact, or a point associated with the individual contact), or It is the center of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system 112 . However, similar operations are performed with the display 450 and the display 450 in response to detecting contacts on the touch-sensitive surface 451, optionally displaying the user interfaces shown in the figure with a focus selector on the display 450. It is performed on a device having a separate touch-sensitive surface 451 .

6A shows a message bubble 5010 containing a received text message 5012, a message bubble 5014 containing a sent text message 5016, and a virtual object (eg, virtual chair 5020) received within the message. ) and a message balloon 5018 including a virtual object indicator 5022 indicating that the virtual chair 5020 is an observable object in the augmented reality view (eg, within the displayed field of view of one or more cameras of the device 100 ). It illustrates a messaging user interface 5008 that includes Messaging user interface 5008 is described in greater detail with respect to FIG. 5B .

6B and 6C illustrate an input that causes the virtual chair 5020 to rotate. In FIG. 6B , contact 6002 of device 100 with touch screen 112 is detected. Contact 6002 travels across touch screen 112 along a path indicated by arrow 6004 . 6C, in response to movement of the contact, messaging user interface 5008 is scrolled upward (message balloon 5010 is scrolled off the display, message bubble 5014, 5018 is scrolled upward; revealing additional message bubble 6005), virtual chair 5020 is rotated (eg, tilted upward). The magnitude and direction of rotation of virtual chair 5020 corresponds to movement of contact 6002 along the path indicated by arrow 6004 . In FIG. 6D , contact 6002 has been lifted off from touch screen 112 . In some embodiments, this rotational behavior of virtual chair 5020 within message bubble 5018 is observable in an augmented reality environment where virtual chair 5020 includes the field of view of camera(s) of device 100 . Used as a representation of a virtual object.

6E-6L illustrate input that causes messaging user interface 5008 to be replaced with staging user interface 6010 and subsequently changes the orientation of virtual chair 5020 . In FIG. 6E , contact 6006 of device 100 with touch screen 112 is detected. The characteristic intensity of the contact is above the contact detection intensity threshold IT ₀ and below the hint press intensity threshold IT _H , as illustrated by the intensity level meter 5028 . In FIG. 6F , an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact 6006 that exceeds the hint press intensity threshold IT _H as illustrated by the intensity level meter 5028 causes the area of the message bubble 5018 to increase, and the virtual caused the chair 5020 to be increased in size, and the messaging user interface 5008 to begin to blur behind the message bubble 5018 (eg, to provide the user with visual feedback of the effect of increasing the characteristic intensity of the contact). did In FIG. 6G , an increase in the characteristic intensity of contact 6006 above a light press intensity threshold IT _L as illustrated by intensity level meter 5028 causes message bubble 5018 to be replaced by platter 6008 . This allowed the virtual chair 5020 to be further increased in size and increased the blurring of the messaging user interface 5008 behind the platter 6008 . In FIG. 6H , an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact 6006 above the deep press intensity threshold IT _D as illustrated by the intensity level meter 5028 causes the messaging user interface 5008 to stop being displayed and Initiates a fade in (indicated by dashed lines) of the staging user interface 6010 . Additionally, as shown in FIG. 6H , an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact 6006 above the deep press intensity threshold IT _D is a criterion for replacing the messaging user interface 5008 with the staging user interface 6010 . Cause the tactile output generators 167 of device 100 to output a tactile output (as illustrated by 6012 ) to indicate that it has been satisfied.

In some embodiments, the progression shown in FIGS. 6E-6G is reversible before the characteristic intensity of contact 6006 reaches the deep press intensity threshold IT _D , as shown in FIG. 6H . For example, decreasing the characteristic intensity of contact 6006 after the increases illustrated in FIGS. 6F and/or 6G will cause an interface state corresponding to the decreased intensity level of contact 6006 to be displayed (eg, , the interface as shown in FIG. 6G is shown in accordance with a determination that the reduced characteristic intensity of the contact is above the light press intensity threshold IT _L , and the interface as shown in FIG. shown in accordance with a determination that the press intensity threshold IT _H is exceeded, and the interface as shown in FIG. 6E is shown in accordance with a determination that the reduced characteristic intensity of the contact is less than the hint press intensity threshold IT _H ). In some embodiments, decreasing the characteristic intensity of contact 6006 after the increases illustrated in FIGS. 6F and/or 6G will cause the interface as shown in FIG. 6E to be redisplayed.

In FIG. 6I , a staging user interface 6010 is displayed. The staging user interface 6010 includes a stage 6014 on which a virtual chair 5020 is displayed. 6H to 6I , virtual chair 5020 is animated to show a transition from the position of virtual chair 5020 in FIG. 6H to the position of virtual chair 5020 in FIG. 6I . For example, virtual chair 5020 is rotated to a predefined position, orientation, and/or distance relative to stage 6014 (eg, such that the virtual chair appears supported by stage 6014 ). Staging user interface 6010 also includes a rewind control 6016, which, when activated (eg, by a tap input at a location corresponding to rewind control 6016 ), previously displayed causes a user interface (eg, messaging user interface 5008) to be redisplayed. Staging user interface 6010 also indicates a current display mode (eg, the current display mode is a staging user interface mode, as indicated by the highlighted “3D” indicator) and, when activated, switches to the selected display mode. and a toggle control 6018 that causes a transition. For example, while staging user interface 6010 is displayed, contact at a location corresponding to toggle control 6018 (eg, a location corresponding to a portion of toggle control 6018 that includes the text "World") A tap input by the staging user interface 6010 causes the field of view of the camera(s) to be replaced. The staging user interface 6010 also includes a sharing control 6020 (eg, for displaying the sharing interface).

6J-6L illustrate rotation of virtual chair 5020 relative to stage 6014 caused by movement of contact 6006 . 6J and 6K , as contact 6006 moves along the path indicated by arrow 6022 , virtual chair 5020 rotates (eg, about a first axis perpendicular to movement of contact 6066 ). do. 6K and 6L , as contact 6006 moves along the path indicated by arrow 6024 and subsequently along the path indicated by arrow 6025 , virtual chair 5020 (e.g., contact 6066) is rotated about a second axis perpendicular to the movement of In FIG. 6M , contact 6006 has been lifted off from touch screen 112 . In some embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 6J-6L , rotation of virtual chair 5020 is constrained by the surface of stage 6014 . For example, at least one leg of the virtual chair 5020 remains in contact with the surface of the stage 6014 during rotation(s) of the virtual chair. In some embodiments, the surface of stage 6014 serves as a frame of reference for free rotation and vertical translation of virtual chair 5020 without imposing specific constraints on movement of virtual chair 5020 .

6N and 6O illustrate input for adjusting the displayed size of virtual chair 5020. In FIG. 6N , a first contact 6026 and a second contact 6030 with the touch screen 112 are detected. The first contact 6026 travels along the path indicated by the arrow 6028 , and concurrently with the movement of the first contact 6026 , the second contact 6030 travels along the path indicated by the arrow 6032 . 6N and 6O , virtual chair 5020 as first contact 6026 and second contact 6030 move (eg, in a de-pinch gesture) along paths indicated by arrows 6028 and 6032 respectively (eg, in a de-pinch gesture). The displayed size of is increased. In FIG. 6P , first contact 6030 and second contact 6026 have been lifted off from touch screen 112 , and virtual chair 5020 maintains an increased size after liftoff of contacts 6026 , 6030 . do.

6Q-6U illustrate input that causes the staging user interface 6010 to be replaced with a field of view 6036 of one or more cameras of the device 100 . In FIG. 6Q , contact 6034 of device 100 with touch screen 112 is detected. The characteristic intensity of the contact is above the contact detection intensity threshold IT ₀ and below the hint press intensity threshold IT _H , as illustrated by the intensity level meter 5028 . In FIG. 6R , an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact 5026 above the hint press intensity threshold IT _H as illustrated by the intensity level meter 5028 indicates that the staging user interface 6010 (as indicated by the dashed lines) same) the virtual chair 5020 was started to blur behind. In FIG. 6S , an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact 6034 above the light press intensity threshold IT _L , as illustrated by the intensity level meter 5028 , caused the staging user interface 6010 to stop being displayed. Initiate a fade in (indicated by dashed lines) of the field of view 6036 of the camera(s). In FIG. 6T , an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact 6034 above the deep press intensity threshold IT _D as illustrated by the intensity level meter 5028 causes the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) to be displayed. . Additionally, as shown in FIG. 6T , an increase in the characteristic intensity of the contact 6034 above the deep press intensity threshold IT _D , causes the display of the staging user interface 6010 to change in the field of view 6036 of the camera(s). Cause the tactile output generators 167 of the device 100 to output a tactile output (as illustrated at 6038 ) to indicate that the criteria for replacement with a display have been met. In FIG. 6U , contact 6034 has been lifted off from touch screen 112 . In some embodiments, the progression shown in FIGS. 6Q-6T is reversible before the characteristic intensity of contact 6034 reaches the deep press intensity threshold IT _D as shown in FIG. 6T , in some embodiments. For example, decreasing the characteristic intensity of contact 6034 after the increases illustrated in FIGS. 6R and/or 6S will cause an interface state corresponding to the decreased intensity level of contact 6034 to be displayed.

6Q to 6U , virtual chair 5020 is (eg, according to a determination by device 100 that virtual chair 5020 is configured to be disposed in an upright orientation on a detected horizontal surface, such as floor surface 5038 ). ) is placed on the detected plane, and the size of the virtual chair 5020 is scaled (eg, a scale of the virtual chair 5020 with respect to the physical space 5002 as shown in the field of view 6036 of the camera(s)). is determined based on the defined "real-world" size of the virtual chair 5020 and/or the detected size of objects (such as table 5004) within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s). The orientation of the virtual chair 5020 caused by the rotation of the virtual chair 5020 while the staging interface 6010 is displayed (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 6J and 6K ) is determined by the virtual chair 5020 maintained as it transitions from the staging user interface 6010 to the field of view 6036 of the camera(s). For example, the orientation of the virtual chair 5020 with respect to the floor surface 5038 is the same as the final orientation of the virtual chair 5020 with respect to the surface of the stage 5014 . In some embodiments, an adjustment to the size of the virtual object 5020 in the staging user interface is considered when the size of the virtual chair 5020 is adjusted to the size of the physical space 5002 within the field of view 6036 .

6V-6Y illustrate input that causes a field of view 6036 of the camera(s) to be replaced with a staging user interface 6010 . In FIG. 6V , input by contact 6040 (eg, a tap input) corresponds to toggle control 6018 (eg, at a position corresponding to a portion of toggle control 6018 that includes the text “3D”). is detected 6W-6Y, in response to input by contact 6040, field of view 6036 of the camera(s) fades out (as indicated by dashed lines in FIG. 6W) and staging user interface 6010 It fades in (as indicated by the dashed lines in FIG. 6X ), and the staging user interface 6010 is fully displayed (as shown in FIG. 6Y ). 6V to 6Y , the virtual chair 5020 is resized (eg, to return the virtual chair 5020 to a predefined position and size for the staging user interface) and the position of the virtual chair 5020 is is changed

6Z-6AC illustrate inputs that cause staging user interface 6010 to be replaced with messaging user interface 5008 . In FIG. 6Z , an input by contact 6042 (eg, a tap input) is detected at a location corresponding to a rewind control 6016 . 6AA-6AC, in response to input by contact 6042, staging user interface 6010 fades out (as indicated by dashed lines in FIG. 6AA) and messaging user interface 5008 (FIG. 6Ab) fade in (as indicated by the dashed lines in ), and the messaging user interface 5008 is fully displayed (as shown in FIG. 6Ac ). 6Z to 6A , the size, orientation, and position of the virtual chair 5020 (eg, to return the virtual chair 5020 to a predefined position, size, and orientation for the messaging user interface 5008) It is continuously adjusted on the display.

6A-6J illustrate input that causes messaging user interface 5008 to be replaced with field of view 6036 of the camera(s) (eg, bypassing display of staging user interface 6010 ). In FIG. 6Ad , contact 6044 is detected at a location corresponding to virtual chair 5020 . An input by contact 6044 is a long touch gesture (during long touch gesture contact 6044 moves less than a threshold amount for at least a predefined threshold time at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to a representation of virtual object 5020 ). ) followed by an upward swipe gesture (drag virtual chair 5020 upward). 6A and 6A , virtual chair 5020 is dragged upward as contact 6044 moves along the path indicated by arrow 6046 . In FIG. 6ae , messaging user interface 5008 fades out behind virtual chair 5020 . 6A and 6A , the virtual chair 5020 continues to be dragged upward as the contact 6044 moves along the path indicated by the arrow 6048 . In FIG. 6A , the field of view 5036 of the camera(s) fades in behind the virtual chair 5020 . 6Ag , in response to input by contact 6044 comprising a long touch gesture followed by an upward swipe gesture, field of view 5036 of the camera(s) is fully displayed. In FIG. 6Ah , contact 6044 has been lifted off from touch screen 112 . 6A-6J , in response to liftoff of contact 6044 , virtual chair 5020 is released (eg, as virtual chair 5020 is no longer constrained or dragged by the contact) and flat (eg, , falls onto the floor surface 5038 ) upon determining that the horizontal (floor) surface corresponds to the virtual chair 5020 . Additionally, as illustrated in FIG. 6aj , tactile output generators 167 of device 100 are configured to indicate that virtual chair 5020 has landed on floor surface 5038 (as illustrated by 6050 ). ) to output a tactile output.

7A-7P illustrate example user interfaces for displaying an item with a visual indication that the item corresponds to a virtual three-dimensional object, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces of these figures are shown in FIGS. 8A-8E, 9A-9D, 10A-10D, 16A-16G, 17A-17D, 18A-18I, 19A-19H, and FIGS. 20A-20F are used to illustrate the processes described below. For ease of description, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device having a touch-sensitive display system 112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is optionally: an individual finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to the finger or stylus contact (eg, a center of an individual contact, or a point associated with the individual contact), or It is the center of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system 112 . However, similar operations are performed with the display 450 and the display 450 in response to detecting contacts on the touch-sensitive surface 451, optionally displaying the user interfaces shown in the figure with a focus selector on the display 450. It is performed on a device having a separate touch-sensitive surface 451 .

7A illustrates input detected while the user interface 400 for a menu of applications is displayed. The input corresponds to a request to display a first user interface (eg, Internet browser user interface 5060). 7A , input by contact 7000 (eg, a tap input) is detected at a location corresponding to icon 420 for browser module 147 . In response to the input, an internet browser user interface 5060 is displayed as shown in FIG. 7B .

7B illustrates an Internet browser user interface 5060 (eg, as described in detail in connection with FIG. 5A). Internet browser user interface 5060 includes web objects 5066 , 5068 , 5070 , 5072 , 5074 , 5076 . Web objects 5066, 5068, and 5072 include two-dimensional representations of three-dimensional virtual objects as indicated by virtual object indicators 5078, 5080, and 5082, respectively. Web objects 5070, 5074, 5076 include two-dimensional images (however, the two-dimensional images of web objects 5070, 5074, 5076 are three-dimensional virtual, as indicated by the absence of virtual object indicators). does not correspond to objects).

7C-7D illustrate input that causes translation (eg, scrolling) of Internet browser user interface 5060 . In FIG. 7B , contact 7002 with touch screen 112 is detected. 7C and 7D , as contact 7002 moves along the path indicated by arrow 7004 , web objects 5066 , 5068 , 5070 , 5072 , 5074 , 5076 are scrolled upward, resulting in additional web objects Fields 7003 and 7005 are exposed. Additionally, as contact 7002 moves along the path indicated by arrow 7004 , virtual objects within web objects 5066 , 5068 , 5072 including virtual object indicators 5078 , 5080 , 5082 , respectively, become Rotates (eg tilts upwards) according to the (vertical upward) direction of the input. For example, virtual ramp 5084 is tilted upward from the first orientation of FIG. 7C to the second orientation of FIG. 7D . The two-dimensional images of web objects 5070 , 5074 , 5076 do not rotate as the contact scrolls through the internet browser user interface 5060 . In FIG. 7E , contact 7002 has been lifted off from touch screen 112 . In some embodiments, the rotational behavior of objects shown in web objects 5066, 5068, 5072 is used as a visual indication that these web objects have corresponding three-dimensional virtual objects observable in an augmented reality environment, while The absence of such rotational behavior of the objects shown in web objects 5070 , 5074 , 5076 is used as a visual indication that these web objects do not have corresponding three-dimensional virtual objects observable in the augmented reality environment.

7F and 7G illustrate a parallax effect in which virtual objects rotate on a display in response to a change in orientation of device 100 with respect to the physical world.

7F1 illustrates device 100 being held by user 7006 in user's hand 5006 such that device 100 has a substantially vertical orientation. 7F2 illustrates an internet browser user interface 5060 as displayed by device 100 when device 100 is in the orientation illustrated in FIG. 7F1 .

7G1 illustrates device 100 being held by user 7006 in user's hand 5006 such that device 100 has a substantially horizontal orientation. 7G2 illustrates an internet browser user interface 5060 as displayed by device 100 when device 100 is in the orientation illustrated in FIG. 7G1 . 7F2 to 7G2 , the orientation of virtual objects within web objects 5066 , 5068 , 5072 including virtual object indicators 5078 , 5080 , 5082 , respectively, rotates according to the change in orientation of the device (eg, , inclined upwards). For example, virtual ramp 5084 tilts upward from the first orientation of FIG. 7F2 to the second orientation of FIG. 7G2 , in response to a simultaneous change in device orientation within physical space. The two-dimensional images of web objects 5070, 5074, 5076 do not rotate as the orientation of the device changes. In some embodiments, the rotational behavior of objects shown in web objects 5066, 5068, 5072 is used as a visual indication that these web objects have corresponding three-dimensional virtual objects observable in an augmented reality environment, while The absence of such rotational behavior of the objects shown in web objects 5070 , 5074 , 5076 is used as a visual indication that these web objects do not have corresponding three-dimensional virtual objects observable in the augmented reality environment.

7H-7L illustrate input corresponding to a request to display a second user interface (eg, messaging user interface 5008). In FIG. 7H , contact 7008 is detected at a location corresponding to the lower edge of display 112 . 7H and 7I , contact 7008 travels upward along the path indicated by arrow 7010 . 7I and 7J , contact 7008 continues to travel upward along the path indicated by arrow 7012 . 7H-7J , as contact 7008 moves upward from the lower edge of display 112 (eg, in response to an upward edge swipe gesture by contact 7008 ), as shown in FIG. 7I , As such, the size of the Internet browser user interface 5060 is reduced, and in FIG. 7J , the multitasking user interface 7012 is displayed. The multitasking user interface 7012 can be used for various applications and various configured to allow selection of an interface from among the control interfaces (eg, control center user interface 7014 , internet browser user interface 5060 , and messaging user interface 5008 as illustrated in FIG. 7J ). In FIG. 7K , contact 7008 has been lifted off from touch screen 112 . In FIG. 7L , input by contact 7016 (eg, a tap input) is detected at a location corresponding to messaging user interface 5008 . In response to input by contact 7016 , messaging user interface 5008 is displayed, as illustrated in FIG. 7M .

7M shows that a virtual object (eg, virtual chair 5020) and virtual chair 5020 received in a message are virtual three-dimensional objects (eg, an object observable in an augmented reality view and/or an object observable from different angles). illustrates a messaging user interface 5008 (eg, as described in greater detail with respect to FIG. 5B ) including a message bubble 5018 including a virtual object indicator 5022 indicating that Messaging user interface 5008 also includes a message bubble 6005 containing a sent text message and a message bubble 7018 containing a received text message containing an emoji 7020. The emoji 7020 is a two-dimensional image that does not correspond to a virtual three-dimensional object. For this reason, the emoji 7020 is displayed without the virtual object indicator.

7N illustrates a map user interface 7022 that includes a map 7024 , a point of interest information area 7026 for a first point of interest, and a point of interest information area 7032 for a second point of interest. For example, the first point of interest and the second point of interest are search results within or proximate to the area shown by map 7024 that correspond to the search entry "Apple" within search input area 7025 . In the first point of interest information area 7026 , the first point of interest object 7028 is displayed along with a virtual object indicator 7030 indicating that the first point of interest object 7028 is a virtual three-dimensional object. In the second point of interest information area 7032 , the second point of interest object 7034 is displayed without a virtual object indicator because the second point of interest object 7034 does not correspond to an observable virtual three-dimensional object in the augmented reality view. do.

7O shows a file management control unit 7038, a file management search input area 7040, a file information area 7042 for a first file (eg, a portable document format (PDF) file), and a second file (eg, a photo file). ), including a file information area 7044 for a third file (eg, a virtual chair object), and a file information area 7048 for a fourth file (eg, a PDF file). A file management user interface 7036 is illustrated. The third file information area 7046 is a virtual object indicator 7050 displayed adjacent the file preview object 7045 of the file information area 7046 to indicate that the third file corresponds to a virtual three-dimensional object. includes The first file information area 7042 , the second file information area 7044 , and the fourth file information area 7048 are the corresponding virtual three-dimensional objects in which files corresponding to these file information areas are observable in the augmented reality environment. They are displayed without virtual object indicators because they do not have them.

7P shows an email user including email navigation controls 7054 , an email information area 7056 , and an email content area 7058 that includes a representation of a first attachment 7060 and a representation of a second attachment 7062 . Interface 7052 is shown. The representation of the first attachment 7060 includes a virtual object indicator 7064 indicating that the first attachment is a virtual three-dimensional object observable in the augmented reality environment. The second attachment 7062 is displayed without the virtual object indicator because the second attachment is not an observable virtual three-dimensional object in the augmented reality environment.

8A-8E are flow diagrams illustrating a method 800 of displaying a representation of a virtual object while switching from displaying a first user interface region to displaying a second user interface region, in accordance with some embodiments. admit. The method 800 includes an electronic device (eg, the device of FIG. 3 ) having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more cameras (eg, one or more rear cameras on the side of the device opposite the display and the touch-sensitive surface). 300 , or portable multifunction device 100 of FIG. 1A ). In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 800 are selectively combined and/or the order of some operations is selectively changed.

Method 800 relates to detecting input by contact at a touch-sensitive surface of a device that displays a representation of a virtual object within a first user interface area. In response to the input, the device uses criteria to determine whether to continuously display the representation of the virtual object while replacing the display of at least a portion of the first user interface area with the field of view of one or more cameras of the device. performing a number of different types of actions in response to an input by using criteria for determining whether to continuously display a representation of the virtual object while replacing the display of at least a portion of the first user interface area with the field of view of one or more cameras makes it possible (e.g., by replacing the display of at least a portion of the user interface with the field of view of one or more cameras, or without replacing the display of at least a portion of the first user interface area with a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras. Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations in response to input (by holding a display) increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which additionally: It reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling users to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

The device is located within a first user interface area on the display 112 (eg, a two-dimensional graphical user interface or portion thereof (eg, a browsable list of furniture images, an image containing one or more selectable objects, etc.) Representation of a virtual object (eg, a graphical representation of a three-dimensional object, eg, virtual chair 5020, virtual lamp 5084, shoes, furniture, hand tools, decorations, person, emoji, game character, virtual furniture, etc. ) is displayed (802). For example, the first user interface area is a messaging user interface 5008 as shown in FIG. 5B or an Internet browser user interface 5060 as shown in FIG. 5ae. In some embodiments, the first user interface region includes a background other than an image of the physical environment surrounding the device (eg, the background of the first user interface region may be configured by a preselected background color/pattern, or by one or more cameras). A background image that is distinct from the output image captured at the same time and that is distinct from live content within the field of view of one or more cameras).

While displaying a first representation of the virtual object within a first user interface area on the display, the device detects a first input by contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface 112 corresponding to the representation of the virtual object on the display ( For example, the contact is detected on a first representation of the virtual object on the touch screen display, or the contact is displayed concurrently with the first representation of the virtual object within the first user interface area and when invoked by the contact, the display of the AR view of the virtual object. is detected on the affordance configured to trigger (804). For example, the first input is an input by contact 5020 as described with respect to FIGS. 5C-5F or an input by contact 5086 as described with respect to FIGS. 5A-5A .

In response to detecting the first input by the contact, according to a determination that the first input by the contact meets first (eg, AR trigger) criteria (eg, the AR trigger criteria trigger activation of the camera(s)) A swipe input, touch-hold input, press input, tap input, hard press having an intensity that exceeds a predefined intensity threshold, or other type of predefined input gesture associated with doing , display of an augmented reality (AR) view of the physical environment around the device, placement of a three-dimensional representation of a virtual object inside the augmented reality view of the physical environment, and/or criteria configured to identify a combination of two or more of the above actions) , the device displaying a second user interface area on the display, the device comprising replacing the display of at least a portion of the first user interface area with a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras, the device displaying the first user interface area Continuously displays ( 806 ) the representation of the virtual object while switching from displaying the second user interface area to displaying the second user interface area. For example, the second user interface area on the display may be the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) within the platter 5030 as described with respect to FIG. 5H , or the camera(s) as described with respect to FIG. 5A . is the field of view 5034 of 5C-5I , upon determining that the input by contact 5026 has a characteristic intensity that increases above the deep press intensity threshold IT _D , the virtual chair object 5020 is displayed in a first user interface area ( Switching from displaying the messaging user interface 5008 to displaying a second user interface area that replaces the display of a portion of the messaging user interface 5008 with the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) within the platter 5030 displayed continuously while 5A-5A , in accordance with a determination that the input by contact 5086 has a characteristic intensity that increases above the deep press intensity threshold IT _D , the virtual lamp object 5084 is displayed in a first user interface area ( continuous while switching from displaying the Internet browser user interface 5060) to displaying a second user interface area that replaces the display of a portion of the Internet browser user interface 5060 with the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) is displayed as

In some embodiments, continuously displaying the representation of the virtual object includes maintaining display of the representation of the virtual object, or a second representation of the virtual object (eg, of a different size, from a different viewing angle, of a different rendering style). , or a view of the virtual object at a different location on the display) and displaying the animated transition of the first representation of the virtual object. In some embodiments, the field of view 5034 of the one or more cameras is updated in real time as the location and orientation of the device changes with respect to the physical environment (eg, as illustrated in FIGS. 5K and 5L ) around the physical environment of the device. Displays a live image of the environment 5002 . In some embodiments, the second user interface area completely replaces the first user interface area on the display.

In some embodiments, the second user interface region overlays a portion of the first user interface region (eg, a portion of the first user interface region is shown along an edge of the display or around its boundaries). In some embodiments, the second user interface area pops up after the first user interface area. In some embodiments, the background within the first user interface area is replaced with the content of the field of view 5034 of the camera(s). In some embodiments, the device advances the virtual object from a first orientation as shown in the first user interface area to a second orientation (eg, relative to a current orientation of a portion of the physical environment being captured within the field of view of one or more cameras). Displays an animated transition showing moving and rotating (eg, as illustrated in FIGS. 5E-5I ) in a defined orientation). For example, the animation includes a transition from displaying a two-dimensional representation of the virtual object while displaying a first user interface area to displaying a three-dimensional representation of the virtual object while displaying a second user interface area. . In some embodiments, the three-dimensional representation of the virtual object is a predefined anchor plane based on the shape and orientation of the virtual object as shown in the two-dimensional graphical user interface (eg, the first user interface area). has When transitioned to the augmented reality view (eg, the second user interface region), the three-dimensional representation of the virtual object moves from the original position of the virtual object on the display to a new position on the display (eg, the center of the augmented reality view, or the augmented reality view). is moved, resized, reoriented, during or at the end of the movement, to another predefined location in the orientated to be in a predefined position and/or orientation relative to a predefined plane (eg, a physical surface such as a vertical wall or horizontal floor surface that may serve as a support plane for a three-dimensional representation of a virtual object).

In some embodiments, the first criteria are: when the contact remains with movement less than a threshold amount for at least a predefined time (eg, a long press time threshold) at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the representation of the virtual object ( Criteria that are satisfied (eg, in accordance with a determination to be maintained) are included (808). In some embodiments, upon determining that the contact satisfies criteria for recognizing another type of gesture (eg, a tap), the device may pre-emptively other than triggering the AR user interface while maintaining display of the virtual object. It performs the defined function. display of at least a portion of the first user interface area according to whether the contact is maintained with movement less than a threshold amount for at least a predefined time at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the representation of the virtual object; Determining whether to continuously display the representation of the virtual object while replacing with , enables performing a number of different types of operations in response to the input. Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations in response to input increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which in addition allows the user to perform more By enabling quick and efficient use, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, the first criteria are determined when the characteristic intensity of the contact increases (eg, when a characteristic intensity of the contact increases above a first intensity threshold (eg, a light press intensity threshold IT _L or a deep press intensity threshold IT _D )). Criteria to be satisfied ( 810 ) For example, as described in connection with FIGS. 5C-5F , criteria indicate that the characteristic intensity of contact 5026 exceeds a deep press intensity threshold IT _D , as indicated by intensity level meter 5028 , is satisfied when it increases. In some embodiments, upon determining that the contact satisfies criteria for recognizing another type of gesture (eg, a tap), the device may trigger other advances than triggering the AR user interface while maintaining display of the virtual object. It performs the defined function. In some embodiments, the first criteria require that the first input is not a tap input (eg, the input has a duration between touchdown of the contact and liftoff of the contact that is longer than a tap time threshold). whether to continuously display the representation of the virtual object while replacing the display of at least a portion of the first user interface area with the field of view of the camera(s) according to whether the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold Determining enables performance of a number of different types of operations in response to the input. Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations in response to input increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which in addition allows the user to perform more By enabling quick and efficient use, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, the first criteria are determined when movement of the contact meets predefined movement criteria (eg, a predefined threshold location at which the contact crosses the touch-sensitive surface (eg, a boundary of the first user interface area). When moving past a position corresponding to , a position that is a critical distance away from the original position of the contact, etc.), when the contact moves at a speed greater than a predefined threshold velocity, when the movement of the contact is terminated with a press input, etc.) Includes ( 812 ) criteria that are satisfied (eg, in accordance with a determination that it is). In some embodiments, the representation of the virtual object is dragged by the contact during an initial part of the movement of the contact, and is virtual when the movement of the contact is about to meet predefined defined movement criteria to indicate that first criteria are to be met. The object stops moving by contact; When the movement of the contact continues and the predefined movement criteria are met by the continued movement of the contact, a transition to displaying the second user interface area and displaying the virtual object within the augmented reality view is initiated. In some embodiments, when the virtual object is dragged during the initial portion of the first input, the object size and viewing point do not change, and once the augmented reality view is displayed and the virtual object is dropped into place in the augmented reality view, the virtual The object is displayed in the augmented reality view with a size and viewpoint dependent on the physical position represented by the drop-off position of the virtual object. determining whether to continuously display the representation of the virtual object while replacing the display of at least a portion of the first user interface area with the field of view of the camera(s) according to whether the movement of the contact meets predefined movement criteria; It enables performance of a number of different types of operations in response to an input. Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations in response to input increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which in addition allows the user to perform more By enabling quick and efficient use, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input by the contact, in response to determining that the first input by the contact met the first criteria, the device determines satisfaction of the first criteria by the first input tactile output (eg, tactile output 5032 as described with respect to FIG. 5F or tactile output 5088 as described with respect to FIG. 5Ah) to represent one or more tactile output generators (167), and output (814). In some embodiments, a haptic is generated before the field of view of one or more cameras is visible on the display. For example, the haptic represents activation of one or more camera(s) and satisfaction of first criteria that trigger subsequent plane detection of the field of view of the one or more camera(s). Because it takes time for the cameras to be activated and for the field of view to become available for display, the haptic tells the user that the device has detected the required input and will present the augmented reality user interface as soon as the device is ready. It serves as a visual cue.

Outputting a tactile output to indicate satisfaction of criteria (eg, for replacing the display of at least a portion of the user interface with the field of view of the camera(s)) provides feedback to the user indicating that the provided input satisfies the criteria. do. Providing improved tactile feedback improves the operability of the device (e.g., by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when actuating/interacting with the device), which additionally: It reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling users to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, detecting at least an initial portion of the first input (eg, detecting a contact, or detecting an input by a contact meeting respective predefined criteria without meeting the first criteria) , or detecting input that satisfies the first criteria), the device may display one or more planes within the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, a floor surface 5038 , a table surface 5046 , The field of view of one or more cameras is analyzed (816) to detect walls, etc.). In some embodiments, one or more cameras are activated in response to detecting at least an initial portion of the first input, and plane detection is initiated concurrently when the camera(s) are activated. In some embodiments, the display of the field of view of the one or more cameras is delayed after activation of the one or more cameras (eg, from when the one or more cameras are activated until at least one plane is detected within the field of view of the camera(s)) do. In some embodiments, display of the field of view of the one or more cameras is initiated when the one or more cameras are activated, and plane detection is completed after the field of view is already visible on the display (eg, in the second user interface area). In some embodiments, after detecting each plane within the field of view of the one or more cameras, the device determines the size and/or position of the representation of the virtual object based on the relative position of each plane to the field of view of the one or more cameras. decide In some embodiments, as the electronic device is moved, the size and/or position of the representation of the virtual object (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 5K and 5L ) may vary depending on the position of the field of view of each of the one or more cameras. It is updated as it changes with respect to the plane. virtual based on the position of each plane detected within the field of view of the camera(s) (eg, without requiring additional user input to size and/or position the virtual object with respect to the field of view of the camera(s)). Determining the size and/or position of the representation of an object improves the operability of the device, which further reduces power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling a user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. make it

In some embodiments, analyzing the field of view of the one or more cameras to detect one or more planes within the field of view of the one or more cameras includes detecting a contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the representation of the virtual object on the display. In response (eg, in response to detection of contact 5026 at a location on touch screen 112 corresponding to virtual chair 5020) 818 is initiated. For example, activation of the cameras and detection of planes within the field of view of the camera(s) before first criteria are met by the first input (eg, as described with respect to FIG. 5F , characteristic of contact 5026 ) before the intensity increases beyond the deep press intensity threshold IT _D ) and before the second user interface area is displayed. By starting the plane detection upon detection of any interaction with the virtual object, the plane detection can be completed before the AR trigger criteria are met, and thus into the augmented reality view when the AR trigger criteria are met by the first input. There will be no visible delay to the user when viewing the virtual object transition of . One or more planes within the field of view of the camera(s) in response to detection of a contact at the location of the representation of the virtual object (eg, without requiring additional user input to initiate analysis of the camera(s) field of view) Initiating analysis to detect improves the effectiveness of the device, which additionally enables a user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life.

In some embodiments, analyzing the field of view of the one or more cameras to detect one or more planes within the field of view of the one or more cameras is responsive to detecting that first criteria are met by the first input by the contact ( For example, as described in connection with FIG. 5F , in response to detecting that a characteristic intensity of contact 5026 increases above a deep press intensity threshold IT _D , is initiated ( 820 ). For example, activation of the cameras and detection of planes within a field of view of the camera(s) begins when first criteria are met by a first input, and the field of view of the camera is displayed before plane detection is complete. By initiating camera activation and plane detection upon satisfaction of AR trigger criteria, cameras and plane detection are not activated unnecessarily and do not proceed, conserving battery power and prolonging battery life and camera life.

In some embodiments, analyzing the field of view of the one or more cameras to detect one or more planes within the field of view of the one or more cameras does not satisfy the plane-detection trigger criteria while an initial portion of the first input does not meet the first criteria. Initiated ( 822 ) in response to detecting that it is satisfied. For example, activation of the cameras and detection of planes within the field of view of the camera(s) may occur when some criteria (eg, criteria less stringent than AR trigger criteria) are met by an initial portion of the first input. started, and the camera's field of view is optionally displayed before plane detection is complete. By starting camera activation and plane detection after meeting certain criteria rather than upon detection of a contact, cameras and plane detection are not activated unnecessarily and do not proceed, conserving battery power and prolonging battery life and camera life . By starting camera activation and plane detection before the AR trigger criteria are satisfied, the delay (due to camera activation and plane detection) for displaying the virtual object transition to the augmented reality view is reduced when the AR trigger criteria are met by the first input do.

In some embodiments, the device is configured such that a virtual object (eg, virtual chair 5020) is oriented at a predefined angle with respect to each plane detected within the field of view 5034 of one or more cameras (eg, a floor surface Display ( 824 ) a representation of the virtual object within the second user interface area in a respective manner such that there is no distance (or has a minimum distance) separating the lower surfaces of the four legs of the virtual chair 5020 from 5038 ). . For example, the orientation and/or position of the virtual object with respect to each plane is predefined based on the shape and orientation of the virtual object as shown in the two-dimensional graphical user interface (eg, each plane has an augmented reality view). Each plane corresponds to a horizontal physical surface (eg, a horizontal table surface for supporting a vase) that can serve as a support surface for a three-dimensional representation of the virtual object in the augmented reality view, or each plane is a three-dimensional representation of the virtual object in the augmented reality view. A vertical physical surface (eg, a vertical wall for suspending virtual picture frames) that can serve as a support surface for In some embodiments, the orientation and/or position of the virtual object is defined by a respective surface or boundary (eg, lower surface, lower boundary points, side surface, and/or side boundary points) of the virtual object. In some embodiments, the anchor plane corresponding to each plane is one of a set of properties of the virtual object and is specified according to a characteristic of the physical object that the virtual object is intended to represent. In some embodiments, the virtual object is positioned at a predefined orientation and/or position relative to a number of planes detected within the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, each of the plurality of faces of the virtual object is ) associated with each of the planes detected within the field of view). In some embodiments, if a predefined orientation and/or position with respect to the virtual object is defined with respect to a horizontal subplane of the virtual object, then the subplane of the virtual object is on the floor plane detected within the field of view of the camera(s). is displayed (eg, the horizontal lower plane of the virtual object is parallel to the floor plane at a distance of zero from the floor plane). In some embodiments, if a predefined orientation and/or position with respect to the virtual object is defined with respect to a vertical rear plane of the virtual object, then the rear surface of the virtual object is directed against a wall plane detected within the field of view of the one or more cameras. placed (eg, the vertical back plane of the virtual object is parallel to the wall plane at a distance of zero from the wall plane). In some embodiments, the virtual object is positioned at a fixed distance with respect to each plane and/or at an angle other than 0 degrees or 90 degrees with respect to each plane. Displaying a representation of the virtual object relative to a plane detected within the field of view of the camera(s) (eg, without requiring additional user input to display the virtual object relative to a plane within the field of view of the camera(s)) improves the operability of the device, which additionally enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the power usage of the device and improving the battery life.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting each plane within the field of view of the one or more cameras, the device outputs a tactile output to indicate detection of each plane within the field of view of the one or more cameras, the one or more tactile output By the generators 167, output 826. In some embodiments, a respective tactile output is generated for each plane (eg, floor surface 5038 and/or table surface 5046 ) detected within the field of view of the camera(s). In some embodiments, a tactile output is generated when plane detection is complete. In some embodiments, the tactile output is accompanied by a visual indication of the viewing plane within the field of view shown in the second user interface portion (eg, instantaneous highlighting of the detected viewing plane). Outputting a tactile output to indicate detection of a plane within the field of view of the camera(s) provides feedback to the user indicating that a plane has been detected. Providing improved tactile feedback improves the operability of the device (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing unnecessary additional inputs to place the virtual object), which in addition allows the user to It reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling faster and more efficient use of the device.

In some embodiments, while switching from displaying the first user interface area to displaying the second user interface area, the device causes the representation of the virtual object (eg, as illustrated in FIGS. 5F-5I ) display an animation as it transitions (eg, moved, rotated, resized, and/or re-rendered in a different style, etc.) to a predefined position for each plane into the second user interface area, each virtual at a predefined angle with respect to the plane of In conjunction with displaying the representation of the object, the device sends a tactile output to one or more tactile output generators 167 to indicate displaying the virtual object at a predefined angle relative to each plane within the second user interface area. ) to output (828). For example, as illustrated in FIG. 5I , the device outputs a tactile output 5036 along with displaying the virtual chair 5020 at a predefined angle relative to the floor surface 5038 . In some embodiments, the tactile output generated is a weight (eg, heavy versus light), a material (eg, metal, cotton, wood, marble, liquid, rubber, glass), size (eg, large versus small), shape (e.g., thin vs. thick, long vs. short, round vs. pointed, etc.), elasticity (e.g., resilience vs. rigidity), nature (e.g., cheerful vs. solemn, gentle vs. coercive, etc.), and of or on virtual objects configured to have properties (eg, frequency, number of cycles, modulation, amplitude, accompanying audio waves, etc.) that reflect other properties of the physical object represented by For example, the tactile output uses one or more of the tactile output patterns illustrated in FIGS. 4F-4K . In some embodiments, a preset profile comprising one or more changes to one or more characteristics over time corresponds to a virtual object (eg, an emoji). For example, a “bouncing” tactile output profile is provided for the “smiley face” emoji virtual object. Outputting the tactile output to indicate the placement of the representation of the virtual object relative to each plane provides feedback to the user indicating that the representation of the virtual object has been automatically positioned relative to each plane. Providing improved tactile feedback improves the operability of the device (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing unnecessary additional inputs to place the virtual object), which in addition allows the user to It reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling faster and more efficient use of the device.

In some embodiments, the tactile output has ( 830 ) a tactile output profile that corresponds to a property of the virtual object (eg, simulated physical properties such as size, density, mass, and/or material). In some embodiments, the tactile output profile is a variable based on one or more characteristics (eg, weight, material, size, shape, and/or elasticity) of the virtual object (eg, frequency, number of cycles; modulation, amplitude, accompanying audio waves, etc.). For example, the tactile output uses one or more of the tactile output patterns illustrated in FIGS. 4F-4K . In some embodiments, the amplitude and/or duration of the tactile output increases as the size, weight, and/or mass of the virtual object increases. In some embodiments, the tactile output pattern is selected based on the virtual material constituting the virtual object. Outputting the tactile output having a profile corresponding to the characteristic of the virtual object provides feedback indicating information about the characteristic of the virtual object to the user. Providing improved tactile feedback (e.g., helping the user provide appropriate inputs, reducing unnecessary additional inputs for placing virtual objects, and not confusing the user interface with displayed information about properties) By providing sensory information that allows the user to recognize the characteristics of the virtual object in the present invention), the operability of the device is improved, which additionally reduces the power consumption of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. Improves battery life.

In some embodiments, while displaying the representation of the virtual object within the second user interface area, the device adjusts the field of view 5034 of one or more cameras (eg, as illustrated in FIGS. 5K and 5L ). Detecting movement (eg, lateral movement and/or rotation of the device), and in response to detecting movement of the device, the device moves to each plane (eg, in the field of view of the one or more cameras) as the field of view of the one or more cameras is adjusted. , adjusts the representation of the virtual object (eg, virtual chair 5020) within the second user interface area according to a fixed spatial relationship (eg, orientation and/or position) between the floor surface 5038) and the virtual object. (e.g., the virtual object is displayed on the display in an orientation and position such that a fixed angle between the plane and the representation of the virtual object is maintained (e.g., the virtual object remains at a fixed position on the plane or rolls along the viewing plane) appear to)) (832). For example, in FIGS. 5K and 5L , the virtual chair 5020 within the second user interface area that includes the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) is moved relative to the floor surface 5038 as the device 100 is moved. Maintain a fixed orientation and position. In some embodiments, the virtual object appears stationary and unchanged relative to the surrounding physical environment 5002 , i.e., the representation of the virtual object changes in size, position, and The orientation changes because the field of view of one or more cameras changes as the device moves relative to the surrounding physical environment. Adjusting the representation of the virtual object according to a fixed relationship between the virtual object and each plane (eg, without requiring additional user input to maintain the position of the virtual object with respect to each plane) is the operability of the device. , which further reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, (eg, at a time corresponding to replacing the display of at least a portion of the first user interface area with a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras), the device is a virtual object (eg, virtual chair 5020) An animation (eg, movement, Displays (834) rotation and/or scaling about one or more axes. For example, the animation includes a transition from displaying a two-dimensional representation of the virtual object while displaying a first user interface area to displaying a three-dimensional representation of the virtual object while displaying a second user interface area. . In some embodiments, the three-dimensional representation of the virtual object has a predefined orientation relative to the current orientation of the portion of the physical environment that is captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras. In some embodiments, upon transition to the augmented reality view, the representation of the virtual object is moved from an initial position on the display to a new position on the display (eg, the center of the augmented reality view, or another predefined position within the augmented reality view) and , resized, reoriented, and, during or at the end of movement, the plane in which the virtual object is detected within the field of view of the camera(s) (eg, a vertical wall or horizontal floor surface capable of supporting the representation of the virtual object and It is reoriented so that it is at a fixed angle to the same physical surface). In some embodiments, the virtual object's contrast and/or shadow cast by the virtual object is adjusted as the animated transition occurs (eg, to match ambient lighting detected within the field of view of one or more cameras). Displaying the animation as a representation of the virtual object during switching from displaying the first user interface region to the second user interface region provides feedback to the user indicating that the first input meets the first criteria. Providing improved feedback improves the operability of the device (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the device), which additionally allows the user to By enabling the device to be used more quickly and efficiently, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, while displaying the second user interface region on the display, the device detects a second input by a second contact (eg, contact 5040), wherein the second input is (eg, FIG. including movement of the second contact along a first path across the display (and optionally a press or touch input by a second contact to select a representation of the virtual object) (as illustrated in FIGS. 5N-5P ) -, in response to detecting the second input by the second contact, the device is within a second user interface area along a second path corresponding to the first path (eg, equal to or constrained by the first path) moves ( 836 ) the representation of the virtual object (eg, virtual chair 5020 ). In some embodiments, the second contact is separate from the first contact and is detected after liftoff of the first contact (eg, FIGS. 5N-5P detected after liftoff of contact 5026 of FIGS. 5C-5F ). as exemplified by contact 5040 of In some embodiments, the second contact is as illustrated by input by contact 5086 (eg, meets AR trigger criteria and then moves across touch screen 112 to move virtual ramp 5084 ). same) as the first contact maintained continuously on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, a swipe input on the virtual object rotates the virtual object, while movement of the virtual object is optionally constrained by a plane within the camera(s)'s field of view (eg, the swipe input rotates the camera(s)) rotates the representation of the chair on the floor plane within the field of view of Moving the representation of the virtual object in response to detecting the input provides feedback to the user indicating that the displayed position of the virtual object is movable in response to the user input. Providing improved feedback improves the operability of the device (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the device), which additionally allows the user to By enabling the device to be used more quickly and efficiently, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, the device moves along the second path (eg, at a virtual distance from the representation of the virtual object to the user) as the representation of the virtual object moves along the second path based on the respective plane corresponding to the movement of the contact and the virtual object. Based on the size of the representation of the virtual object ( 838 ) to maintain an accurate viewpoint of the virtual object within the field of view. For example, in FIGS. 5N-5P , the size of the virtual chair 5020 decreases as the virtual chair moves deeper into the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) away from the device 100 and towards the table 5004 . do. (e.g., without requiring additional user input to resize the representation of the virtual object to maintain the representation of the virtual object at its actual size with respect to the environment within the field of view of the camera(s)) Resizing the representation of the virtual object as it moves along a second path based on the movement and a plane corresponding to the virtual object improves the operability of the device, which additionally allows the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. It reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling

In some embodiments, the device displays a second representation of the virtual object (eg, virtual ramp 5084 ) as the representation of the virtual object moves along the second path (eg, as illustrated in FIGS. 5AI-5A ). Maintaining one magnitude, the device detects termination of the second input by the second contact (including detecting liftoff of the second contact, eg, as illustrated in FIGS. 5A-5A ), and In response to detecting the end of the second input by the second contact, the device places the representation of the virtual object at a dropped location (eg, on the table surface 5046 ) within the second user interface area, and distinguishes it from the first size. Displays a representation of the virtual object at the drop location within the second user interface area at a second size that is equal to the size of the virtual ramp 5084 of FIG. (distinct from the size of the virtual ramp 5084 of FIG. 5A) (840) before the end of the input by For example, the object does not change its size and viewpoint while being dragged by contact, and when the object is dropped to its final position in the augmented reality view, the object is the falling position of the virtual object visible in the field of view of the camera(s) displayed with a view point and a size determined based on a physical location within the physical environment corresponding to the causing the object to have a third size different from the second size in accordance with a determination that it is a second location within the field of view of the camera(s), wherein the second and third sizes are selected based on a distance of the drop location from the one or more cameras do. terminating the second input to move the virtual object (eg, without requiring additional user input to resize the virtual object to maintain the virtual object at its actual size with respect to the environment within the field of view of the camera(s)). Displaying the representation of the virtual object at a changed size in response to detecting improves the operability of the device, which additionally enables a user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the power usage of the device and reducing the battery improve lifespan

In some embodiments, movement of the second contact along the first path across the display meets second criteria (eg, at the end of the first path, the contact is at an edge of the display (eg, bottom edge, top edge). , and/or a side edge) or is within a threshold distance of or outside the edge of the second user interface area), the device displays a second user interface area comprising a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras. stops, and redisplays the (full) first user interface area with the representation of the virtual object (eg, if a portion of the first user interface area was previously displayed concurrently with the second user interface area, the device 2 display the entire first user interface area after the user interface area is no longer displayed (842). For example, in response to movement of contact 5054 dragging virtual chair 5054 to the edge of touch screen 112 , as illustrated in FIGS. 5V-5X , as illustrated in FIGS. 5Y-5A . Likewise, the field of view 5034 of the camera(s) ceases to be displayed and the entire messaging user interface 5008 is redisplayed. In some embodiments, as the contact approaches an edge of the display or an edge of the second user interface region, the second user interface region fades out (eg, as illustrated in FIGS. 5X and 5Y ) and/or the second user interface region 1 The undisplayed or blocked portion of the user interface area (eg, as illustrated in FIGS. 5Z and 5AA ) fades in. In some embodiments, the gesture to transition from the non-AR view (eg, first user interface region) to the AR view (eg, second user interface region) and the gesture to transition from AR view to non-AR view are the same Do. For example, a drag gesture on a virtual object that crosses a threshold position in the currently displayed user interface (eg, within a threshold distance of the boundary of the currently displayed user interface area, or beyond the boundary of the currently displayed user interface area). is from the currently displayed user interface region to a counterpart user interface region (eg, from displaying a first user interface region to displaying a second user interface region, or alternatively, a second user interface region). cause a transition from displaying the region to displaying the first user interface region). In some embodiments, the visual indication (eg, fading out the currently displayed user interface area and fading in the opposing user interface) is shown before the first/second criteria are met, the input continues and the first/second criteria are met. The second criteria are reversible if the second criteria are not met before the end of the input (eg, liftoff of the contact) is detected. Redisplaying the first user interface in response to detecting input that meets the input criteria may include displayed additional controls (eg, controls for displaying the first user interface from the second user interface) of the second user interface. provides additional control options without confusing the Providing additional control options without cluttering the second user interface with additional controls displayed improves the operability of the device, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reduce power consumption and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, at a time corresponding to redisplaying the first user interface area, the device may display a second user interface (eg, as illustrated by the animation of virtual chair 5020 in FIGS. 5A-5A ). An animated transition (eg, movement, rotation about one or more axes, and/or scaling) from displaying a representation of the virtual object within the area to displaying a representation of the virtual object within the first user interface area. Display (844). displaying a representation of the virtual object in the first user interface from displaying a representation of the virtual object in the second user interface (eg, without requiring additional user input to reposition the virtual object within the first user interface). Displaying an animated transition to one improves the operability of the device, which additionally enables a user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life.

In some embodiments, as the second contact moves along the first path, the device changes the visual appearance of one or more respective planes identified within the field of view of the one or more cameras corresponding to the current location of the contact (eg, , highlighting, marking, contouring, and/or otherwise visually altering the appearance of one or more planes (846). For example, as contact 5042 drags virtual chair 5020 along a path as illustrated by arrows 5042 , 5044 in FIGS. 5O and 5P , floor surface 5038 (eg, 5M before movement of contact 5042) is highlighted. In some embodiments, upon determining that the contact is at a location corresponding to the first plane being detected within the field of view of the camera(s), the first plane is highlighted. In accordance with a determination that the contact has moved to a location corresponding to the second plane being detected within the field of view of the camera(s) (eg, as shown in FIGS. 5S-5U ), the first plane (eg, the floor surface 5038)) ceases to be emphasized and the second plane (eg, table surface 5046) is highlighted. In some embodiments, multiple planes are highlighted simultaneously. In some embodiments, a first plane of the plurality of visually altered planes is visually altered in a manner separate from the way other planes are visually altered to indicate that the contact is at a position corresponding to the first plane. . Changing the visual appearance of each of the one or more planes identified within the field of view of the camera(s) provides feedback to the user indicating that a plane (eg, with respect to which a virtual object may be positioned) has been identified. Providing improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the device), which additionally It reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling faster and more efficient use of the device.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input by the contact, in response to determining that the first input by the contact meets a third (eg, staging user interface display) criteria (eg, displaying a staging user interface) The criteria are criteria configured to identify a swipe input, a touch-and-hold input, a press input, a tap input, or a strong press having an intensity that exceeds a predefined intensity threshold), the device is configured to: (eg, a 2D image of the virtual object) Display ( 848 ) the third user interface region on the display, including replacing the display of at least a portion of the first user interface region (including the 3D model of the virtual object that has been replaced). In some embodiments, while displaying a staging user interface (eg, staging user interface 6010 as described with respect to FIG. 6I ), the device (eg, described in greater detail below with reference to method 900 ) update the appearance of the representation of the virtual object based on the detected inputs corresponding to the staging user interface. In some embodiments, if another input is detected while the virtual object is being displayed in the staging user interface and the input meets the criteria for transitioning to displaying the second user interface area, the device continuously displays the virtual object while Replace the display of the staging user interface with the second user interface area. Further details are described with respect to method 900 . Displaying the third user interface in accordance with a determination that the first input meets the third criteria includes the first user with displayed additional controls (eg, controls for displaying a third user interface from the first user interface). It provides additional control options without cluttering the interface. Providing additional control options without cluttering the second user interface with additional controls displayed improves the operability of the device, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reduce power consumption and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, in response to a first input by contact (eg, a swipe input corresponding to scrolling the first user interface area or a request to display an email or web page corresponding to content within the first user interface area) Upon determining that the tap input) does not satisfy the first (eg, AR trigger) criteria, the device displays a display of at least a portion of the first user interface area (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 6B and 6C ). Maintains the display of the first user interface area ( 850 ) without replacing . input by using the first criteria to determine whether to keep the display of the first user interface area or to continuously display the representation of the virtual object while replacing the display of at least a portion of the first user interface area with the field of view of the one or more cameras. responsive to performing a number of different types of operations. (e.g., by replacing the display of at least a portion of the user interface with the field of view of one or more cameras, or without replacing the display of at least a portion of the first user interface area with a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras. Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations in response to input (by holding a display) increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which additionally: It reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling users to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

It should be understood that the specific order in which the operations in FIGS. 8A-8E are described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations may be performed. Those skilled in the art will recognize various ways of reordering the operations described herein. Further, details of other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (eg, methods 900 , 1000 ) are similar to method 800 described above with respect to FIGS. 8A-8E . It should be noted that a similar manner is also applicable. For example, contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interface regions, intensity thresholds, tactile outputs, fields of view, movements, and/or animations described above with respect to method 800 may optionally be , contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interface described herein in connection with other methods described herein (eg, methods 900, 1000, 16000, 17000, 18000, 19000, 20000). have one or more of the properties of regions, intensity thresholds, tactile outputs, fields of view, movements, and/or animations. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated here.

9A-9D illustrate a first representation of a virtual object within a first user interface area, a second representation of a virtual object within a second user interface area, and a representation of a field of view of one or more cameras, in accordance with some embodiments; Together are flow diagrams illustrating a method 900 of displaying a third representation of a virtual object. The method 900 includes an electronic device (eg, the device of FIG. 3 ) having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more cameras (eg, one or more rear cameras on the side of the device opposite the display and the touch-sensitive surface). 300 , or portable multifunction device 100 of FIG. 1A ). In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 900 are selectively combined and/or the order of some operations is selectively changed.

As described below, method 900 relates to detecting input by contact at a touch-sensitive surface of a device that displays a representation of a virtual object within a first user interface (eg, a two-dimensional graphical user interface). . In response to the first input, the device determines whether to display a second representation of the virtual object within a second user interface (eg, a staging user interface in which the three-dimensional representation of the virtual object may be moved, resized, and/or reoriented). Criteria for determining whether or not While displaying a second representation of the virtual object within the second user interface, in response to the second input, the device changes a display property of the second representation of the virtual object based on the second input or changes the display properties of the one or more cameras of the device. Display a third representation of the virtual object within a third user interface comprising a field of view. Enabling performance of a number of different types of actions in response to an input (eg, by changing a display property of the virtual object or displaying the virtual object within a third user interface) is the efficiency with which a user can perform these actions. , thereby improving the operability of the device, which additionally enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the power usage of the device and improving the battery life.

The device creates a second virtual object within a first user interface area (eg, a two-dimensional graphical user interface or portion thereof (eg, a viewable list of furniture images, an image containing one or more selectable objects, etc.) on the display 112 ). 1 representation (eg, a graphic representation of a three-dimensional object, eg, virtual chair 5020, virtual lamp 5084, shoes, furniture, hand tools, decorations, person, emoji, game character, virtual furniture, etc.) Display (902). For example, the first user interface area is a messaging user interface 5008 as shown in FIG. 6A . In some embodiments, the first user interface region includes a background other than an image of the physical environment surrounding the device (eg, the background of the first user interface region may be configured by a preselected background color/pattern, or by one or more cameras). A background image that is distinct from the output image captured at the same time and that is distinct from live content within the field of view of one or more cameras).

While displaying a first representation of the virtual object within a first user interface area on the display, the device detects a first input by the first contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the first representation of the virtual object on the display (eg, the first contact is detected on a first representation of the virtual object on the touch screen display, or the first contact is simultaneously displayed in the first user interface area with the first representation of the virtual object and is invoked by the first contact. an affordance configured to trigger display of the staging user interface 6010 comprising a representation of an AR view (eg, field of view 6036 of the camera(s)) and/or a virtual object (eg, virtual chair 5020) when detected on the toggle control 6018) (904). For example, the first input is an input by contact 6006 as described with respect to FIGS. 6E-6I .

In response to detecting the first input by the first contact and in response to determining that the first input by the first contact meets first (eg, staging trigger) criteria (eg, the staging trigger criteria include: a swipe input; Continue to touch input, press input, tap input, touchdown of contact, initial movement of contact, or other type associated with triggering activation of the camera(s) and/or detection of viewing planes within the field of view of the camera(s) criteria configured to identify a predefined input gesture), the device displays a second representation of the virtual object in a second user interface area different from the first user interface area (eg, the second user interface area is the camera(s)) is a staging user interface 6010 ( 906 ) that does not include a field of view of and includes a simulated three-dimensional space in which a three-dimensional representation of a virtual object can be manipulated (eg, rotated and moved) in response to user input. For example, in FIGS. 6E-6H , upon determining that the input by contact 6006 has a characteristic intensity that increases above the deep press intensity threshold IT _D , the virtual chair object 5020 (eg, , displayed in a staging user interface 6010 (eg, as shown in FIG. 6I ) that is distinct from the messaging user interface 5008 (as shown in FIG. 6E ).

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input and upon determining that the first input satisfies the staging trigger criteria, the device displays a first three-dimensional representation of the virtual object as shown in the first user interface region. A virtual on the display oriented independently of the device's current orientation with respect to the physical environment surrounding the device from one orientation (eg, a first orientation of virtual chair 5020 as shown in messaging user interface 5008 of FIG. 6E ). a first showing being moved and redirected to a second orientation determined based on the plane (eg, a second orientation of the virtual chair 5020 determined based on the stage plane 6014 , as shown in FIG. 6I ) Displays animated transitions. For example, a three-dimensional representation of a virtual object may have a predefined orientation (e.g., based on the shape and orientation of the virtual object as shown in a two-dimensional graphical user interface) and/or distance from a plane, and a staging view ( When transitioned to, for example, the staging user interface 6010 ), the three-dimensional representation is moved, resized, and reoriented from the original location of the virtual object on the display to a new location on the display (eg, the center of the virtual stage 6014 ). and, during or at the end of the movement, the three-dimensional representation is reoriented such that the virtual object is at a fixed angle with respect to a predefined staging virtual plane 6014 that is defined independently of the physical environment around the device.

While displaying a second representation of the virtual object within the second user interface area, the device detects ( 908 ) a second input (eg, input by contact 6034 as illustrated in FIGS. 6Q-6T ). In some embodiments, detecting the second input includes detecting one or more second contacts at a location on the touch screen corresponding to the second representation of the virtual object, the physical environment surrounding the device when invoked by the second contact. detecting a second contact on an affordance configured to trigger display of an augmented reality view of , detecting movement of the second contact(s), and/or detecting liftoff of the second contact(s) include that In some embodiments, the second input is a continuation of the first input by the same contact (eg, the second input is the first input by contact 6006 as illustrated in FIGS. The input is by contact 6034 as illustrated in FIG. 6T (no liftoff of the contact), or a separate input by an entirely different contact (eg, the second input is as illustrated in FIGS. 6E-6I ). A first input by the same contact 6006 followed by an input by a contact 6034 as illustrated in FIGS. 6Q-6T (with a liftoff of the contact), or a continuation of input by additional contacts (such as , the second input is the input by contact 6006 as illustrated in FIGS. 6J-6L after the first input by contact 6006 as illustrated in FIGS. 6E-6I ). For example, the second input may be a continuation of a swipe input, a second tap input, a second press input, a press input followed by the first input, a second continuous touch input, a sustained touch continuous from the first input, etc. .

In response to detecting the second input, in accordance with a determination that the second input corresponds to a request to manipulate a virtual object within the second user interface area (eg, without transitioning to an augmented reality view), the device responds to the second input. change a display property of the second representation of the virtual object within the second user interface area based on the determination that the second input corresponds to a request to display the virtual object in the augmented reality environment, the device configures the view of the one or more cameras Display a third representation of the virtual object along with the representation (eg, the device displays a third user interface that includes a field of view 6036 of one or more cameras, and displays a physical plane (eg, in a physical environment 5002 ) around the device. Place a three-dimensional representation of a virtual object (eg, virtual chair 5020) on a virtual plane (eg, floor surface 5038) that is detected within the field of view of the camera(s) corresponding to the floor) (910) .

In some embodiments, the second input corresponding to the request to manipulate the virtual object in the second user interface area is the second contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the second representation of the virtual object in the second user interface area. A pinch or swipe by (s). For example, the second input is an input by contact 6006 as illustrated in FIGS. 6J-6L or an input by contacts 6026 , 6030 as illustrated in FIGS. 6N and 6O .

In some embodiments, the second input corresponding to the request to display the virtual object in the augmented reality environment is a tap at or from a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the representation of the virtual object within the second user interface area. An input, a press input, or a drag input followed by a continuous touch or press input. For example, the second input is a deep press input by contact 6034 as illustrated in FIGS. 6Q-6T .

In some embodiments, changing the display property of the second representation of the virtual object within the second user interface region based on the second input comprises (eg, via a vertical and/or horizontal swipe) about one or more axes. rotating, resizing (eg, pinch to resize), tilting (eg, by tilting the device) about one or more axes, (eg, by moving the device horizontally - this is some embodiments used for analysis of the field of view of one or more cameras to detect one or more viewing planes in the . For example, changing the display properties of the second representation of the virtual object may include rotating virtual chair 5020 in response to a horizontal swipe gesture by contact 6006 as illustrated in FIGS. 6J and 6K ; Rotating virtual chair 5020 in response to a diagonal swipe gesture by contact 6006 as illustrated in FIGS. 6K and 6L , or contacts 6026 , 6030 as illustrated in FIGS. 6N and 6O . ) to increase the size of the virtual chair 5020 in response to the de-pinch gesture. In some embodiments, the amount by which the display property of the second representation of the virtual object is changed is the amount by which the property of the second input is changed (eg, distance or speed of movement by the contact(s), the intensity of the contact, the duration of the contact) etc.) is related to

In some embodiments, upon determining that the second input corresponds to a request to display the virtual object in the augmented reality environment (eg, within the field of view 6036 of one or more cameras, as described with respect to FIG. 6T ), The device is configured to present a portion of the physical environment in which a three-dimensional representation of the virtual object is captured within the field of view of one or more cameras from a respective orientation with respect to a virtual plane on the display (eg, the orientation of virtual chair 5020 shown in FIG. 6R ). Display a second animated transition showing the reorientation to a third orientation determined based on the orientation (eg, the orientation of virtual chair 5020 shown in FIG. 6T ). For example, a three-dimensional representation of a virtual object may be a predefined plane (eg, a floor surface 5038 )) (eg, a physical surface such as a vertical wall or horizontal floor surface that can support a three-dimensional representation of a virtual object). In some embodiments, the orientation of the virtual object within the augmented reality view is constrained, in at least one aspect, by the orientation of the virtual object within the staging user interface. For example, the rotation angle of the virtual object about at least one axis of the three-dimensional coordinate system is maintained when transitioning the virtual object from the staging user interface to the augmented reality view (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 6Q-6U ). Likewise, rotation of virtual chair 5020 as described with respect to FIGS. 6J and 6K is maintained). In some embodiments, the source of light cast on the representation of the virtual object in the second user interface area is a virtual light source. In some embodiments, a third representation of the virtual object within the third user interface area is illuminated by a real-world light source (eg, as detected within and/or determined from the field of view of one or more cameras).

In some embodiments, the first criteria are such that the first input corresponds to a virtual object indicator 5022 (eg, an indicator, such as an icon, displayed adjacent to and/or overlaying a representation of the virtual object on a display). includes ( 912 ) criteria that are satisfied when including (eg, in accordance with a determination to include) a tap input by the first contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface to include ( 912 ). For example, virtual object indicator 5022 indicates that the virtual object to which it corresponds (eg, as described in greater detail below with reference to method 1000 ) is a staging view (eg, staging user interface 6010 ) and Provides an indication of being observable in the augmented reality view (eg, field of view 6036 of the camera(s)). Determining whether to display a second representation of the virtual object within the second user interface area according to whether the first input includes a tap input enables performing a number of different types of operations in response to the first input make it Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations in response to input increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which in addition allows the user to perform more By enabling quick and efficient use, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, the first criteria include: movement of less than a threshold amount for at least a predefined threshold time (eg, a long press time threshold) at a location on the touch-sensitive surface where the first contact corresponds to the first representation of the virtual object. Criteria that are satisfied (eg, in accordance with a determination that it is maintained) are included ( 914 ). For example, the first criteria are satisfied by the keep touching input. In some embodiments, the first criteria are after the first contact is maintained with a movement of less than a threshold amount for at least a predefined threshold time at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the representation of the virtual object, for the criterion to be met Includes criteria requiring movement of the first contact. For example, the first criteria are satisfied by a continue to touch input followed by a drag input. whether to display a second representation of the virtual object within the second user interface area according to whether the contact is maintained with movement less than a threshold amount for at least a predefined time at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the representation of the virtual object; Determining enables performance of a number of different types of operations in response to the first input. Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations in response to input increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which in addition allows the user to perform more By enabling quick and efficient use, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, the first criteria are satisfied when (eg, according to a determination that increases) the characteristic intensity of the first contact increases above a first intensity threshold (eg, deep press intensity threshold IT _D ). It contains the criteria to be (916). For example, as described in connection with FIGS. 6Q-6T , criteria indicate that the characteristic intensity of contact 6034 exceeds a deep press intensity threshold IT _D , as indicated by intensity level meter 5028 . is satisfied when it increases. In some embodiments, upon determining that the contact meets criteria for recognizing another type of gesture (eg, tap), the device triggers a second (eg, staging) user interface while maintaining display of the virtual object Performs other predefined functions other than In some embodiments, the first criteria include a strong tap input having an intensity at which the first input reaches a tap input (eg, exceeding a threshold intensity before liftoff of the contact is detected within a tap time threshold of an initial touchdown of the contact) ) is not required. In some embodiments, the first criteria include a criterion that requires movement of the first contact after an intensity of the first contact exceeds a first intensity threshold for the criterion to be met. For example, the first criteria are satisfied by a press input followed by a drag input. Depending on whether the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above the first intensity threshold, determining whether to display the virtual object within the second user interface area comprises performing a number of different types of operations in response to the first input. make it possible Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations in response to input increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which in addition allows the user to perform more By enabling quick and efficient use, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input by the first contact and in accordance with a determination that the first input by the first contact meets second criteria (eg, interface scroll criteria) - a second The two criteria require that the first input include movement of the first contact over a threshold distance in a direction traversing the touch-sensitive surface (eg, the second criteria are by a swipe gesture such as a vertical swipe or a horizontal gesture) satisfied) - the device scrolls the first user interface area (and the representation of the virtual object) in a direction corresponding to the direction of movement of the first contact (eg, the first criteria are not met and within the second user interface area Displaying the representation of the virtual object is withheld) (918). For example, as described with respect to FIGS. 6B and 6C , an upward vertical swipe gesture with contact 6002 causes messaging user interface 5008 and virtual chair 5020 to scroll upward. In some embodiments, the first criteria also require that the first input include movement of the first contact while exceeding a threshold distance for the first criteria to be met, and wherein the device determines that the initial portion of the first input selects the object based on whether the first input meets first criteria (eg, staging trigger criteria) or second criteria (eg, continuous touching or pressing on the representation of the virtual object) based on whether the criteria (eg, continuing to touch or press on the representation of the virtual object) are met. , to determine whether the interface scroll criteria) are satisfied. In some embodiments, the second criteria are satisfied by an AR icon of the virtual object and a swipe input initiated at a touch location outside of the location of the virtual object. Determining whether to scroll the first user interface area in response to the first input according to whether the first input meets the second criteria enables performing a number of different types of operations in response to the first input make it Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations in response to input increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which in addition allows the user to perform more By enabling quick and efficient use, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input by the first contact and upon determining that the first input by the first contact meets third (eg, AR trigger) criteria, the device activates the one or more Display ( 920 ) a third representation of the virtual object along with a representation of the camera's field of view. For example, as described with respect to FIGS. 6A-6A , a long touch input by contact 6044 followed by an upward drag input by contact 6044 to drag virtual chair 5020 is virtual chair 5020 ) to be displayed along with the field of view 6036 of the camera(s).

In some embodiments, the third criteria are, for example, that one or more cameras are in an active state and/or that the device orientation is within a defined range (eg, from a defined origin orientation, a defined angle of rotation about one or more axes). and/or the input by contact comprises a selection input (eg, a long touch) followed by a drag input (movement of a contact that moves the virtual object on the display (eg, to within a predetermined distance from an edge of the display)) or, the characteristic intensity of the contact increases above an AR trigger intensity threshold (eg, a light press threshold (IT _L ) or a deep press threshold (IT _D )), and/or the duration of the contact increases beyond an AR trigger duration threshold (eg, . In some embodiments, a control (eg, toggle control 6018 ) for displaying a representation of the virtual object within a second user interface area (eg, staging user interface 6010 ) is configured to display the representation of the virtual object and one or more cameras. is displayed in a user interface that includes a field of view 6036 (eg, a third user interface area that replaces at least a portion of the second user interface area).

In some embodiments, when transitioning directly from a first user interface area (eg, non-AR, non-staging, touch screen UI view) to a third user interface area (eg, augmented reality view), the device is a virtual object predefined for the current orientation of a portion of the physical environment captured within the field of view of one or more cameras from each orientation presented in the touch screen UI (eg, non-AR, non-staging view) on the display. Displays animated transitions showing reorientation to orientation. For example, as shown in FIGS. 6A-6J , from a first user interface area (eg, messaging user interface 5008 as shown in FIG. 6A-J ) to a third user interface area (eg, as shown in FIG. 6AJ ). When transitioned directly to an augmented reality user interface that includes a field of view 6036 of the camera(s) as shown), the virtual chair 5020 moves from a first orientation as shown in FIGS. 6A-6A (eg, FIG. a predefined orientation relative to the floor surface 5038 in the physical environment 5002 as captured within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) (as shown in 6aj). For example, a three-dimensional representation of a virtual object may be a predefined plane (eg, a vertical wall capable of supporting a three-dimensional representation of the virtual object or It is reoriented to be at a fixed angle with respect to a horizontal floor surface (eg, a physical surface such as floor surface 5038 ). Determining whether to display a third representation of the virtual object along with a field of view of the camera(s) in response to the first input according to whether the first input satisfies the third criteria includes: in response to the first input: to perform different types of operations. Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations in response to input increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which in addition allows the user to perform more By enabling quick and efficient use, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input by the first contact, the device, by one or more device orientation sensors, provides a current device orientation of the device (eg, orientation with respect to the physical environment surrounding the device) , and the third criteria (eg, AR trigger criteria) require that the current device orientation be within a first range of orientations in order for the third criteria to be met (eg, the second criteria are between the device and the ground) is satisfied when the angle of is less than the critical angle, indicating that the device is sufficiently parallel to the ground (to bypass the interstitial state) (922). In some embodiments, first criteria (eg, staging trigger criteria) require that the current device orientation be within a second range of orientations in order for the first criteria to be met (eg, the first criteria are It is satisfied when the angle between the ground planes is within a threshold of 90 degrees, indicating that the device is sufficiently upright relative to the ground to first enter the intermediate state). Depending on whether the device orientation is within a range of orientations, determining whether to display a third representation of the virtual object along with a field of view of the camera(s) in response to the first input includes: to perform different types of operations. Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations in response to input increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which in addition allows the user to perform more By enabling quick and efficient use, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, at least one display attribute of the second representation of the virtual object (eg, size, shape, respective angles about the yaw axis, pitch axis, and roll axis, etc.) 3 is applied to the expression (924). For example, as described with respect to FIGS. 6Q-6U , rotation of the second representation of virtual chair 5020 applied to staging user interface 6010 as described with respect to FIGS. 6J and 6K is , a third representation of the virtual chair 5020 is maintained when displayed in the augmented reality view that includes the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) (eg, as shown in FIG. 6U ). In some embodiments, the orientation of the virtual object within the augmented reality view is constrained, in at least one aspect, by the orientation of the virtual object within the staging user interface. For example, an angle of rotation of the virtual object about at least one axis (eg, yaw axis, pitch axis, or roll axis) of a predefined three-dimensional coordinate system is determined when transitioning the virtual object from the staging view to the augmented reality view. maintain. In some embodiments, at least one display property of the second representation of the virtual object is determined if the second representation of the virtual object has been manipulated in some way (eg, changed in size, shape, texture, orientation, etc.) by user input. Applies only to the third representation of the virtual object. In other words, changes made in the staging view are maintained when the object is viewed in the augmented reality view or are used to constrain the appearance of the object in the augmented reality view in one or more ways. Set at least one display property of the second representation of the virtual object (eg, without requiring additional user input to apply the same display property to the second representation of the virtual object and the third representation of the virtual object) to the second representation of the virtual object. 3 Applying to a representation (eg, causing a user to apply a rotation to a second virtual object while a large form of the virtual object is displayed in the second user interface, improve the operability of the device (by applying rotation to the tertiary representation), which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, detecting at least an initial portion of the first input by the first contact (eg, detecting the first contact, or meeting respective predefined criteria without meeting the first criteria) In response to detecting an input by a first contact with (activating the camera(s) without immediately displaying In some embodiments, displaying the field of view 6036 of the one or more cameras may occur after activating the one or more cameras (eg, until a second input corresponding to a request to display the virtual object in the augmented reality environment is detected; is delayed until at least one viewing plane is detected, or until a viewing plane corresponding to the anchor plane defined for the virtual object is detected. In some embodiments, the field of view 6036 of one or more cameras is displayed at a time corresponding to (eg, concurrently with) activation of the one or more cameras. In some embodiments, the field of view 6036 of the one or more cameras is displayed before a plane is detected within the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, the field of view of the one or more cameras is responsive to detecting the first input by the contact). and displayed according to the decision). To activate the camera(s) in response to detecting an initial portion of the first input (eg, before displaying a third representation of the virtual object along with a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras) and to detect one or more planes of view Analyzing the field of view of the camera(s) is effective (eg, by reducing the time required to determine the position and/or orientation of the third representation of the virtual object relative to each plane within the field of view of the camera(s)) of the device. , which further reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting each plane (eg, floor surface 5038 ) within the field of view of the one or more cameras, the device is tactile to indicate detection of each plane within the field of view of the one or more cameras. Output (928) the product output, by one or more tactile output generators (167). In some embodiments, field of view 6036 may be viewed before a viewing plane is identified. In some embodiments, after at least one viewing plane has been detected or after all of the viewing planes have been identified, additional user interface controls and/or icons are overlaid on the real-world image within the field of view. Outputting a tactile output to indicate detection of a plane within the field of view of the camera(s) provides feedback to the user indicating that a plane has been detected. Providing improved tactile feedback improves the operability of the device (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing unnecessary additional inputs to place the virtual object), which in addition allows the user to It reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling faster and more efficient use of the device.

In some embodiments, the size of the third representation of the virtual object on the display is a position within the field of view 6036 of one or more cameras that has a fixed spatial relationship with the third representation of the virtual object (eg, virtual chair 5020) ( The virtual object is determined ( 930 ) based on the distance between the one or more cameras and the distance between the one or more cameras (eg, a plane such as the floor surface 5038 to which the virtual object is attached) and the simulated real-world size of the virtual object ( 930 ). In some embodiments, the size of the third representation of the virtual object is constrained such that a scale of the size of the third representation of the virtual object with respect to the field of view of the one or more cameras is maintained. In some embodiments, one or more physical dimension parameters (eg, length, width, depth, and/or radius) are defined for the virtual object. In some embodiments, in the second user interface (eg, staging user interface), the virtual object is not constrained by its defined physical dimension parameters (eg, the size of the virtual object is changeable in response to user input). . In some embodiments, the third representation of the virtual object is constrained by its defined dimension parameters. When user input is detected to change the position of the virtual object in the augmented reality view of the physical environment represented within the field of view, or when user input is detected to change the zoom level of the field of view, or when a user input is detected around the device. When a moving user input is detected relative to the physical environment, the appearance (eg, size, viewpoint) of the virtual object (eg, as represented by a fixed spatial relationship between the anchor plane of the virtual object and the augmented reality environment) ) will change in a manner limited by a fixed spatial relationship between the virtual object and the physical environment, and a fixed scale based on predefined dimension parameters of the virtual object and the actual dimensions of the physical environment. the distance between the one or more cameras and a location within the field of view of the camera(s) and virtual Determining the size of the third representation of the virtual object based on the simulated real-world size of the object improves the operability of the device, which additionally enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the power of the device. Reduce usage and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, the second input corresponding to the request to display the virtual object in the augmented reality environment includes (selects) a second representation of the virtual object (eg, exceeds a distance threshold, crosses a defined boundary, and and/or an input of dragging ( 932 ) to a location that is within a threshold distance of an edge (eg, bottom edge, top edge, and/or side edge) of the display or second user interface area by an increasing distance. Displaying a third representation of the virtual object along with a representation of the field of view of the camera(s) in response to detecting a second input corresponding to a request to display the virtual object in the augmented reality environment may include displayed additional controls (eg, Controls for displaying the augmented reality environment from the second user interface) provide additional control options without confusing the second user interface. Providing additional control options without cluttering the second user interface with additional controls displayed improves the operability of the device, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reduce power consumption and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, while displaying a second representation of the virtual object within a second user interface area (eg, staging user interface 6010 as shown in FIG. 6Z ), the device redisplays the first user interface area a fourth input (eg, a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the second representation of the virtual object or another location on the touch-sensitive surface (eg, a bottom or edge of the second user interface area) that meets respective criteria for a tap, a strong press, or a continuous touch and drag input, and/or an input at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to a control to return to the first user interface area), and detect a fourth input. In response to doing so, the device stops displaying the second representation of the virtual object within the second user interface area, and the device redisplays ( 934 ) the first representation of the virtual object within the first user interface area. For example, as shown in FIGS. 6Z-6A , in response to input by contact 6042 at a location corresponding to back control 6016 displayed on staging user interface 6010, the device may cease displaying the second representation of the virtual chair 5020 within the second user interface area (eg, the staging user interface 6010 ), and the device moves into a virtual Redisplay the first representation of chair 5020 . In some embodiments, the first representation of the virtual object is displayed within the first user interface area in the same appearance, location, and/or orientation as those viewed prior to transition to the staging view and/or augmented reality view. For example, in FIG. 6A , virtual chair 5020 is displayed in messaging user interface 5008 in the same orientation as virtual chair 5020 displayed in messaging user interface 5008 in FIG. 6A . In some embodiments, the device continuously displays the virtual object on the screen when transitioning back to displaying the virtual object within the first user interface area. For example, in FIGS. 6Y-6C , virtual chair 5020 is displayed continuously during the transition from displaying staging user interface 6010 to displaying messaging user interface 5008 . display the first representation of the virtual object in the first user interface according to whether the fourth input detected while displaying the second representation of the virtual object in the second user interface meets criteria for redisplaying the first user interface; Determining whether to redisplay enables performance of a number of different types of operations in response to the fourth input. Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations in response to input increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which in addition allows the user to perform more By enabling quick and efficient use, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, while displaying a third representation of the virtual object along with a representation of the field of view 5036 of the one or more cameras (eg, as shown in FIG. 6U ), the device redisplays the second user interface area a fifth input (e.g., a tap, strong press, or touch and drag input at a location on the touch-sensitive surface or other location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the third representation of the virtual object; and/or an input at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the control for returning to displaying the second user interface area), and in response to detecting the fifth input, the device Stop displaying the representation and the representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras, and redisplay ( 936 ) a second representation of the virtual object within the second user interface area. For example, as shown in FIGS. 6V-6Y , on contact 6040 at a location corresponding to toggle control 6018 displayed in a third user interface comprising field of view 6036 of the camera(s). In response to the input by the user, the device stops displaying the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) and redisplays the staging user interface 6010 . In some embodiments, the second representation of the virtual object is displayed within the second user interface area in the same orientation as seen in the augmented reality view. In some embodiments, the device continuously displays the virtual object on the screen when transitioning back to displaying the virtual object within the second user interface area. For example, in FIGS. 6V-6Y , virtual chair 5020 is displayed continuously during the transition from displaying field of view 6036 of the camera(s) to displaying staging user interface 6010 . according to whether a fifth input detected while displaying the third representation of the virtual object with the field of view of the camera(s) meets criteria for redisplaying the second user interface, the second user interface of the virtual object 2 Determining whether to redisplay the representation enables performance of a number of different types of operations in response to the fifth input. Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations in response to input increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which in addition allows the user to perform more By enabling quick and efficient use, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, while displaying the third representation of the virtual object along with the representation 6036 of the field of view of the one or more cameras, the device redisplays the first user interface area (eg, the messaging user interface 5008 ). detect a sixth input that meets respective criteria for 3 Stop displaying the representation and representation of the field of view 6036 of the one or more cameras, and the device redisplays the first representation of the virtual object within the first user interface area (eg, as shown in FIG. 6A ) (eg, as shown in FIG. 6A ). 938). In some embodiments, the sixth input is, for example, a tap, strong press, or touch and drag input at a location on the touch-sensitive surface or another location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the third representation of the virtual object, and /or input at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the control to return to displaying the first user interface area. In some embodiments, the first representation of the virtual object is displayed within the first user interface area with the same appearance and location as those viewed before transitioning to the staging view and/or augmented reality view. In some embodiments, the device continuously displays the virtual object on the screen when transitioning back to displaying the virtual object within the first user interface area. according to whether the sixth input detected while displaying the third representation of the virtual object with the field of view of the camera(s) meets criteria for redisplaying the first user interface, the second representation of the virtual object within the first user interface. Determining whether to redisplay the 1 representation enables performance of a number of different types of operations in response to the sixth input. Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations in response to input increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which in addition allows the user to perform more By enabling quick and efficient use, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input by the first contact and upon determining that the input by the first contact meets first criteria, the device is configured to: the first user comprising displaying an animation (eg, movement, rotation about one or more axes, and/or scaling) in which the first representation is transformed into a second representation of the virtual object within the second user interface area; Continuously displays ( 940 ) the virtual object when transitioning from displaying an interface area (eg, messaging user interface 5008 ) to displaying a second user interface area (eg, staging user interface 6010 ). For example, in FIGS. 6E-6I , virtual chair 5020 is continuously displayed and animated (eg, during the transition from displaying messaging user interface 5008 to displaying staging user interface 6010 ). the orientation of the virtual chair 5020 changes). In some embodiments, the virtual object has a defined orientation relative to a plane within the field of view of the camera(s) (eg, defined based on the shape and orientation of the first representation of the virtual object as viewed in the first user interface area). . 2 It is moved, resized, and/or reoriented into a representation, and during movement or at the end of the movement, the virtual object is at a predetermined angle relative to a predefined virtual staging plane to which the virtual object is defined independently of the physical environment surrounding the device. is redirected to Displaying the animation as the first representation of the virtual object in the first user interface transforms into the second representation of the virtual object in the second user interface provides feedback to the user indicating that the first input meets the first criteria . Providing improved feedback improves the operability of the device (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the device), which additionally allows the user to By enabling the device to be used more quickly and efficiently, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input by the second contact and upon determining that the second input by the second contact corresponds to a request to display the virtual object in the augmented reality environment, the device: An animation (eg, movement, rotation about one or more axes) in which a second representation of the virtual object in the second user interface region is transformed into a third representation of the virtual object in a third user interface region that includes the field of view of one or more cameras. , and/or scaling), a third user interface area comprising a field of view 6036 of one or more cameras from displaying a second user interface area (eg, staging user interface 6010 ). The virtual object is continuously displayed (942) when transitioning to displaying the . For example, in FIGS. 6Q-6U , virtual chair 5020 is continuously displayed and animated during the transition from displaying staging user interface 6010 to displaying field of view 6036 of the camera(s). (For example, the position and size of the virtual chair 5020 change). In some embodiments, the virtual object is in a viewing plane (eg, a physical surface such as a vertical wall or horizontal floor surface that can support a three-dimensional representation of a user interface object) at which the virtual object is detected within the field of view of one or more cameras. is reoriented to be at a predefined orientation, location, and/or distance from displaying the animation as the second representation of the virtual object in the second user interface is converted to the third representation of the virtual object in the third user interface indicates that the second input corresponds to a request to display the virtual object in the augmented reality environment Indicative feedback is provided to the user. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user errors when operating/interacting with the device), which additionally , reducing the power usage of the device and improving battery life by enabling users to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

It should be understood that the specific order in which the operations in FIGS. 9A-9D are described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations may be performed. Those skilled in the art will recognize various ways of reordering the operations described herein. Additionally, details of other processes described herein in connection with other methods described herein (eg, methods 800 , 900 , 16000 , 17000 , 18000 , 19000 , 20000 ) are set forth in FIGS. It should be noted that in a manner similar to method 900 described above with respect to FIG. 9D is also applicable. For example, contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interface regions, intensity thresholds, fields of view, tactile outputs, movements, and/or animations described above with respect to method 900 may optionally be , contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interface described herein in connection with other methods described herein (eg, methods 800, 900, 16000, 17000, 18000, 19000, 20000). have one or more of the properties of regions, intensity thresholds, fields of view, tactile outputs, movements, and/or animations. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated here.

10A-10D are flow diagrams illustrating a method 1000 of displaying an item with a visual indication that the item corresponds to a virtual three-dimensional object, in accordance with some embodiments. The method 1000 includes an electronic device (eg, device 300 of FIG. 3 , or portable of FIG. 1A ) having a display and a touch-sensitive surface (eg, a touch screen display that serves as both a display and a touch-sensitive surface). multifunction device 100). In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 1000 are selectively combined and/or the order of some operations is selectively changed.

As described below, the method 1000 relates to displaying items in first and second user interfaces. Each item is displayed with or without a visual indication indicating that the item corresponds to a virtual three-dimensional object, depending on whether the item corresponds to a respective virtual three-dimensional object. Providing the user with an indication of whether the item is a virtual three-dimensional object (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs depending on whether the item is a virtual three-dimensional object or not) allows the user to perform actions on the first item. It increases the efficiency it can perform, thereby improving the operability of the device, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. .

The device receives ( 1002 ) a request to display a first user interface that includes a first item (eg, an icon, thumbnail image, image, emoji, attachment, sticker, app icon, avatar, etc.). For example, in some embodiments, the request may be a user interface (eg, internet browser user interface 5060 as shown in FIG. 7B ) to display a representation of the first item in a predefined environment associated with the first item. ) (eg, as described with respect to FIG. 7A ) to open it. The predefined environment is optionally a user interface of an application (eg, an email application, a messaging application, a browser application, a word processing application, an e-book application, etc.) or a system user interface (eg, a lock screen, a notification interface, a suggestion interface, a control panel). user interface, home screen user interface, etc.).

In response to the request to display the first user interface, the device displays ( 1004 ) a first user interface (eg, internet browser user interface 5060 as shown in FIG. 7B ) along with a representation of the first item. Upon determining that the first item corresponds to the respective virtual three-dimensional object, the device configures the first item to be displayed on the first respective virtual three-dimensional object (eg, at a location corresponding to the representation of the first item, the icon and/or the or display a representation of the first item with a visual indication indicating that it corresponds to an image, such as a background panel; outline; and/or text). Upon determining that the first item does not correspond to the respective virtual three-dimensional object, the device displays a representation of the first item without a visual indication. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 7B , in the Internet browser user interface 5060 , the web object 5068 (including the representation of the virtual three-dimensional lamp object 5084 ) is the virtual lamp 8084 is virtual 3 . Displayed with a visual indication indicating that it is a dimensional object (virtual object indicator 5080 ) and web object 5074 without a visual indicator because web object 5074 does not contain an item corresponding to the virtual three-dimensional object is displayed.

After displaying the representation of the first item, the device may display a second user interface (eg, FIG. 7M ) that includes a second item (eg, an icon, thumbnail image, image, emoji, attachment, sticker, app icon, avatar, etc.) A request (eg, input as described in connection with FIGS. 7H-7L ) is received ( 1006 ) to display a messaging user interface 5008 as illustrated in FIG. The second item is distinct from the first item, and the second user interface is distinct from the first user interface. For example, in some embodiments, the request is another input to open a user interface for displaying a representation of the second item in a predefined environment associated with the second item. The predefined environment optionally provides a user interface of an application other than an application used to present the first item (eg, an email application, a messaging application, a browser application, a word processing application, an e-book application, etc.), or the first item. A system user interface other than the system user interface used to display (eg, lock screen, notification interface, suggestion interface, control panel user interface, home screen user interface, etc.).

In response to the request to display the second user interface, the device displays 1008 a second user interface (eg, messaging user interface 5008 as shown in FIG. 7M ) with a representation of the second item. Upon determining that the second item corresponds to the respective virtual three-dimensional object, the device provides a visual indication indicating that the second item corresponds to the second respective virtual three-dimensional object (eg, the first item corresponds to the virtual three-dimensional object). display a representation of the second item with the same visual indication that it corresponds). Upon determining that the second item does not correspond to the respective virtual three-dimensional object, the device displays a representation of the second item without a visual indication. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 7M , in messaging user interface 5008 , virtual three-dimensional chair object 5020 is a visual indication (virtual object indicator) indicating that virtual chair 5020 is a virtual three-dimensional object. 5022)), and the emoji 7020 is displayed without a visual object indicator because the emoji 7020 does not contain an item corresponding to the virtual three-dimensional object.

In some embodiments, a first item (eg, virtual lamp 5084 ) with a visual indication (eg, virtual object indicator 5080 ) indicating that the first item corresponds to a first respective virtual three-dimensional object Displaying a representation of a device that causes a change from a first device orientation to a second device orientation (eg, as detected by an orientation sensor (eg, one or more accelerometers 168 of device 100 )) In response to detecting the movement of movement of) (1010). For example, a first device orientation is an orientation of device 100 as illustrated in FIG. 7F1 , and a second device orientation is an orientation of device 100 as illustrated in FIG. 7G1 . In response to the movement illustrated in FIGS. 7F1 to 7G1 , a first item (eg, virtual ramp 5084 ) is tilted (eg, as illustrated by FIGS. 7F2 to 7G2 ). In some embodiments, if the second object corresponds to a virtual three-dimensional object, the second object also (eg, to indicate that the second object also corresponds to a virtual three-dimensional object) of the device in the manner described above. It responds to detecting movement.

Displaying movement of the first item corresponding to a change from the first device orientation to the second devices orientation provides the user with visual feedback indicative of the behavior of the virtual three-dimensional object. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device (eg, by allowing the user to view a virtual three-dimensional object from certain orientations without the need to provide additional input), which additionally allows the user to use the device It reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling faster and more efficient use.

In some embodiments, displaying the representation of the first item with a visual indication indicating that the first item corresponds to the first respective virtual three-dimensional object comprises: wherein the representation of the first item is displayed in the first user interface. detect a first input (eg, a swipe input in a first direction on the first user interface, or an input to keep touching for a scroll button on an end of the scroll bar) by a first contact that scrolls the first user interface while In response, the device translates the representation of the first item on the display according to the scrolling of the first user interface (eg, by a distance based on the amount of scrolling made relative to the first user interface and a first in the opposite direction of the scrolling) moving the anchor position of the item (eg, when the first user interface is dragged upward by a contact moving across the touch-sensitive surface, the representation of the first item is upwardly on the display with the first user interface) moving)) and rotating ( 1012 ) the representation of the first item relative to a plane defined by the device by the first user interface (or display) according to a direction in which the first user interface is scrolled. For example, as illustrated in FIGS. 7C and 7D , by contact 7002 scrolling Internet browser user interface 5060 while representation of virtual ramp 5084 is displayed in Internet browser user interface 5060 . In response to detecting the input, virtual ramp 5084 is translated according to the scrolling of Internet browser user interface 5060 , and virtual ramp 5084 is displayed on display 112 according to the direction of travel path of contact 7002 . rotated about In some embodiments, upon determining that the first user interface is dragged upward, the representation of the first item moves upward along with the first user interface, and the viewpoint of the first item as viewed on the first user interface. changes as if the user is viewing the first item from a different viewing angle (eg, a lower angle). In some embodiments, upon determining that the second user interface is dragged upward, the representation of the second item moves upward along with the second user interface, and the viewpoint of the second item as viewed on the second user interface. changes as if the user is viewing the second item from a different viewing angle (eg, a lower angle).

Displaying movement of the item in which the movement corresponds to a change from the first device orientation to the second device orientation provides visual feedback to the user indicative of the change in device orientation. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device (eg, by allowing the user to view a virtual three-dimensional object from certain orientations without the need to provide additional input), which additionally allows the user to use the device It reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling faster and more efficient use.

In some embodiments, a first item (eg, a first item (eg, a visual indicator 5080 )) in a first user interface (eg, an internet browser user interface 5060 as illustrated in FIG. 7B ) is in some embodiments. While displaying the representation of the lamp object 5084), the device displays a representation of a third item, the representation of the third item being displayed without a visual indication to indicate that the third item does not correspond to the virtual three-dimensional object. (eg, the third item does not correspond to any three-dimensional object that may be rendered in the augmented reality environment) 1014 . For example, as illustrated in FIG. 7B , in the Internet browser user interface 5060 , web objects 5074 , 5070 , 5076 indicate that web objects 5074 , 5070 , 5076 correspond to virtual three-dimensional objects. Since it does not, it is displayed without visual object indicators.

Displaying, in the first user interface, the first item with a visual indication indicating that the first item is a virtual three-dimensional object and the third item displayed without the visual indication (eg, the item with which the user is interacting is increasing the efficiency with which a user can perform operations using the first user interface (by helping the user provide appropriate inputs depending on whether it is a virtual three-dimensional object or not), thereby improving the operability of the device, which Additionally, it reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, a second item (eg, virtual While displaying the representation of the chair 5020), the device displays a representation of a fourth item (eg, emoji 7020), wherein the representation of the fourth item corresponds to the respective virtual three-dimensional object. It is displayed 1016 without a visual indication to indicate that it does not.

Displaying, in the second user interface, the second item with a visual indication indicating that the second item is a virtual three-dimensional object and the fourth item displayed without the visual indication (eg, the item with which the user is interacting is increasing the efficiency with which a user can perform operations using the second user interface (by helping the user to provide appropriate inputs depending on whether or not it is a virtual three-dimensional object or not), thereby improving the operability of the device, which Additionally, it reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, a first user interface (eg, internet browser user interface 5060 as illustrated in FIG. 7B ) corresponds to a first application (eg, internet browser application) and a second user interface (eg, internet browser application) Messaging user interface 5008 as illustrated in FIG. 7M ) corresponds to a second application (eg, a messaging application) that is distinct from the first application, and is displayed with a visual indication (eg, virtual object indicator 5080 ). A representation of a first item (eg, lamp object 5084 ) to be displayed and a representation of a second item (eg, virtual chair 5020 ) displayed with a visual indication (eg, virtual object indicator 5022 ) are predefined. share a set of visual and/or behavioral characteristics (eg, use the same indicator icon, or have the same texture or rendering style, and/or behavior when invoked by predefined types of inputs) (1018). For example, icons for virtual object indicator 5080 and virtual object indicator 5022 include the same symbol.

Displaying the first item with the visual indication in the first user interface of the first application and displaying the second item with the visual indication in the second user interface of the second application so that the visual indications of the first item and the second item are previewed Allowing the user to share a defined set of visual properties and/or behavioral properties (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs depending on whether the item the user is interacting with is a virtual three-dimensional object or not) may Increases the efficiency with which you can perform operations using the user interface, thereby improving the operability of the device, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. Reduce and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, the first user interface is an internet browser application user interface (eg, internet browser user interface 5060 as illustrated in FIG. 7B ), and the first item is an element of a web page (eg, a first Items are represented within the webpage as embedded images, hyperlinks, applets, emojis, embedded media objects, etc. (1020). For example, the first item is the virtual lamp object 5084 of the web object 5068 .

Displaying a web page element having a visual indication that the web page element is a virtual three-dimensional object (eg, allowing the user to provide appropriate inputs depending on whether the web page element the user is interacting with is a virtual three-dimensional object or not) by helping) increase the efficiency with which a user can perform operations using an internet browser application, thereby improving the operability of the device, which additionally enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently This reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, the first user interface is an email application user interface (eg, email user interface 7052 as illustrated in FIG. 7P ) and the first item is an attachment to an email (eg, attachment 7060 ) (1022).

Displaying an email attachment with a visual indication that the email attachment is a virtual three-dimensional object (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs depending on whether the email attachment the user is interacting with is a virtual three-dimensional object or not) Increases the efficiency with which a user can perform operations using the email application user interface, thereby improving the operability of the device, which additionally enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently by reduce power consumption and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, the first user interface is a messaging application user interface (eg, messaging user interface 5008 as illustrated in FIG. 7M ), and the first item is an attachment or element within the message (eg, virtual chair 5020 ) )) (eg, the first item is an image, a hyperlink, a mini program, an emoji, a media object, etc.) 1024 .

Displaying a message attachment or element with a visual indication that the message attachment or element is a virtual three-dimensional object (eg, a user input appropriate depending on whether the message attachment or element with which the user is interacting is a virtual three-dimensional object or not) increase the efficiency with which a user can perform operations using the messaging user interface (by helping to provide By enabling this, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, the first user interface is a file management application user interface (eg, file management user interface 7036 as illustrated in FIG. 7O ), and the first item is a file preview object (eg, file information area) file preview object (7045) in 7046) (1026).

Displaying the file preview object with a visual indication that the file preview object is a virtual three-dimensional object (eg, a user input appropriate increase the efficiency with which a user can perform operations using the file management application user interface (by helping to provide By enabling them to use, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, the first user interface is a map application user interface (eg, maps application user interface 7024 ), and the first item is a representation (eg, a point of interest object 7028 ) within the map. , causing display of a three-dimensional representation of a feature corresponding to a location on the map (eg, including a three-dimensional representation of terrain and/or structures corresponding to a location on the map) or, when actuated, a three-dimensional representation of the map. a three-dimensional representation of the control unit) (1028).

Displaying the representation of the point of interest with a visual indication indicating that the representation of the point of interest in the map is a virtual three-dimensional object (eg, depending on whether the representation of the point of interest with which the user is interacting is a virtual three-dimensional object or not increases the efficiency with which a user can perform operations using the map application user interface (by helping to provide appropriate inputs), thereby improving the operability of the device, which in addition allows the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently It reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling it to be used as

In some embodiments, the visual indication that the first item corresponds to each virtual three-dimensional object is an animation of the first item (eg, over time) that occurs without requiring input for a representation of each three-dimensional object. Continuously moving or changing visual effects (eg, sparkling, shimmering, etc.) applied to the first item according to 1030 .

Displaying an animation of a first item that occurs without input for a representation of each three-dimensional object may improve the operability of the device (eg, by reducing the number of inputs required for a user to view three-dimensional aspects of the first item). This further reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, a representation of a second item (eg, virtual chair 5020) with a visual indication (eg, virtual object indicator 5022) indicating that the second item corresponds to a respective virtual three-dimensional object. While displaying , the device detects a second input by the second contact (eg, an input as described in connection with FIGS. 5C-5F ) at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the representation of the second item, and , in response to detecting the second input by the second contact and in response to determining that the second input by the second contact meets the first (eg, AR trigger) criteria, the device configures a second user interface (eg, , replacing the display of at least a portion of the messaging user interface 5008 with a representation of the field of view 5036 of the one or more cameras (eg, as described in connection with FIGS. 5F-5I ) and displaying a second user interface; Display ( 1032 ) the third user interface region on the display, including continuously displaying the second virtual three-dimensional object while switching from displaying the third user interface region to displaying the third user interface region. (eg, as described in greater detail herein with reference to method 800 ). In some embodiments, the device switches from displaying a portion of the second user interface with a representation of the field of view of one or more cameras (eg, as described in greater detail herein with reference to operation 834 ). while displaying the animation as the representation of the virtual object is continuously displayed.

Using the first criteria to determine whether to display the third user interface region enables performance of a number of different types of actions in response to the second input. Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations in response to input increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which in addition allows the user to perform more By enabling quick and efficient use, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, a visual indication (eg, a virtual object indicator) indicating that the second item corresponds to a respective virtual three-dimensional object (eg, as described in greater detail herein with reference to method 900 ) While displaying the second item (eg, virtual chair 5020 ) with 5022 ), the device causes a third input (eg, by third contact) on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the representation of the second item (eg, virtual chair 5020 ). , an input as described in connection with FIGS. 6E-6I ), and in response to detecting a third input by the third contact, and in response to detecting a third input by the third contact, the third input by the third contact causes a first (eg, a staging trigger) ) in accordance with the determination that the criteria are met, the device is placed in a second virtual three-dimensional The object is displayed (1034). In some embodiments, while displaying the second virtual three-dimensional object within a fourth user interface (eg, staging user interface 6010 as illustrated in FIG. 6I ), the device detects a fourth input, In response to detecting the input, upon determining that the fourth input corresponds to a request to manipulate the second virtual three-dimensional object in the fourth user interface, the device (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 6J-6M ) (and/or as described in connection with FIGS. 6N-6P) based on the fourth input, change a display property of the second virtual three-dimensional object in the fourth user interface, wherein the fourth input is applied to the augmented reality environment. A request to display a second virtual object (eg, following a tap input, press input, or continuous touch or press input at or from a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to a representation of the virtual object in the second user interface area) drag input), the device displays a second virtual three-dimensional object along with a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 6Q-6U ).

While displaying the second three-dimensional object within a fourth user interface (eg, staging user interface 6010), in response to the fourth input, the device changes a display property of the second three-dimensional object based on the fourth input or display a second three-dimensional object along with a representation of the field of view of one or more cameras of the device. enabling performance of a number of different types of operations in response to an input (eg, by changing a display characteristic of the second three-dimensional object or displaying the second three-dimensional object along with a representation of the field of view of one or more cameras of the device) This increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. and improve battery life.

It should be understood that the specific order in which the operations in FIGS. 10A-10D are described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations may be performed. Those skilled in the art will recognize various ways of reordering the operations described herein. Additionally, details of other processes described herein in connection with other methods described herein (eg, methods 800 , 900 , 16000 , 17000 , 18000 , 19000 , 20000 ) are shown in FIGS. It should be noted that in a manner similar to method 1000 described above with respect to FIG. 10D is also applicable. For example, contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interfaces, user interface regions, fields of view, movements, and/or animations described above with respect to method 1000 are optionally described herein. contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interfaces, user interface area described herein in connection with other methods (eg, methods 800, 900, 16000, 17000, 18000, 19000, 20000)) have one or more of the characteristics of fields, fields of view, movements, and/or animations. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated here.

11A-11V illustrate example user interfaces for displaying a virtual object having different visual properties depending on whether object placement criteria are met. The user interfaces of these figures are shown in FIGS. 8A-8E, 9A-9D, 10A-10D, 16A-16G, 17A-17D, 18A-18I, 19A-19H, and FIGS. 20A-20F are used to illustrate the processes described below. For ease of description, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device having a touch-sensitive display system 112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is optionally: an individual finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to the finger or stylus contact (eg, a center of an individual contact, or a point associated with the individual contact), or It is the center of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system 112 . However, similar operations are performed with the display 450 and the display 450 in response to detecting contacts on the touch-sensitive surface 451, optionally displaying the user interfaces shown in the figure with a focus selector on the display 450. It is performed on a device having a separate touch-sensitive surface 451 .

11A-11E illustrate input for displaying a virtual object in a staging view. For example, an input may be a two-dimensional representation (e.g., a thumbnail) of a three-dimensional object in a user interface (e.g., email user interface 7052, file management user interface 7036, map user interface 7022, messaging user interface (e.g., email user interface 7052). 5008), an internet browser user interface 5060, or a third party application user interface).

In FIG. 11A , Internet browser user interface 5060 includes a two-dimensional representation of a three-dimensional virtual object 11002 (a chair). An input by the contact 11004 (eg, a tap input) is detected at a location corresponding to the virtual object 11002 . In response to the tap input, the display of the Internet browser user interface 5060 is replaced with the display of the staging user interface 6010 .

11B-11E illustrate the transition that occurs as the Internet browser user interface 5060 is replaced with the display of the staging user interface 6010 . In some embodiments, during transition, virtual object 10002 gradually fades into view and/or controls controls of staging user interface 6010 (eg, back control 6016 , toggle control 6018 , and/or Alternatively, the sharing control unit 6020) gradually fades in to the view. For example, the staging user interface 6010 after the virtual object 11002 fades into view (eg, to delay the display of the controls for a period necessary for the three-dimensional representation of the virtual object 11002 to be rendered on the display). ) is faded in to the view. In some embodiments, “fade in” of virtual object 11002 displays a low-resolution, two-dimensional, and/or holographic form of virtual object 11002 followed by a final three-dimensional representation of virtual object 11002. including display. 11B-11D illustrate the gradual fade-in of the virtual object 11002. In FIG. 11D , a shadow 11006 of the virtual object 11002 is displayed. 11D and 11E illustrate the gradual fade in of the controls 6016 , 6018 , 6020 .

11F and 11G illustrate input that causes a three-dimensional representation of virtual object 11002 to be displayed in a user interface including field of view 6036 of one or more cameras of device 100 . In FIG. 11F , input by contact 11008 is detected at a position corresponding to toggle control 6018 . In response to the input, the display of the staging user interface 6010 is replaced with a display of the user interface including the field of view 6036 of the camera(s), as shown in FIG. 11G .

11G and 11H , when the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) is initially displayed, a translucent representation of the virtual object (eg, the plane corresponding to the virtual object is the field of view of the camera(s) ( 6036) can be displayed.

11G and 11H illustrate a translucent representation of a virtual object 11002 displayed in a user interface that includes a field of view 6036 of the camera(s). The translucent representation of the virtual object 11002 is displayed in a fixed position relative to the display 112 . For example, from FIG. 11G to 11H , device 100 moves relative to physical environment 5002 (eg, as indicated by the altered position of table 5004 within field of view 6036 of the camera(s)). As such, the virtual object 11002 remains in a fixed position relative to the display 112 .

In some embodiments, upon determining that a plane corresponding to the virtual object has been detected within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s), the virtual object is placed on the detected plane.

In FIG. 11I , a plane corresponding to the virtual object 11002 has been detected within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s), and the virtual object 11002 is disposed on the detected plane. The device generated a tactile output as illustrated by 11010 (eg, to indicate that at least one plane (eg, the floor surface 5038 ) was detected within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s)). When the virtual object 11002 is positioned relative to a plane detected within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s), the virtual object 11002 is positioned relative to the physical environment 5002 captured by the one or more cameras. maintained in a fixed position. 11I to 11J , as the device 100 is moved relative to the physical environment 5002 (eg, as indicated by the altered position of the table 5004 within the displayed field of view 6036 of the camera(s)) , the virtual object 11002 is maintained in a fixed position relative to the physical environment 5002 .

In some embodiments, while field of view 6036 of the camera(s) is displayed, controls (eg, back control 6016 , toggle control 6018 , and/or sharing control 6020 ) , upon a determination that a period of time in which no input has been received) ceases to be displayed. 11J-11L , the controls 6016 , 6018 , 6020 gradually fade out (eg, as shown in FIG. 11K ), such that (eg, as shown in FIG. 11L ) of the camera(s) The field of view 6036 increases the portion of the display 112 that is displayed.

11M-11S illustrate inputs for manipulating virtual object 11002 as it is displayed in a user interface comprising field of view 6036 of the camera(s).

11M and 11N , input (eg, a de-pinch gesture) by contacts 11012 , 11014 to change the simulated physical size of virtual object 11002 is detected. In response to detection of the input, controls 6016 , 6018 , 6020 are redisplayed. As contact 11012 moves along the path indicated by arrow 11016 and contact 11014 moves along path indicated by arrow 11018 , the size of virtual object 11002 increases.

11N-11P , input (eg, a pinch gesture) by contacts 11012 , 1104 to change the simulated physical size of virtual object 11002 is detected. As contact 11012 moves along the path indicated by arrow 11020 and contact 11014 moves along path indicated by arrow 11022 , the size of virtual object 11002 is ( FIGS. 11N and 11O , and 11o and 11p) decrease. As illustrated in FIG. 11O , the size of virtual object 11002 is initially on its original size relative to physical environment 5002 (eg, on a detected plane within physical environment 5002 , as shown in FIG. 11I ). When scaled to the virtual object 11002's size when placed), a tactile output (as illustrated by 11024) is generated (eg, to provide feedback indicating that the virtual object 11002 has returned to its original size). ) Occurs. In FIG. 11Q , contacts 11012 , 11014 have been lifted from touch screen display 112 .

In FIG. 11R , an input (eg, a double tap input) is detected to return the virtual object 11002 to its original size with respect to the physical environment 5002 . Input is detected at a location corresponding to virtual object 11002 , as represented by contact 11026 . In response to the input, the virtual object 11002 is scaled from the reduced size illustrated in FIG. 11R to the original size of the virtual object 11002 as illustrated in FIG. 11S . As illustrated in FIG. 11S , when a virtual object 11002 is resized to its original size with respect to the physical environment 5002 , a tactile output (as illustrated by 11028 ) is generated (eg, virtual object 11002 ). to provide feedback indicating that α has returned to its original size).

In FIG. 11T , input by contact 11030 is detected at a location corresponding to toggle control 6018 . In response to the input, the display of the user interface including the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) is replaced with a staging user interface 6010 , as shown in FIG. 11U .

In FIG. 11U , an input by contact 11032 is detected at a location corresponding to a go back control 6016 . In response to the input, the display of the staging user interface 6010 is replaced with an internet browser user interface 5060 , as shown in FIG. 11V .

12A-12L illustrate example user interfaces for displaying a calibration user interface object that is dynamically animated in response to movement of one or more cameras of a device. The user interfaces of these figures are shown in FIGS. 8A-8E, 9A-9D, 10A-10D, 16A-16G, 17A-17D, 18A-18I, 19A-19H, and FIGS. 20A-20F are used to illustrate the processes described below. For ease of description, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device having a touch-sensitive display system 112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is optionally: an individual finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to the finger or stylus contact (eg, a center of an individual contact, or a point associated with the individual contact), or It is the center of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system 112 . However, similar operations are performed with the display 450 and the display 450 in response to detecting contacts on the touch-sensitive surface 451, optionally displaying the user interfaces shown in the figure with a focus selector on the display 450. It is performed on a device having a separate touch-sensitive surface 451 .

In accordance with some embodiments, when a request is received to display a virtual object in a user interface comprising the field of view of one or more cameras, but additional data is needed to calibrate the device, the calibration user interface object is displayed.

12A illustrates an input requesting to display a virtual object 11002 within a user interface that includes a field of view 6036 of one or more cameras. An input by contact 12002 is detected at a position corresponding to toggle control 6018 . In response to the input, the display of the staging user interface 6010 is replaced with a display of the user interface including the field of view 6036 of the camera(s), as shown in FIG. 12B . A translucent representation of the virtual object 11002 is displayed in a user interface comprising a field of view 6036 of the camera(s). While calibration is needed (eg, because the plane corresponding to the virtual object 11002 has not been detected within the camera(s) field of view 6036 ), the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) is (eg, as described below) Likewise, prompts and/or to emphasize the behavior of the calibration object) are blurred.

12B-12D illustrate animated images and text prompting a user to move the device (eg, displayed in response to a determination that calibration is required). The animated image is a representation 12004 of device 100 , device 100 (eg, to indicate that device 100 should move relative to a plane to detect a plane corresponding to virtual object 11002 ). Arrows 12006 and 12008 indicating that the left and right movement is required, and a representation of a plane 12010 are included. The text prompt 12012 provides information about the movement of the device 100 required for calibration. 12B and 12C, and 12C and 12D, a representation 12004 of the device 100 and an arrow 12006 are a representation of a plane 12010 to provide an indication of the movement of the device 100 necessary for calibration. is adjusted for 12C to 12D , the device 100 is moved relative to the physical environment 5002 (eg, as indicated by the altered position of the table 5004 within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s)). As a result of the detection of movement of the device 100 , a calibration user interface object 12014 (outline of the cube) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 12E-1 .

12E-1 to 12I-1 are calibration user interface objects 12014 corresponding to movement of device 100 relative to physical environment 5002, as illustrated in FIGS. 12E-2 to 12I-2, respectively. to illustrate the behavior of In response to movement (eg, lateral movement) of device 100 (eg, to provide feedback to the user regarding movement to aid in calibration), calibration user interface object 12014 is animated (eg, of a cube) The contour rotates). In FIG. 12E-1 , a calibration user interface object 12014 is shown having a first angle of rotation in a user interface that includes a field of view 6036 of the camera(s) of device 100 . In FIG. 12E-2 , device 100 is shown held by a user's hand 5006 in a first position relative to physical environment 5002 . 12E-2 to 12F-2, the device 100 has moved laterally (to the right) with respect to the physical environment 5002 . As a result of the movement, as shown in FIG. 12F-1 , the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) as displayed by device 100 is updated and calibration user interface object 12014 is updated (FIG. 12E-1 ). relative to its position in ). From FIG. 12F-2 to FIG. 12G-2 , device 100 continued its rightward movement relative to physical environment 5002 . As a result of the movement, the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) as displayed by the device 100 is updated again and the calibration user interface object 12014 is further rotated, as shown in FIG. 12G-1 . . From FIG. 12G-2 to FIG. 12H-2 , device 100 has moved upward with respect to physical environment 5002 . As a result of the movement, the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) as displayed by the device 100 is updated. 12G-1 to 12H-1 , calibration user interface object 12014 (eg, to provide an indication to the user that vertical movement of the device is not contributing to calibration) in FIG. 12G-2 It does not rotate in response to upward movement of the device illustrated by FIG. 12H-2. From FIG. 12H-2 to FIG. 12I-2 , device 100 has moved further to the right with respect to physical environment 5002 . As a result of the movement, the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) as displayed by the device 100 is updated again and the calibration user interface object 12014 is rotated, as shown in FIG. 12I-1 .

In FIG. 12J , movement of device 100 (eg, as illustrated in FIGS. 12E-12I ) satisfied the required calibration (eg, and that the plane corresponding to virtual object 11002 is of the camera(s)) detected within field of view 6036). The virtual object 11002 is placed on the detected plane, and the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) stops blurring. The tactile output generators output a tactile output (as illustrated by 12016 ) to indicate that a plane (eg, floor surface 5038 ) has been detected within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s). The bottom surface 5038 is highlighted to provide an indication of the plane that was detected.

When the virtual object 11002 is positioned relative to the plane detected within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s), the virtual object 11002 is positioned relative to the physical environment 5002 captured by the one or more cameras. maintained in a fixed position. As the device 100 is moved relative to the physical environment 5002 (as shown in FIGS. 12K-2 to 12L-2), the virtual object 11002 (shown in FIGS. 12K-1 to 12L-1 ) is moved. maintained in a fixed position relative to the physical environment 5002).

13A-13M illustrate example user interfaces for constraining rotation of a virtual object about an axis. The user interfaces of these figures are shown in FIGS. 8A-8E, 9A-9D, 10A-10D, 16A-16G, 17A-17D, 18A-18I, 19A-19H, and FIGS. 20A-20F are used to illustrate the processes described below. For ease of description, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device having a touch-sensitive display system 112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is optionally: an individual finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to the finger or stylus contact (eg, a center of an individual contact, or a point associated with the individual contact), or It is the center of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system 112 . However, similar operations are performed with the display 450 and the display 450 in response to detecting contacts on the touch-sensitive surface 451, optionally displaying the user interfaces shown in the figure with a focus selector on the display 450. It is performed on a device having a separate touch-sensitive surface 451 .

In FIG. 13A , virtual object 11002 is shown within staging user interface 6010 . The x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis are shown for virtual object 11002 .

13B and 13C illustrate an input for rotating the virtual object 11002 about the y-axis shown in FIG. 13A . In FIG. 13B , an input by contact 13002 is detected at a location corresponding to virtual object 11002 . The input travels along the path indicated by arrow 13004 by distance d ₁ . As the input moves along the path, the virtual object 11002 rotates about the y-axis (eg, by 35 degrees) to the position shown in FIG. 13B . In the staging user interface 6010 , a shadow 13006 corresponding to the virtual object 11002 is displayed. 13B to 13C , the shadow 13006 changes according to the changed position of the virtual object 11002 .

After the contact 13002 is lifted off the touch screen 112 , the virtual object 11002 moves (eg, to provide the impression that the virtual object 11002 behaves similarly to a physical object) of the contact 13002 . (according to the “momentum” imparted by

13E and 13F illustrate an input for rotating the virtual object 11002 about the x-axis shown in FIG. 13A . In FIG. 13E , an input by contact 13008 is detected at a location corresponding to virtual object 11002 . The input moves along a path indicated by arrow 13010 by a distance d ₁ . As the input moves along the path, the virtual object 11002 rotates about the x-axis (eg, by 5 degrees) to the position shown in FIG. 13F . Although contact 13008 moves along the x-axis in FIGS. 13E and 13F by the same distance d ₁ traveled by contact 13002 from FIGS. 13B and 13C , centered on the x-axis in FIGS. 13E and 13F . The rotation angle of the virtual object 11002 is smaller than the rotation angle of the virtual object 11002 about the y-axis in FIGS. 13B and 13C .

13F and 13G illustrate additional inputs for rotating the virtual object 11002 about the x-axis shown in FIG. 13A . In FIG. 13F , contact 13008 continues its movement, moving a distance d ₂ (greater than distance d ₁ ) along the path indicated by arrow 13012 . As the input moves along the path, the virtual object 11002 rotates about the x-axis (by 25 degrees) to the position shown in FIG. 13G . 13E-13G , movement of contact 13008 by a distance d ₁ + d ₂ causes virtual object 11002 to rotate 30 degrees about the x-axis, whereas FIGS. 13B and 13B and FIG. At 13c , movement of contact 13004 by distance d ₁ causes virtual object 11002 to rotate 35 degrees about the y-axis.

After the contact 13008 is lifted off the touch screen 112 , the virtual object 11002 , as shown in FIGS. 13G and 13H , (eg, when the movement of the contact 13008 reaches beyond the rotation limit) Rotate in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation caused by the movement of contact 13008 (to indicate what caused the amount of rotation of virtual object 11002 ).

13G-13I , shadow 13006 is not shown (eg, since virtual object 11002 does not cast a shadow when the object is viewed from below).

In FIG. 13I , an input (eg, a double tap input) is detected to return the virtual object 11002 (eg, as shown in FIG. 13A ) to the point in time at which it was originally displayed. The input occurs at a location corresponding to virtual object 11002 , as represented by contact 13014 . In response to the input, virtual object 11002 is rotated about the y-axis (to reverse the rotation that occurred from FIG. 13E to FIG. 13H) and about the x-axis (to reverse the rotation that occurred from FIG. 13B to FIG. 13D). rotated In FIG. 13J , input by contact 13016 caused virtual object 11002 to return to the originally displayed view.

In some embodiments, an input is received to resize the virtual object 11002 while the staging user interface 6010 is displayed. For example, the input to resize the virtual object 11002 may be a de-pinch gesture (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 6N and 6O ) or a virtual object to increase the size of the virtual object 11002 . It is a pinch gesture to decrease the size of 11002.

In FIG. 13J , input is received to replace the display of the staging user interface 6010 with a display of the user interface that includes the field of view 6036 of the camera(s). An input by contact 13016 is detected at a location corresponding to toggle control 6018 . In response to the input, the display of the staging user interface 6010 is replaced with a user interface comprising a field of view 6036 of the camera(s), as shown in FIG. 13K .

In FIG. 13K , virtual object 11002 is displayed in a user interface comprising field of view 6036 of the camera(s). A tactile output (as illustrated by 13018 ) is generated to indicate that a plane corresponding to the virtual object 11002 has been detected within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s). The angle of rotation of the virtual object 11002 in the user interface including the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) corresponds to the angle of rotation of the virtual object 11002 in the staging user interface 6010 .

When a user interface is displayed that includes a field of view 6036 of the camera(s), the input comprising lateral movement includes a field of view 6036 of the camera(s), as illustrated in FIGS. 13L and 13M . causes lateral movement of the virtual object 11002 within the user interface. In FIG. 13L , a contact 13020 is detected at a location corresponding to the virtual object 11002 , and the contact moves along a path indicated by an arrow 13022 . As the contact moves, the virtual object 11002 traces a path corresponding to the movement of the contact 13020 from a first location (as shown in FIG. 13L) to a second location (as shown in FIG. 13M). So move.

In some embodiments, the input provided when a user interface comprising a field of view 6036 of the camera(s) is displayed is, as described in connection with FIGS. 5aj-5am, a first plane (eg, a floor plane). movement of the virtual object 11002 from 5038 ) to a second plane (eg, table surface plane 5046 ).

14A-14Z illustrate example user interfaces for increasing a second threshold magnitude of movement required for a second object manipulation behavior in accordance with a determination that the first threshold magnitude of movement is satisfied for the first object manipulation behavior; . The user interfaces of these figures are shown in FIGS. 8A-8E, 9A-9D, 10A-10D, 14AA-14AD, 16A-16G, 17A-17D, 18A-18I, 19A. 19H and 20A-20F are used to illustrate the processes described below. For ease of description, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device having a touch-sensitive display system 112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is optionally: an individual finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to the finger or stylus contact (eg, a center of an individual contact, or a point associated with the individual contact), or It is the center of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system 112 . However, similar operations are performed with the display 450 and the display 450 in response to detecting contacts on the touch-sensitive surface 451, optionally displaying the user interfaces shown in the figure with a focus selector on the display 450. It is performed on a device having a separate touch-sensitive surface 451 .

In FIG. 14A , virtual object 11002 is displayed in a user interface comprising field of view 6036 of the camera(s). As will be further described with respect to FIGS. 14B-14Z , the translational motion measurer 14002 , the scaling motion measurer 14004 , and the rotational motion measurer 14006 can perform object manipulation behaviors (eg, translational motion, scaling motion). , and/or rotational motion) respectively). Translation meter 14002 indicates the magnitude of lateral (eg, left or right) movement of a set of contacts on touch screen display 112 . The scale movement meter 14004 indicates the magnitude of the increasing or decreasing distance between each of the sets of contacts on the touch screen display 112 (eg, the magnitude of a pinch or de-pinch gesture). Rotational movement meter 14006 indicates the magnitude of rotational movement of a set of contacts on touch screen display 112 .

14B-14E illustrate input for rotating a virtual object 11002 in a user interface that includes a field of view 6036 of one or more cameras. An input for rotating the virtual object 11002 is that the first contact 14008 rotates in a clockwise direction along the path indicated by arrow 14010 and the second contact 14012 moves along the path indicated by arrow 14014 . Includes a clockwise rotation movement. In FIG. 14B , contacts 14008 , 14012 with touch screen 112 are detected. In FIG. 14C , contact 14008 moved along the path indicated by arrow 14010 , and contact 14012 moved along the path indicated by arrow 14012 . Because the magnitude of the rotational movement of contact 14008 and contact 14012 in FIG. 14C has not reached threshold RT, virtual object 11002 has not yet rotated in response to the input. In FIG. 14D , the magnitude of the rotational movement of contact 14008 and contact 14012 has increased beyond a threshold RT, and virtual object 11002 is responsive to input (virtual object 11002 shown in FIG. 14B ). relative to the position of ) was rotated. When the magnitude of the rotational movement increases beyond the threshold RT, the required amount of movement to scale the virtual object 11002 is increased (eg, as indicated by the scaling movement meter 14004 , the scale The adjustment threshold ST has increased from ST to ST'), and the required amount of movement to translate the virtual object 11002 is increased (eg, as indicated by the translational movement meter 14002, the translational threshold TT ) increased from TT to TT'). In FIG. 14E , contact 14008 and contact 14012 continued to move along rotation paths indicated by arrows 14010 and 14014 , respectively, and virtual object 11002 continued to rotate in response to input. In FIG. 14F , contacts 14008 , 14012 have been lifted off from touch screen 112 .

14G-14I illustrate input for scaling (eg, increasing the size of) virtual object 11002 within a user interface that includes a field of view 6036 of one or more cameras. An input to increase the size of virtual object 11002 is that first contact 14016 moves along the path indicated by arrow 14018 (eg, such that the distance between contact 14016 and contact 14020 increases). and moving the second contact 14020 along the path indicated by the arrow 14022 . In FIG. 14G , contacts 14016 , 14020 with touch screen 112 are detected. In FIG. 14H , contact 14016 traveled along the path indicated by arrow 14018 , and contact 14020 traveled along the path indicated by arrow 14022 . Because the magnitude of movement of contact 14016 away from contact 14020 in FIG. 14H has not reached threshold ST, the size of virtual object 11002 has not yet been adjusted in response to the input. In FIG. 14I , the magnitude of the scaling movement of contact 14016 and contact 14020 has increased beyond the threshold ST, and the size of virtual object 11002 is increased in response to the input (virtual object shown in FIG. 14H ). (11002)) was increased. When the magnitude of the scaling movement increases beyond the threshold ST, the required magnitude of movement to rotate the virtual object 11002 is increased (eg, as indicated by the rotational movement meter 14006 , the rotation threshold (RT) increased from RT to RT'), the required amount of movement to translate the virtual object 11002 is increased (e.g., as indicated by the translational movement meter 14002, the translational threshold TT is increased from TT to TT'). In FIG. 14J , contacts 14016 , 14020 have been lifted off from touch screen 112 .

14K-14M illustrate input to translate virtual object 11002 (eg, to move virtual object 11002 to the left) in a user interface that includes a field of view 6036 of one or more cameras. An input for moving the virtual object 11002 is that the first contact 14024 moves along the path indicated by the arrow 14026 (eg, such that both the contact 14024 and the contact 14028 move to the left) and The second contact 14028 includes a gesture of moving along the path indicated by arrow 1430 . In FIG. 14K , contacts 14024 , 14028 with touch screen 112 are detected. In FIG. 14L , contact 14024 traveled along the path indicated by arrow 14026 , and contact 14028 traveled along the path indicated by arrow 14030 . Since the magnitude of the leftward movement of the contacts 14024 , 14028 in FIG. 14L has not reached the threshold TT, the virtual object 11002 has not yet moved in response to the input. In FIG. 14M , the magnitude of the leftward movement of the contact 14024 and the contact 14028 has increased beyond the threshold TT, and the virtual object 11002 has been moved in the direction of movement of the contacts 14024 and 14028 . When the magnitude of the translational movement increases beyond the threshold TT, the required amount of movement to scale the virtual object 11002 is increased (eg, as indicated by the scaling movement meter 14004 , the scale The adjustment threshold ST has increased from ST to ST′), and the required amount of movement to rotate the virtual object 11002 is increased (eg, as indicated by the rotational movement meter 14006 , the rotation threshold RT ) increased from RT to RT'). In FIG. 14N , contacts 14024 , 14028 have been lifted off from touch screen 112 .

14O-14Z illustrate translating the virtual object 11002 (eg, moving the virtual object 11002 to the right), scaling the virtual object 11002 (eg, increasing the size of the virtual object 11002). ), and an input including gestures for rotating the virtual object 11002 is exemplified. In FIG. 14O , contacts 14032 , 14036 with touch screen 112 are detected. 14O and 14P , contact 14032 travels along the path indicated by arrow 14034 , and contact 14036 travels along the path indicated by arrow 14038 . The magnitude of the rightward movement of the contacts 14032 and 14036 increased beyond the threshold TT, and the virtual object 11002 was moved in the movement direction of the contacts 14032 and 14036 . As a result of the satisfaction of the threshold TT by the movement of the contacts 14032 , 14036 , the required amount of movement to scale the virtual object 11002 is increased to ST′, and the rotation of the virtual object 11002 is increased. The required amount of movement to make it is increased to RT'. After the threshold TT is satisfied (as indicated by the high water mark 14043 shown in the translation measurer 14002 in Figure 14q), any lateral movement of the contacts 14032, 14036 is will cause lateral movement of the virtual object 11002 .

14Q and 14R , contact 14032 travels along the path indicated by arrow 14040 , and contact 14036 travels along the path indicated by arrow 14042 . In FIG. 14R , the magnitude of the movement of contact 14032 away from contact 14036 has exceeded the original scaling threshold ST, but has not reached the increased scaling threshold ST′. When an increased scaling movement threshold ST' is applied, scaling continues until the magnitude of movement of contact 14032 away from contact 14036 increases beyond the increased scaling movement threshold ST'. Since it did not occur, the size of the virtual object 11002 did not change from FIG. 14Q to FIG. 14R. 14R and 14S , the distance between contact 14032 and contact 14046 is such that contact 14032 travels along the path indicated by arrow 14044 and contact 14036 follows the path indicated by arrow 14046 . It continues to increase as you move. In FIG. 14S , the magnitude of movement of contact 14032 away from contact 14036 has exceeded the increased scaling threshold ST′, and the size of virtual object 11002 has increased. After the threshold ST' is satisfied (as indicated by the high water mark 14047 shown in the scaling movement meter 14004 in FIG. 14T ), any scaling movement of the contacts 14032 , 14036 is a virtual object. (11002) will cause scaling.

14T and 14U , contact 14032 travels along the path indicated by arrow 14048 , and contact 14036 travels along the path indicated by arrow 14050 . Since the threshold TT has been satisfied (as indicated by the high water mark 14043 shown in the translation measurer 14002 ), the virtual object 11002 moves in the direction of the lateral movement of the contacts 14032 , 14036 . move freely

14V and 14W , contact 14032 travels along the path indicated by arrow 14052 , and contact 14036 travels along the path indicated by arrow 14054 . Movement of the contacts 14032 , 14036 includes a translational movement (a leftward movement of the contacts 14032 , 14036 ) and a scaling movement (a movement that reduces the distance between the contact 14032 and the contact 14036 , such as a pinch). gestures)). Since the translation threshold TT has been satisfied (as indicated by the high water mark 14043 shown in the translation measurer 14002 ), the virtual object 11002 moves in the direction of lateral movement of the contacts 14032 , 14036 . Since the virtual object 11002 is free to move to , and the increased scaling threshold ST' has been satisfied (as indicated by the high water mark 14047 shown in the scaling motion meter 14004), the virtual object 11002 is contacted 14036. ) is freely scaled in response to movement of contact 14032 towards 14V to 14W , the size of the virtual object 11002 has been reduced, and the virtual object 11002 is the movement of the contact 14032 along the path indicated by the arrow 14052 and the contact along the path indicated by the arrow 14054 . It moved to the left in response to the movement of (14036).

14X-14Z , contact 14032 rotates counterclockwise along the path indicated by arrow 14056 , and contact 14036 rotates counterclockwise along the path indicated by arrow 14058 . . In FIG. 14Y , the magnitude of the rotational movement of contact 14032 and contact 14036 exceeded the original scaling threshold RT, but did not reach the increased scaling threshold RT′. When an increased scaling movement threshold RT' is applied, the amount of rotational movement of the contacts 14032, 14036 increases beyond the increased rotational movement threshold RT' of the virtual object 11002. No rotation occurred, so the virtual object 11002 did not rotate from FIG. 14X to FIG. 14Y. 14Y and 14Z , contacts 14032 and 14046 are counterclockwise as contact 14032 travels along the path indicated by arrow 14060 and contact 14036 travels along the path indicated by arrow 14062 . continue to rotate. In FIG. 14Z , the magnitude of the rotational movement of contact 14032 and contact 14036 exceeded the increased scaling threshold RT′, and virtual object 11002 rotated in response to the input.

14AA-14A are flow diagrams illustrating operations for increasing a second threshold magnitude of movement required for a second object manipulation behavior upon determining that the first threshold magnitude of movement is satisfied for the first object manipulation behavior. The operations described in connection with FIGS. 14A-A-D may include a display generating component (eg, a display, a projector, a heads up display, etc.) and a touch-sensitive surface (eg, a touch-sensitive surface, or both a display generating component and a touch-sensitive surface). It is performed in an electronic device (eg, device 300 of FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device 100 of FIG. 1A ) with a touch screen display that acts as both. Some of the operations described in connection with FIGS. 14AA to 14A are selectively combined and/or the order of some operations is selectively changed.

At operation 14066 , a first portion of the user input comprising movement of one or more contacts is detected. In operation 14068 , movement of the one or more contacts (eg, at a location corresponding to virtual object 11002 ) exceeds an object rotation threshold (eg, rotation threshold RT indicated by rotational movement measurer 14006 ). It is determined whether or not to increase in excess. Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts increases above the object rotation threshold (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 14B-14D ), flow proceeds to operation 14070 . Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts does not increase beyond the object rotation threshold, flow proceeds to operation 14074 .

At operation 14070 , the object (eg, virtual object 11002 ) is rotated based on the first portion of the user input (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 14B-14D ). At operation 14072 , the object translation threshold is increased (eg, from TT to TT′, as described with respect to FIG. 14D ), and the object scaling threshold is increased (eg, as described with respect to FIG. 14D ); ST to ST') is incremented. Flow proceeds from operation 14072 to operation 14086 of FIG. 14A , as indicated in A.

In operation 14074 , movement of the one or more contacts (eg, at a location corresponding to virtual object 11002 ) passes an object translation threshold (eg, a translation threshold TT indicated by translational movement measurer 14002 ). It is determined whether or not to increase in excess. Upon determining that the movement of one or more contacts increases above the object translation threshold (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 14K-14M ), flow proceeds to operation 14076 . Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts does not increase beyond the object translation threshold, flow proceeds to operation 14080 .

At operation 14076 , the object (eg, virtual object 11002 ) is translated based on the first portion of the user input (eg, as described in connection with FIGS. 14K-14M ). In operation 14078 , the object rotation threshold is increased (eg, from RT to RT′, as described with respect to FIG. 14M ), and the object scaling threshold is increased (eg, as described with respect to FIG. 14M ); ST to ST') is incremented. Flow proceeds from operation 14078 to operation 14100 of FIG. 14A , as indicated at B.

In an operation 14080 , movement of one or more contacts (eg, at a location corresponding to virtual object 11002 ) is indicated by an object scaling threshold (eg, a scaling movement measurer 14004 ), a scaling threshold ST ))), it is determined whether or not it increases. Upon determining that the movement of one or more contacts increases above the object scaling threshold (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 14G-14I ), flow proceeds to operation 14082 . Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts does not increase beyond the object scaling threshold, flow proceeds to operation 14085 .

At operation 14082 , the object (eg, virtual object 11002 ) is scaled based on the first portion of the user input (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 14G-14I ). At operation 14084 , the object rotation threshold is increased (eg, from RT to RT′, as described with respect to FIG. 14I ) and the object translation threshold is increased (eg, as described with respect to FIG. 14I , TT to TT') is increased. Flow proceeds from operation 14084 to operation 14114 of Figure 14Ad, as indicated at C.

At operation 14085 , an additional portion of the user input comprising movement of one or more contacts is detected. Flow proceeds from operation 14086 to operation 14066 .

In FIG. 14A , in operation 14086, an additional portion of the user input including movement of one or more contacts is detected. Flow proceeds from operation 14086 to operation 14088 .

At operation 14088 , it is determined whether the movement of the one or more contacts is a rotational movement. Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts is a rotational movement, flow proceeds to operation 14090 . Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts is not a rotational movement, flow proceeds to operation 14092 .

At operation 14090 , the object (eg, virtual object 11002 ) is rotated based on the additional portion of the user input (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 14D and 14E ). Because the rotation threshold was previously met, the object rotates freely in response to additional rotation input.

At operation 14092 , it is determined whether the movement of one or more contacts increases beyond an increased object translation threshold (eg, a translation threshold TT′ indicated by translational movement measurer 14002 of FIG. 14D ). In accordance with a determination that movement of one or more contacts increases above the increased object translation threshold, flow proceeds to operation 14094 . Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts does not increase beyond the increased object translation threshold, flow proceeds to operation 14096 .

At operation 14094 , the object (eg, virtual object 11002 ) is translated based on the additional portion of the user input.

At operation 14096 , it is determined whether movement of the one or more contacts increases beyond an increased object scaling threshold (eg, the scaling threshold ST′ indicated by the scaling motion measurer 14004 in FIG. 14D ). do. In accordance with a determination that the movement of one or more contacts increases beyond the increased object scaling threshold, flow proceeds to operation 14098 . Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts does not increase beyond the increased object scaling threshold, flow returns to operation 14086 .

At operation 14098 , the object (eg, virtual object 11002 ) is scaled based on the additional portion of the user input.

In FIG. 14A , in operation 14100 , an additional portion of the user input including movement of one or more contacts is detected. Flow proceeds from operation 14100 to operation 14102 .

At operation 14102 , it is determined whether the movement of the one or more contacts is a translational movement. Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts is a translational movement, flow proceeds to operation 140104 . Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts is not a translational movement, flow proceeds to operation 14106 .

At operation 14104 , the object (eg, virtual object 11002 ) is translated based on the additional portion of the user input. Since the translation threshold has been previously met, the object is free to translate according to additional translation input.

At operation 14106 , it is determined whether movement of the one or more contacts increases above an increased object rotation threshold (eg, rotation threshold RT′ indicated by rotational movement measurer 14006 of FIG. 14M ). Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts increases above the increased object rotation threshold, flow proceeds to operation 14108 . Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts does not increase beyond the increased object rotation threshold, flow proceeds to operation 14110 .

At operation 14108 , the object (eg, virtual object 11002 ) is rotated based on the additional portion of the user input.

At operation 14110 , it is determined whether movement of the one or more contacts increases beyond an increased object scaling threshold (eg, the scaling threshold ST′ indicated by the scaling motion measurer 14004 in FIG. 14M ). do. Upon determining that the movement of one or more contacts increases beyond the increased object scaling threshold, flow proceeds to operation 14112 . Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts does not increase beyond the increased object scaling threshold, flow returns to operation 14100 .

At operation 14112 , the object (eg, virtual object 11002 ) is scaled based on the additional portion of the user input.

In FIG. 14A , in operation 14114 , an additional portion of the user input including movement of one or more contacts is detected. Flow proceeds from operation 14114 to operation 14116 .

At operation 14116 , it is determined whether the movement of the one or more contacts is a scaling movement. Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts is a scaling movement, flow proceeds to operation 140118 . Upon determining that the movement of one or more contacts is not a scaling movement, flow proceeds to operation 14120 .

At operation 14118 , the object (eg, virtual object 11002 ) is scaled based on the additional portion of the user input. Because the scaling threshold was previously met, the object is free to scale according to additional scaling inputs.

At operation 14120 , it is determined whether movement of the one or more contacts increases beyond an increased object rotation threshold (eg, rotation threshold RT′ indicated by rotational movement measurer 14006 of FIG. 14I ). Upon determining that movement of the one or more contacts increases beyond the increased object rotation threshold, flow proceeds to operation 14122 . Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts does not increase beyond the increased object rotation threshold, flow proceeds to operation 14124 .

At operation 14122 , the object (eg, virtual object 11002 ) is rotated based on the additional portion of the user input.

At operation 14124 , it is determined whether the movement of the one or more contacts increases beyond an increased object translation threshold (eg, a translation threshold TT′ indicated by translational movement measurer 14002 in FIG. 14I ). Upon determining that movement of the one or more contacts increases above the increased object translation threshold, flow proceeds to operation 14126 . Upon determining that the movement of the one or more contacts does not increase beyond the increased object translation threshold, flow proceeds to operation 14114 .

15A-15A illustrate example user interfaces for generating an audio alert upon a determination that movement of the device causes the virtual object to move outside the displayed field of view of one or more device cameras. The user interfaces of these figures are shown in FIGS. 8A-8E, 9A-9D, 10A-10D, 16A-16G, 17A-17D, 18A-18I, 19A-19H, and FIGS. 20A-20F are used to illustrate the processes described below. For ease of description, some of the embodiments will be discussed with reference to operations performed on a device having a touch-sensitive display system 112 . In such embodiments, the focus selector is optionally: an individual finger or stylus contact, a representative point corresponding to the finger or stylus contact (eg, a center of an individual contact, or a point associated with the individual contact), or It is the center of two or more contacts detected on the touch-sensitive display system 112 . However, similar operations are performed with the display 450 and the display 450 in response to detecting contacts on the touch-sensitive surface 451, optionally displaying the user interfaces shown in the figure with a focus selector on the display 450. It is performed on a device having a separate touch-sensitive surface 451 .

15A-15AI illustrate user interfaces and device actions that occur when an accessibility feature is active. In some embodiments, the accessibility feature includes a reduced number of inputs or alternatives (eg, to increase ease of accessing device features for users with limited ability to provide the input gestures described above) includes a mode in which inputs are made available to access device features. For example, the accessibility mode may be such that a first input gesture (eg, a swipe input) is used to advance or backward through available device actions and a select input (eg, a double tap input) is used to perform a currently displayed operation. This is the switch control mode used. As the user interacts with the device (eg, providing the user with feedback indicating that an action has been performed, indicating the current display state of the virtual object 11002 to the field of view of one or more cameras of the device or a staging user interface) etc.) audio alerts are generated.

In FIG. 15A , messaging user interface 5008 includes a two-dimensional representation of three-dimensional virtual object 11002 . A selection cursor 15001 is shown surrounding the three-dimensional virtual object 11002 (eg, to indicate that the currently selected operation is an operation to be performed on the virtual object 11002 ). An input by contact 15002 (eg, a double tap input) is detected to perform a currently displayed action (eg, displaying a three-dimensional representation of virtual object 11002 within staging user interface 6010 ). In response to the input, the display of the messaging user interface 5060 is replaced with the display of the staging user interface 6010 , as shown in FIG. 15B .

In FIG. 15B , virtual object 11002 is displayed within staging user interface 6010 . To indicate the status of the device, an audio alert is generated (eg, by the device speaker 111 ), as indicated at 15008 . For example, audio alert 15008 includes a notification as indicated by 15010, “chair is now shown in the staging view.”

In FIG. 15B , a selection cursor 15001 is shown surrounding the sharing control 6020 (eg, to indicate that the currently selected operation is a sharing operation). An input by contact 15004 (eg, a rightward swipe along the path indicated by arrow 15006) is detected. In response to the input, the selected action advances to the next action.

In FIG. 15C , the tilt up control unit 15012 is displayed (eg, to indicate that the currently selected operation is an operation for tilting the displayed virtual object 11002 upward). An audio alert is generated, as indicated at 15014 , to indicate the status of the device. For example, an audio alert includes a notification, as indicated at 15016, "selected: tilt up button." An input by contact 15018 (eg, a rightward swipe along the path indicated by arrow 15020) is detected. In response to the input, the selected action advances to the next action.

In FIG. 15D , the tilt down control unit 15022 is displayed (eg, to indicate that the currently selected operation is an operation for tilting the displayed virtual object 11002 downward). An audio alert is generated, as indicated at 15024, to indicate the status of the device. For example, an audio alert includes a notification, as indicated by 15026, "selected: tilt down button." An input by contact 15028 (eg, a double tap input) is detected. In response to the input, the selected action is performed (eg, virtual object 11002 is tilted downward within the staging view).

In FIG. 15E , virtual object 11002 is tilted downward within the staging view. An audio alert is generated, as indicated at 15030, to indicate the status of the device. For example, an audio alert can trigger a notification such as 15032, "Chair tilted five degrees down. Chair is now tilted 10 degrees toward the screen. Chair is now tilted 5 degrees down toward the screen. lose)".

In FIG. 15F , input by contact 15034 (eg, a right swipe along the path indicated by arrow 15036 ) is detected. In response to the input, the selected action advances to the next action.

In FIG. 15G , the clockwise rotation control unit 15038 is displayed (eg, to indicate that the currently selected operation is an operation for rotating the displayed virtual object 11002 clockwise). Audio alert 15040 includes a notification, as indicated at 15042 , “selected: rotate clockwise button”. An input by contact 15044 (eg, a rightward swipe along the path indicated by arrow 15046) is detected. In response to the input, the selected action advances to the next action.

In FIG. 15H , the counterclockwise rotation control unit 15048 is displayed (eg, to indicate that the currently selected operation is an operation for rotating the displayed virtual object 11002 counterclockwise). Audio alert 15050 includes a notification, as indicated at 15052 , “selected: rotate counterclockwise button”. An input by contact 15054 (eg, a double tap input) is detected. In response to the input, the selected action is performed (eg, virtual object 11002 is rotated counterclockwise within the staging view, as shown in FIG. 15I ).

In FIG. 15I , audio alert 15056 is a notification, as indicated by 15058, "Chair rotated by five degrees counterclockwise. Chair is now rotated five degrees away the screen. The chair is now rotated 5 degrees away from the screen. rotated 5 degrees away from)".

In FIG. 15J , input by contact 15060 (eg, a rightward swipe along the path indicated by arrow 15062) is detected. In response to the input, the selected action advances to the next action.

In FIG. 15K , the zoom control 15064 is displayed (eg, to indicate that the currently selected operation is an operation for zooming the displayed virtual object 11002 ). Audio alert 15066 includes an alert as indicated at 15068, “scale: adjustable.” The keyword "adjustable" along with the control name in the notification indicates that a swipe input (eg, a vertical swipe input) can be used to operate the control. For example, an upward swipe input is provided by contact 5070 as it moves upward along the path indicated by arrow 5072 . In response to the input, a zoom operation is performed (eg, the size of the virtual object 11002 is increased, as shown in FIGS. 15K and 15L ).

In FIG. 15L , audio alert 15074 includes a notification, as indicated by 15076, "Chair is now adjusted to 150 percent of original size." Input to decrease the size of virtual object 11002 (eg, a downward swipe input) is provided by contact 5078 moving downward along the path indicated by arrow 5078 . In response to the input, a zoom operation is performed (eg, the size of the virtual object 11002 is reduced, as shown in FIGS. 15L and 15M ).

In FIG. 15M , audio alert 15082 includes a notification, as indicated by 15084, "Chair is now adjusted to 100 percent of original size." Because the virtual object 11002 is resized to its original displayed size within the staging view 6010 , a tactile output (as illustrated by 15086 ) may occur (eg, the virtual object 11002 is resized to its original size). to provide feedback indicating that it has returned).

In FIG. 15N , input by contact 15088 (eg, a rightward swipe along the path indicated by arrow 15090) is detected. In response to the input, the selected action advances to the next action.

In FIG. 15O , a selection cursor 15001 is shown surrounding the back control 6016 (eg, to indicate that the currently selected action is an action to return to the previous user interface). Audio alert 15092 includes a notification as indicated at 15094, “selected: return button”. An input by contact 15096 (eg, a rightward swipe along the path indicated by arrow 15098) is detected. In response to the input, the selected action advances to the next action.

In FIG. 15P , the selection cursor 15001 indicates that (eg, the currently selected operation is to toggle between the display of the staging user interface 6010 and the display of the user interface including the field of view 6036 of the camera(s)) To illustrate this), the toggle control 6018 is shown surrounding it. Audio alert 15098 includes a notification as indicated at 50100, “selected: world view/staging view toggle.” An input by contact 15102 (eg, a double tap input) is detected. In response to the input, the display of the staging user interface 6010 is replaced with the display of the user interface including the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) (as shown in FIG. 15Q ).

15Q-15T show when the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) is displayed (eg, because the plane corresponding to the virtual object 11002 has not yet been detected within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s)). The calibration sequence that occurs is illustrated. During the calibration sequence, a translucent representation of the virtual object 11002 is displayed, the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) is blurred, (including a representation 12004 of the device 100 and a representation 12010 of a plane) ) a prompt containing an animated image is displayed prompting the user to move the device. In FIG. 15Q , audio alert 15102 includes a notification, as indicated by 50104 , “move the device to detect a plane.” 15Q to 15R , the device 100 is moved relative to the physical environment 5002 (eg, as indicated by the altered position of the table 5004 within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s)). As a result of detection of movement of device 100 , calibration user interface object 12014 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 15S .

In FIG. 15S , audio alert 15106 includes a notification, as indicated by 50108, “move the device to detect a plane.” 15S and 15T , the calibration user interface object 12014 indicates that the device 100 is in the physical environment 5002 (eg, as indicated by the altered position of the table 5004 within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s)). ) as it moves with respect to In FIG. 15T , sufficient motion has occurred for the plane corresponding to the virtual object 11002 to be detected within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s), and an audio alert 15110 is alerted, as indicated by 50112, a notification, "plane detected." (plane detected)". 15U and 15V , the translucency of the virtual object 11002 is reduced, and the virtual object 11002 is placed on the detected plane.

In Figure 15v, audio alert 15114 is a notification, as indicated by 50116, "chair is now projected in the world, 100 percent visible, occupying 10 percent of the screen, occupies 10 percent of the screen)". The tactile output generators output a tactile output (as illustrated by 15118 ) to indicate that the virtual object 11002 has been placed on a plane. The virtual object 11002 is displayed in a fixed position relative to the physical environment 5002 .

15V and 15W , the device 100 displays a table 5004 within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) such that the virtual object 11002 is no longer visible within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s). ) is moved relative to the physical environment 5002 ). As a result of the movement of the virtual object 11002 out of the field of view 6036 of the camera(s), the audio alert 15122 is alerted as indicated by 50124, "chair is not on the screen. )" is included.

15W and 15X , the device 100 has moved relative to the physical environment 5002 such that the virtual object 11002 is again visible within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) of FIG. 15X . As a result of the movement of the virtual object 11002 into the field of view 6036 of the camera(s), a notification, as indicated by 50120, "chair is now projected in the world, 100 percent visible, occupying 10 percent of the screen" An audio alert 15118 containing

15X and 15Y , device 100 (eg, device 100 is “closer” to virtual object 11002 as projected in field of view 6036 of the camera(s), and virtual object ( 11002) has moved relative to the physical environment 5002 (so that it is partially visible within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) of FIG. 15Y ). As a result of, in part, movement of virtual object 11002 out of field of view 6036 of the camera(s), audio alert 15126 may generate a notification, as indicated by 50128, "chair is 90 percent visible, occupying 20 percent of the screen." (The chair is 90 percent visible and takes up 20 percent of the screen).

In some embodiments, input provided at a location corresponding to virtual object 11002 causes an audio message comprising verbal information regarding virtual object 11002 to be provided. In contrast, when input is provided at a location remote from the virtual object 11002 and the controls, an audio message containing verbal information about the virtual object 11002 is not provided. In FIG. 15Z , audio output 15130 (eg, “click” or “buzz”) is output to indicate that contact 15132 is detected at a location that does not correspond to a location of a control or virtual object 11002 within the user interface. Occurs. 15AA , an input by contact 15134 is detected at a location corresponding to the location of virtual object 11002 . In response to the input, corresponding to the virtual object 11002 (eg, indicating the state of the virtual object 11002 ) including a notification, "chair is 90 percent visible, occupying 20 percent of the screen," as indicated by 50138. An audio alert 15136 is generated.

15A-15A illustrate input for selection and performance of operations in a switch control mode while a user interface including a field of view 6036 of the camera(s) is displayed.

In FIG. 15A , an input by contact 15140 (eg, a rightward swipe along the path indicated by arrow 15142) is detected. In response to the input, an action is selected, as shown in FIG. 15A .

In FIG. 15A , the rightward lateral movement control unit 15144 is displayed (eg, to indicate that the currently selected operation is an operation for moving the virtual object 11002 to the right). Audio alert 15146 includes a notification, as indicated at 15148 , “selected: move right button.” An input by contact 15150 (eg, a double tap input) is detected. In response to the input, the selected action is performed (eg, the virtual object 11002 is moved right within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s), as shown in FIG. 15A ).

In FIG. 15Ad , movement of virtual object 11002 causes a notification, "chair is 100 percent visible, occupying 30 percent of the screen," as indicated by 15154 , "chair is 100 percent visible, occupying 30 percent of the screen." It is reported by the containing audio alert 15152 .

In FIG. 15A , an input by contact 15156 (eg, a rightward swipe along the path indicated by arrow 15158 ) is detected. In response to the input, the selected action advances to the next action.

In FIG. 15A , the leftward lateral movement control unit 15160 is displayed (eg, to indicate that the currently selected operation is an operation for moving the virtual object 11002 to the left). Audio alert 15162 includes a notification, as indicated at 15164 , “selected: move left.” An input by contact 15166 (eg, a rightward swipe along the path indicated by arrow 15168) is detected. In response to the input, the selected action advances to the next action.

In FIG. 15Ag , the clockwise rotation control unit 15170 is displayed (eg, to indicate that the currently selected operation is an operation for rotating the virtual object 11002 clockwise). Audio alert 15172 includes a notification, as indicated at 15174 , “selected: rotate clockwise.” An input by contact 15176 (eg, a rightward swipe along the path indicated by arrow 15178 ) is detected. In response to the input, the selected action advances to the next action.

In FIG. 15A , the counterclockwise rotation control unit 15180 is displayed (eg, to indicate that the currently selected operation is an operation for rotating the virtual object 11002 clockwise). Audio alert 15182 includes a notification, as indicated at 15184 , “selected: rotate counterclockwise.” An input by contact 15186 (eg, a double tap input) is detected. In response to the input, the selected action is performed (eg, virtual object 11002 is rotated counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. 15AI ).

In Figure 15ai, audio alert 15190 is a notification, as indicated by 15164, "Chair rotated by five degrees counterclockwise. Chair is now rotated by zero degrees relative to the screen. now rotated 0 degrees relative to the screen)".

In some embodiments, a reflection is generated on at least one surface (eg, a lower surface) of an object (eg, virtual object 11002 ). The reflected image is generated using image data captured by one or more cameras of device 100 . For example, the reflected image may be captured image data (eg, an image, a set of images, and/or video) at least in part. In some embodiments, generating the reflective image includes generating a spherical model comprising the captured image data (eg, by mapping the captured image data onto a model of a virtual sphere).

In some embodiments, the reflected image generated on the surface of the object includes a reflection gradient (eg, such that a portion of the surface closer to the plane has a higher magnitude of reflectance than a portion of the surface further from the plane). In some embodiments, the magnitude of the reflectance of a reflection generated on the surface of the object is based on the reflectance value of the texture corresponding to the surface. For example, no reflective image is produced in the non-reflective portion of the surface.

In some embodiments, the reflective image is adjusted over time. For example, a reflective image is adjusted as input is received to move and/or scale the object (eg, as the object moves, the reflective image of the object is such that it reflects a portion of a plane at a location corresponding to the object). adjusted). In some embodiments, the reflected image is not adjusted when the object is rotated (eg, about the z-axis).

In some embodiments, prior to displaying the object at the determined location (eg, on a plane detected within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s) corresponding to the object), no reflection is created on the surface of the object. For example, when a translucent representation of an object is displayed (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 11G and 11H ) and/or calibration is performed (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 12B-12I ) No reflection is created on the surface of the object when it is being made.

In some embodiments, a reflection of the object is created on one or more planes detected within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s). In some embodiments, the reflection of the object is not created within the field of view 6036 of the camera(s).

16A-16G are flow diagrams illustrating a method 16000 of displaying a virtual object in a user interface including a field of view of one or more cameras using different visual properties depending on whether object placement criteria are met. The method 16000 includes a display generating component (eg, a display, a projector, a heads up display, etc.), one or more input devices (eg, a touch-sensitive surface, or a touch serving as both a display generating component and a touch-sensitive surface). a screen display), and an electronic device (eg, device 300 of FIG. 3 , or of FIG. 1A ), and one or more cameras (eg, one or more rear cameras on the side of the device opposite the display and touch-sensitive surface). portable multifunction device 100). In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on or integrated with the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 16000 are selectively combined and/or the order of some operations is selectively changed.

The device may include a first user interface area (eg, while a staging user interface including a movable representation of the virtual object is displayed and before a field of view of the cameras is displayed) that includes at least a portion of the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, A request is received (16002) to display a virtual object (eg, a representation of a three-dimensional model) within the augmented reality observer interface (eg, the request is an input by a contact detected on a representation of the virtual object on the touch screen display, or a touch is detected on an affordance that is displayed concurrently with the representation of the virtual object and is configured to trigger the display of the AR view when invoked by the first contact (eg, a tap on the “AR view” or “world view” button). For example, the request is an input to display the virtual object 11002 within the field of view 6036 of one or more cameras, as described with respect to FIG. 11F .

In response to a request to display the virtual object in the first user interface area (eg, a request to display the virtual object in a view of the physical environment surrounding the device), the device includes, via the display creation component, in the first user interface area. display a representation of the virtual object over at least a portion of the field of view of the one or more cameras being displayed (eg, the field of view of the one or more cameras displayed in response to a request to display the virtual object within the first user interface area), is a view of the physical environment in which one or more cameras are located (16004). For example, as described with respect to FIG. 11G , the virtual object 11002 is displayed within the field of view 6036 of one or more cameras, which is a view of the physical environment 5002 in which the one or more cameras are located. Displaying the representation of the virtual object is, in accordance with a determination that the object placement criteria are not met - the object placement criteria such that a placement location (eg, plane) relative to the virtual object is within the field of view of the one or more cameras for the object placement criteria to be met. Requires to be identified (eg, object placement criteria are not met when the device has not identified a location or plane to position the virtual object with respect to the field of view of one or more cameras within the first user interface area (eg, plane identification is still in progress, or there is not enough image data to identify a plane)), with a first set of visual properties (eg, a first translucency level, or a first brightness level, or a first saturation level, etc.) ) and displaying the representation of the virtual object in a first orientation independent of which portion of the physical environment is displayed within the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, the virtual object is relative to a predefined plane independent of the physical environment). floats above the cameras' field of view with orientation (eg, an orientation established within the staging view) and with an orientation independent of changes occurring in the camera's field of view (eg, changes due to movement of the device relative to the physical environment). For example, in FIGS. 11G and 11H , the translucent form of the virtual object 11002 is displayed because the placement location for the virtual object 11002 has not been identified within the field of view 6036 of the cameras. As the device moves (as shown from FIG. 11G to FIG. 11H ), the orientation of the virtual object 11002 does not change. In some embodiments, the object placement criteria include a requirement that the field of view is stable and provide a still view of the physical environment (eg, the camera has moved less than a threshold amount for at least a threshold amount of time, and/or since the request is received at least The predetermined time has elapsed and/or the camera has been calibrated for plane detection with sufficient previous movement of the device). Upon determining that the object placement criteria are met (eg, the object placement criteria are satisfied when the device has not identified a location or plane for placing the virtual object with respect to the field of view of one or more cameras within the first user interface area); The device is configured with a second set of visual properties distinct from the first set of visual properties (eg, with a second translucency level, or a second brightness level, or a second saturation level, etc.) and within the field of view of the one or more cameras. Display the representation of the virtual object in a second orientation corresponding to a plane within the detected physical environment. For example, in FIG. 11I , the placement location for the virtual object 11002 (eg, the plane corresponding to the floor surface 5038 in the physical environment 5002 ) was identified within the field of view 6036 of the cameras, so that the virtual The non-translucent shape of the object 11002 is displayed. The orientation of the virtual object 11002 (eg, the position on the touch screen display 112 ) has changed from the first orientation shown in FIG. 11H to the second orientation shown in FIG. 11I . As the device moves (as shown in FIG. 11I to 11J ), the orientation of the virtual object 11002 changes (since the virtual object 11002 is now displayed in a fixed orientation with respect to the physical environment 5002 ). do. Depending on whether the object placement criteria are met, displaying the virtual object with the first set of visual properties or the second set of visual properties may provide visual feedback to the user (indicating that additional time and/or calibration information is needed to place within the camera's field of view). Providing the user with improved visual feedback helps the user to provide appropriate inputs (eg, prior to placement of the object in a second orientation corresponding to the plane) and avoid attempts to provide input for manipulating the virtual object. ) improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the device detects that object placement criteria are met while the representation of the virtual object is displayed in a first orientation and with a first set of visual properties ( 1606 ) (eg, a plane for placing the virtual object). is identified while the virtual object is suspended in a translucent state over a view of the physical environment around the device). Detecting that the object placement criteria are satisfied while the virtual object is displayed with a first set of visual properties (eg, in a translucent state) without requiring additional user input to initiate detection of the object placement criteria is an object Reduces the number of inputs required for deployment. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby Reduces power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the object placement criteria are met, the device, via the display creation component, moves (eg, rotates, scales, and/or rotates, and/or scales, from a first orientation to a second orientation) , translate and/or move in a combination of the above) display an animated transition showing the representation of the virtual object changing from having the first set of visual properties to having the second set of visual properties (16008). For example, once a plane for placing a virtual object is identified within the camera's field of view, the virtual object is placed on that plane with visible adjustments of its orientation, size, and translucency (etc.). Displaying the animated transition from the first orientation to the second orientation (eg, without requiring additional user input to reorient the virtual object in the first user interface) reduces the number of inputs required for object placement. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby Reduces power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, detecting that object placement criteria are met includes detecting that a plane has been identified within the field of view of one or more cameras; detecting less than a threshold amount of movement between the device and the physical environment for at least a threshold amount of time (eg, leading to a substantially stationary view of the physical environment within the field of view of the camera); and detecting that at least a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since receiving the request to display the virtual object within the first user interface area ( 16010 ). Detecting that object placement criteria are met (eg, by detecting a plane within the field of view of one or more cameras without requiring user input to detect the plane) reduces the number of inputs required for object placement. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby Reduces power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, the device presents the representation of the virtual object over a first portion of the physical environment (eg, the first portion of the physical environment is visible to the user through the translucent virtual object) captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras. A set of visual attributes and a first movement of the one or more cameras while displayed in a first orientation (eg, while the virtual object is suspended in a translucent state over a view of the physical environment around the device) (eg, the physical environment around the device) Rotation and/or translation of the device with respect to ) is detected (16012). For example, in FIGS. 11G and 11H , one or more cameras are indicated by an altered position of table 5004 (eg, within the cameras' field of view 6036 ) while a translucent representation of virtual object 11002 is displayed. as) move. Walls and tables of the physical environment as captured within the camera's field of view 6036 and displayed in the user interface are visible through the translucent virtual object 11002 . In response to detecting the first movement of the one or more cameras, the device displays a representation of the virtual object in a first orientation and a first set of visual properties over a second portion of the physical environment captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras. The second portion of the physical environment is distinct from the first portion of the physical environment ( 16014 ). For example, while the translucent form of the virtual object is displayed as hovering over the physical environment as seen in the camera's field of view, the view of the physical environment within the camera's field of view changes as the device moves relative to the physical environment (eg, behind the translucent virtual object). ) is shifted and scaled. Thus, during movement of the device, the translucent form of the virtual object is overlaid on top of different portions of the physical environment represented within the field of view, as a result of the translation and scaling of the view of the physical environment within the field of view of the camera. For example, in FIG. 11H , the camera's field of view 6036 displays a second portion of the physical environment 5002 distinct from the first portion of the physical environment 5002 displayed in FIG. 11G . The orientation of the translucent representation of virtual object 11002 does not change when movement of one or more cameras occurs in FIGS. 11G and 11H . Displaying the virtual object in a first orientation in response to detecting movement of the one or more cameras (eg, the virtual object has not yet been positioned in a fixed position relative to the physical environment and thus is captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras) provide visual feedback to the user (indicating that a portion of the physical environment does not move as it changes with movement of one or more cameras). Providing the user with improved visual feedback may include operability of the device (eg, by helping the user avoid attempts to provide input for manipulating the virtual object prior to placement of the object in a second orientation corresponding to a plane). and make the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the device provides a direct view of a third portion of the physical environment (eg, a third portion of the physical environment (eg, a portion of the detected plane supporting the virtual object) that is captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras) obstructed by the virtual object) while the representation of the virtual object is displayed in a second orientation and with a second set of visual properties (eg, on a plane where object placement criteria have been met and the virtual object is detected in the physical environment within the field of view of the cameras) ) detect ( 16016 ) a second movement of the one or more cameras (eg, rotation and/or translation of the device relative to the physical environment around the device). For example, in FIGS. 11I and 11J , one or more cameras are positioned at an altered location of table 5004 (eg, within the cameras' field of view 6036 ) while a non-translucent representation of virtual object 11002 is displayed. as indicated by) to move. In response to detecting the second movement of the device, the device moves (eg, shifts and scales) the physical environment as captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras in accordance with the second movement of the device, the second orientation A virtual object with a second orientation and a second set of visual properties over a third portion of the physical environment captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras while still corresponding to a plane in the physical environment detected within the field of view of the one or more cameras. Maintain display of the representation of ( 16018 ). For example, after a non-translucent shape of a virtual object is dropped from a stationary position on a plane that is detected in the physical environment seen in the camera's field of view, the position and orientation of the virtual object is fixed with respect to the physical environment within the camera's field of view, and the virtual The object will shift and scale with the physical environment within the field of view of the cameras as the device moves relative to the physical environment (eg, a non-translucent representation of virtual object 11002 indicates that movement of one or more cameras is shown in FIGS. 11I and 11J ). remain fixed in an orientation relative to the floor plane within the physical environment 5002 as it occurs). Maintaining displaying the virtual object in a second orientation in response to detecting movement of the one or more cameras (eg, the virtual object was positioned at a fixed location relative to the physical environment and thus captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras) provide visual feedback to the user indicating that the portion of the physical environment being moved as it changes with the movement of one or more cameras). Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and enhances the user-device interface (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs for a virtual object disposed in a second orientation corresponding to a plane). making it more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the object placement criteria are met when the object placement criteria are met (eg, the device has not identified a location or plane for placing the virtual object with respect to the field of view of one or more cameras within the first user interface area. according to the determination that the device becomes a physical environment detected within the field of view of the one or more cameras and with a second set of visual attributes (eg, with a reduced translucency level, or a higher brightness level, or a higher saturation level, etc.) generate a tactile output (eg, with one or more tactile output generators of the device) in conjunction with displaying the representation of the virtual object in a second orientation corresponding to a plane within Synchronized with the completion of the transition to a non-translucent appearance and the completion of the rotation and translation of the virtual object to settle at the location of the drop on the plane detected in the physical environment (16020). For example, as shown in FIG. 11I , to 11010 with displaying a non-translucent representation of virtual object 11002 attached to a plane (eg, floor surface 5038 ) corresponding to virtual object 11002 . A tactile output as indicated is produced. Generating a tactile output in accordance with a determination that the object placement criteria are met provides improved tactile feedback to the user (eg, indicating that the action of placing the virtual object has been successfully executed). Providing the user with improved feedback improves the operability of the device and improves the user's operability (eg, by providing sensory information that makes the user aware that object placement criteria have been met without confusing the user interface with the displayed information). -Make the device interface more efficient, which additionally enables users to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life.

In some embodiments, while displaying the representation of the virtual object with the second set of visual properties and in a second orientation corresponding to a plane in the physical environment detected within the field of view of the one or more cameras, the device Receive updates regarding at least a position or orientation of a plane in the physical environment that is detected within the field of view (eg, the updated plane position and orientation is based on additional data accumulated after initial plane detection results are used to position the virtual object) A more accurate calculation, or the result of more time-consuming calculation methods (eg, fewer approximations, etc.) 16022 . In response to receiving an update regarding at least a position or orientation of a plane in the physical environment detected within the field of view of the one or more cameras, the device adjusts (eg, at least a position and/or orientation of the representation of the virtual object according to the update). Gradually move (eg, translate and rotate) the virtual object closer to the updated plane ( 16024 ). Adjusting the position and/or orientation of the virtual object in response to receiving an update about the plane within the physical environment (eg, without requiring user input to position the virtual object with respect to the plane) comprises adjusting the virtual object. reduce the number of inputs required to Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby Reduces power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, the first set of visual attributes includes a first size and a first level of translucency (eg, before falling into the AR view, the object has a fixed size and a fixed high level of translucency for the display) ( 16026 ), the second set of visual attributes are displayed at a second size distinct from the first size (eg, once dropped from the AR view, the object is displayed at a simulated physical size with respect to the location and size of the drop in the physical environment) ) and a second translucency level that is lower than (eg, more opaque than) the first translucency level (eg, the object is no longer translucent in the AR view) ( 16028 ). For example, in FIG. 11H , a translucent representation of virtual object 11002 is shown at a first size, and in FIG. 11I , a non-translucent representation of virtual object 11004 is shown at a second (smaller) size. there is. Depending on whether the object placement criteria are met, displaying the virtual object at the first size and at the first translucent level or at the second size and at the second translucency level (eg, a request to display the virtual object has been received, but the virtual object provide visual feedback to the user (indicating that additional time and/or calibration information is needed to place the . Providing the user with improved visual feedback helps the user to provide appropriate inputs (eg, prior to placement of the object in a second orientation corresponding to the plane) and avoid attempts to provide input for manipulating the virtual object. ) improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, while the virtual object is displayed within a respective user interface (eg, a staging user interface) that does not include at least a portion of the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, the virtual object is oriented independent of the physical environment of the device) oriented relative to the virtual stage), a request is received ( 16030 ) to display the virtual object in a first user interface area (eg, AR view) that includes at least a portion of the field of view of one or more cameras. The first orientation corresponds to the orientation of the virtual object while the virtual object is displayed within the respective user interface at the time the request is received. For example, as described with respect to FIG. 11F , a virtual object 11002 within a user interface that includes a field of view 6036 of cameras while a staging user interface 6010 (not including the field of view of the cameras) is displayed. A request to display is received. The orientation of the virtual object 11002 of FIG. 11G where the virtual object 11002 is displayed within a user interface that includes the field of view 6036 of the cameras is the same as that of FIG. 11F where the virtual object 11002 is displayed within the staging user interface 6010 . Corresponds to the orientation of the virtual object 11002 . Displaying the virtual object in the first user interface (eg, displayed augmented reality view) in an orientation that corresponds to the orientation of the virtual object as displayed in the (previously displayed) interface (eg, staging user interface) includes (eg, , indicating that object manipulation input provided while the staging user interface is displayed can be used to establish the orientation of the object within the AR view) to the user. Providing the user with improved visual feedback helps the user to provide appropriate inputs (eg, prior to placement of the object in a second orientation corresponding to the plane) and avoid attempts to provide input for manipulating the virtual object. ) improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the first orientation is a predefined orientation (eg, such as the orientation in which the virtual object is displayed when it is displayed for the first time within each user interface that does not include at least a portion of the field of view of the one or more cameras). default orientation) (16032). Displaying the virtual object in a first user interface (eg, displayed augmented reality view) with a first set of visual properties and in a predefined orientation (eg, causes a translucent representation according to an orientation established within the staging user interface) By allowing a pre-generated translucent representation of a virtual object to be displayed rather than rendering), it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, the virtual object within the first user interface area (eg, AR view) with a second set of visual attributes and in a second orientation corresponding to a plane in the physical environment detected within the field of view of the one or more cameras. During display, the device (eg, as a result of a scaling input (eg, a pinch or de-pinch gesture relative to the virtual object)) the simulated physical size of the virtual object relative to the physical environment captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras. A request to change from the first simulated physical size to a second simulated physical size (eg, from 80% of the default size to 120% of the default size, or vice versa) is detected ( 16034 ). For example, an input for reducing the simulated physical size of virtual object 11002 is a pinch gesture as described with respect to FIGS. 11N-11P . In response to detecting the request to change the simulated physical size of the virtual object, the device is configured to: in accordance with the gradual change of the simulated physical size of the virtual object from the first simulated physical size to the second simulated physical size of the virtual object, the first user incrementally change the displayed size of the representation of the virtual object within the interface area (eg, the displayed size of the virtual object increases while the displayed size of the physical environment captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras remains unchanged) or shrink), during the gradual change of the displayed size of the representation of the virtual object within the first user interface area, the simulated physical size of the virtual object has reached a predefined simulated physical size (eg, 100% of the default size) In accordance with the determination, the device generates ( 16036 ) a tactile output to indicate that the simulated physical size of the virtual object has reached a predefined simulated physical size. For example, as described with respect to FIGS. 11N-11P , the displayed size of the representation of virtual object 11002 progressively decreases in response to a pinch gesture input. In FIG. 11O , the displayed size of the representation of virtual object 11002 is 100% of the size of virtual object 11002 (eg, within a user interface that includes a field of view 6036 of one or more cameras, as shown in FIG. 11I ). Upon reaching the size of the virtual object 11002 as originally displayed), a tactile output as indicated by 11024 is generated. Generating a tactile output in accordance with a determination that the simulated physical size of the virtual object has reached a predefined simulated physical size may provide feedback to the user indicating that it is not necessary). Providing improved tactile feedback (e.g., by providing sensory information that allows the user to perceive that a predefined simulated physical size of the virtual object has been reached without confusing the user interface with the displayed information) It improves the operability of the device, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the power usage of the device and improving the battery life.

In some embodiments, a default size as a result of a second simulated physical size of the virtual object (eg, a scaling input (eg, a pinch or depinch gesture on the virtual object) that is distinct from the predefined simulated physical size). 120% of the default size, or 80% of the default size) while displaying the virtual object within the first user interface area (eg, AR view), the device detects a request to return the virtual object to a predefined simulated physical size. (eg, detect a tap or double tap input on the touch screen (eg, on the virtual object, or alternatively outside the virtual object)) 16038 .

For example, after a pinch input causes a decrease in the size of virtual object 11002 (as described with respect to FIGS. 11N-11P ), a double tap input causes a virtual object 11002 (as described with respect to FIGS. 11R ). It is detected at a position corresponding to the object 11002 . In response to detecting the request to return the virtual object to the predefined simulated physical size, the device is configured within the first user interface area according to a change of the simulated physical size of the virtual object to the predefined simulated physical size. Change the displayed size of the representation of the virtual object (eg, the displayed size of the virtual object increases or decreases while the displayed size of the physical environment captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras remains unchanged) 16040 ). For example, in response to a double tap input described with respect to FIG. 11R , the size of the virtual object 11002 is the size of the virtual object 11002 (field of view 6036 of one or more cameras) as displayed in FIG. 11I . the size of the virtual object 11002 as originally displayed within the containing user interface). In some embodiments, upon determining that the simulated physical size of the virtual object has reached a predefined simulated physical size (eg, 100% of a default size), the device determines that the simulated physical size of the virtual object is a predefined Produces a tactile output to indicate that the simulated, simulated physical size has been reached. Changing the displayed size of the virtual object to the predefined size in response to detecting a request to return the virtual object to the predefined simulated physical size may include (eg, an input provided to adjust the display size Rather than requiring the user to estimate when an object is sufficient to display at a predefined simulated physical size, by providing the option to fine-tune the displayed size to a predefined simulated physical size) Reduces the number of inputs needed to display in size. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby Reduces power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, the device configures a second orientation (eg, when object placement criteria current position and orientation), wherein selecting the plane indicates that the representation of the virtual object is within the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, as a result of orienting the device in a first direction in the physical environment). When displayed over a first portion of the physical environment being captured (eg, the base of the translucent object overlaps a plane within the first portion of the physical environment), according to a determination that the object placement criteria have been met, the second set of visual attributes a first plane of a plurality of planes detected in the physical environment within the field of view of the one or more cameras as a plane for establishing a second orientation of the representation of the virtual object (eg, a further plane between the first plane on the display and the base of the object) selecting according to the greater proximity and greater proximity between the first plane and the first portion of the physical environment within the physical world; and when the representation of the virtual object was displayed over a second portion of the physical environment that was captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, as a result of the device being oriented in a second direction in the physical environment) (eg, the base of the translucent object is a field of view of the one or more cameras as a plane for establishing a second orientation of a representation of the virtual object having a second set of visual properties upon a determination that the object placement criteria have been met) a second plane of the plurality of planes detected in the physical environment within (eg, greater proximity between the second plane on the display and the base of the object and greater according to proximity), wherein the first portion of the physical environment is distinct from the second portion of the physical environment, and the first plane is distinct from the second plane ( 16042 ). Selecting the first plane or the second plane as the plane on which the virtual object is to be set (eg, without requiring user input to specify which of the many detected planes will be the plane on which the virtual object is set) Reduces the number of inputs needed to select a plane. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby Reduces power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, the device displays the virtual object in the first user interface area (eg, AR view) with the second set of visual properties and the second orientation simultaneously with a snapshot affordance (eg, a camera shutter) button) is displayed (16044). In response to activation of the snapshot affordance, the device generates a snapshot image comprising a current view of the representation of the virtual object at a placement location within the physical environment within the field of view of the one or more cameras, a second set of visual attributes, and one or more Capture 16046, in a second orientation that corresponds to a plane in the physical environment detected within the camera's field of view. Displaying the snapshot affordance for capturing a snapshot image of the current view of the object reduces the number of inputs required to capture a snapshot image of the object. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby Reduces power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, the device exits the AR viewer with one or more control affordances (eg, affordance to switch back to the staging user interface, AR viewer) with the representation of the virtual object having a second set of visual properties within the first user interface area. affordance to exit, affordance to capture a snapshot, etc.) is displayed (16048). For example, in FIG. 11J , a set of controls including a back control 6016 , a toggle control 6018 , and a sharing control 6020 are displayed. While displaying one or more control affordances along with the representation of the virtual object having a second set of visual properties, the device determines that control-fading criteria are met (eg, (eg, movement of the device and field of view of cameras)). Detect (16050) that no user input has been detected on the touch-sensitive surface for a threshold amount of time (with or without an update to ). In response to detecting that the control fading criteria are met, the device provides the one or more control affordances while continuing to display a representation of the virtual object having a second set of visual attributes within a first user interface area that includes a field of view of the one or more cameras. stop displaying them (16052). For example, as described with respect to FIGS. 11K and 11L , the controls 6016 , 6018 , 6020 gradually fade out and stop being displayed when no user input is detected for a threshold time. In some embodiments, after the control affordances fade out, a tap input on the touch-sensitive surface or interaction with the virtual object causes the device to redisplay the control affordances concurrently with the representation of the virtual object in the first user interface area. do. Automatically ceasing to display the controls in response to determining that the control fading criteria are met reduces the number of inputs required to stop displaying the controls. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby Reduces power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, in response to a request to display the virtual object within the first user interface area, before displaying the representation of the virtual object over at least a portion of the field of view of one or more cameras included in the first user interface area (eg, , in accordance with a determination that the calibration criteria are not met (because there are not enough images from different viewing angles to generate dimensional and spatial relational data for the physical environment captured within the field of view of one or more cameras), the device display a prompt to move the device relative to the physical environment (eg, as described in greater detail below with reference to method 17000 , display a visual prompt to move the device, and optionally, a first user interface area Display a calibration user interface object (eg, a bouncy wireframe ball or cube that moves with movement of the device) within (eg, a calibration user interface object on a blurred image of the field of view of one or more cameras) overlaid)) (16054). Displaying a prompt for the user to move the device relative to the physical environment provides visual feedback to the user (eg, indicating that movement of the device is necessary to obtain information for placing a virtual object within the field of view of the camera(s)). provide to Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device (eg, by helping the user provide calibration input) and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition allows the user to use the device more quickly It reduces the power consumption of devices and improves battery life by enabling them to be used efficiently.

It should be understood that the specific order in which the operations in FIGS. 16A-16G are described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations may be performed. Those skilled in the art will recognize various ways of reordering the operations described herein. Additionally, details of other processes described herein in connection with other methods described herein (eg, methods 800 , 900 , 1000 , 17000 , 18000 , 19000 , 20000 ) are provided in FIGS. 16A through 16A . It should be noted that in a manner similar to method 16000 described above with respect to FIG. 16G is also applicable. For example, contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interface regions, fields of view, tactile outputs, movements, and/or animations described above with respect to method 16000 are optionally described herein. Contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interface areas, field of view described herein in connection with other methods described (eg, methods 800, 900, 1000, 17000, 18000, 19000, 20000) fields, tactile outputs, movements, and/or animations. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated here.

17A-17D are flow diagrams illustrating a method 17000 of displaying a calibration user interface object that is dynamically animated in response to movement of one or more cameras of a device. The method 17000 includes a display generating component (eg, a display, a projector, a heads up display, etc.), one or more input devices (eg, a touch-sensitive surface, or a touch that serves as both a display generating component and a touch-sensitive surface). a screen display), one or more cameras (eg, one or more rear-facing cameras on the side of the device opposite the display and touch-sensitive surface), and a pose of a device (eg, relative to the surrounding physical environment) including one or more cameras. Electronic device having one or more attitude sensors (eg, accelerometers, gyroscopes, and/or magnetometers) for detecting changes in orientation (eg, rotation angle, yaw angle, and/or tilt angle) and position) (eg, device 300 of FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device 100 of FIG. 1A ). Some operations in method 17000 are selectively combined and/or the order of some operations is selectively changed.

The device includes a view of a physical environment (eg, a physical environment around the device that includes the one or more cameras) within a first user interface area that includes a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, the field of view captures at least a portion of the physical environment). A request to display an augmented reality view is received ( 17002 ). In some embodiments, the request is a tap input detected on the button to switch from the staging view of the virtual object to the augmented reality view of the virtual object. In some embodiments, the request is a selection of an augmented reality affordance that is displayed following the representation of the virtual object in the two-dimensional user interface. In some embodiments, the request is activation of an augmented reality measurement application (eg, a measurement app that facilitates measurement of the physical environment). For example, the request is a tap input detected at the toggle 6018 to display the virtual object 11002 within the field of view 6036 of one or more cameras, as described with respect to FIG. 12A .

In response to receiving the request to display an augmented reality view of the physical environment, the device displays a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, the device displays a representation of the physical environment within the field of view of the one or more cameras when calibration criteria are not met). Display the blurred shape) (17004). For example, the device displays a blurred representation of the field of view 6036 of one or more cameras, as shown in FIG. 12E-1 . Since there is not enough image data (eg, from different viewing angles) to generate dimensional and spatial relational data for the physical environment (eg, captured within the field of view of one or more cameras), the plane corresponding to the virtual object is Because they are not detected within the field of view of one or more cameras, and/or because there is not enough information to initiate or proceed with plane detection based on image data available from the cameras), the calibration criteria are not included in the augmented reality view of the physical environment. In accordance with a determination that is not satisfied, the device in the physical environment (eg, via the display generating component, and in a first user interface area that includes a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, a blurred form of the field of view)) Displays a calibration user interface object (eg, a scan prompt object such as a bouncy cube or wireframe object) that is dynamically animated according to the movement of one or more cameras of the . For example, in FIGS. 12E-1 to 12I-1 , a calibration user interface object 12014 is displayed. An animation of a calibration user interface object in response to movement of one or more cameras is described, for example, with respect to FIGS. 12E-1 and 12F-1 . In some embodiments, analyzing the field of view of one or more cameras to detect one or more planes (eg, floor, wall, table, etc.) within the field of view of the one or more cameras requires displaying a representation of the augmented reality view. Occurs when the initial part of the input corresponding to is received. In some embodiments, the analysis occurs prior to receiving the request (eg, while the virtual object is displayed in the staging view). Displaying the calibration user interface object may include, while displaying the calibration user interface object, via one or more pose sensors, the pose (eg, position and/or orientation (eg, rotation angle, tilt angle) of the one or more cameras in the physical environment. , yaw angle))), and in response to detecting a change in pose of the one or more cameras in the physical environment, a calibration user interface object according to the detected change in pose of the one or more cameras in the physical environment. adjusting at least one display parameter (eg, orientation, size, rotation, or position on the display) of (eg, a scan prompt object such as a flexible cube or wireframe object). For example, FIGS. 12E-1 and 12F-1 , corresponding to FIGS. 12E-2 and 12F-2, respectively, show lateral movement of device 100 relative to physical environment 5002, and one or more cameras of the device. It illustrates a corresponding change in the displayed field of view 6036 . 12E-2 and 12F-2, calibration user interface object 12014 rotates in response to movement of one or more cameras.

While displaying a calibration user interface object (eg, a scan prompt object such as a flexible cube or wireframe object) that moves on the display in response to a detected change in the pose of one or more cameras in the physical environment, the device determines that the calibration criteria are met. is detected (17006). For example, as described with respect to FIGS. 12E-12J , the device determines that calibration criteria are met in response to movement of the device occurring from FIGS. 12E-1 to 12I-1 .

In response to detecting that the calibration criteria are met, the device stops displaying the calibration user interface object (eg, a scan prompt object, such as a flexible cube or wireframe object) ( 17008 ). In some embodiments, after the device stops displaying the calibration user interface object, the device displays a representation of the cameras' field of view without blurring. In some embodiments, the representation of the virtual object is displayed over the unblurred representation of the cameras' field of view. For example, in FIG. 12J , in response to movement of the device described with respect to FIGS. 12E-1 through 12I-1 , the calibration user interface object 12014 is no longer displayed and the virtual object 11002 is the camera. displayed over the unblurred representation 6036 of the field of view of (s). Adjusting a display parameter of a calibration user interface object in response to movement of one or more cameras (e.g., device cameras that capture the physical environment of the device) provides visual feedback (e.g., indicating that movement of the device is necessary for calibration). provided to the user. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and further enhances the user-device interface (eg, by helping the user move the device in a manner that provides the information needed to meet calibration criteria). efficient, which additionally reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the request to display an augmented reality view of the physical environment (eg, the physical environment surrounding the device including the one or more cameras) within a first user interface area that includes a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras is the physical environment and a request to display a representation of the virtual three-dimensional object (eg, a virtual object having a three-dimensional model) within the augmented reality view of ( 17010 ). In some embodiments, the request is a tap input detected on the button to switch from the staging view of the virtual object to the augmented reality view of the virtual object. In some embodiments, the request is a selection of an augmented reality affordance that is displayed following the representation of the virtual object in the two-dimensional user interface. For example, in FIG. 12A , input by contact 12002 at a location corresponding to toggle control 6018 is a virtual object within a user interface that includes a field of view 6036 of the cameras, as shown in FIG. 12B . It is a request to display 11002. Displaying the augmented reality view of the physical environment in response to a request to display the virtual object within the augmented reality view reduces the number of inputs required (eg, to display both the view of the physical environment and the virtual object). Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an operation improves the operability of the device (eg, by helping the user provide a calibration input) and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition allows the user to use the device It reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling faster and more efficient use.

In some embodiments, after the device stops displaying the calibration user interface object, the device displays a representation of the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area that includes a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, when calibration criteria have been met). After) display (17012). In some embodiments, in response to the request, after calibration is complete and the camera's field of view is displayed fully clear, the virtual object is placed in an identified predefined plane (eg, a three-dimensional representation of the virtual object) in the field of view of one or more cameras. falls at a predefined location and/or orientation relative to a physical surface such as a vertical wall or horizontal floor surface that may serve as a support plane for For example, in FIG. 12J , the device has ceased to display the calibration user interface object 12014 that was displayed in FIGS. 12E-12I , and the virtual object 11002 is within the user interface including the field of view 6036 of the cameras. is displayed. Displaying the virtual object within the displayed augmented reality view after stopping displaying the calibration user interface object provides visual feedback (eg, to indicate that calibration criteria have been met). Providing the user with improved visual feedback may improve the operability of the device (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs before calibration criteria are met and avoiding attempts to provide input to manipulate the virtual object). and make the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the device displays a representation of the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area concurrently with the calibration user interface object (eg, after the calibration user interface object) (eg, before calibration criteria are met), wherein the virtual The representation of the three-dimensional object is at a fixed position within the first user interface area during movement of one or more cameras in the physical environment (eg, while the calibration user interface object is moved within the first user interface area in response to movement of the one or more cameras). (eg, the virtual three-dimensional object is not placed at a location within the physical environment) 17014 . For example, in FIGS. 12E-1 through 12I-1 , the representation of the virtual object 1102 is displayed concurrently with the calibration user interface object 12014 . As device 100 including one or more cameras moves (eg, as illustrated in FIGS. 12E-1 and 12F-1 and corresponding FIGS. 12E-2 and 12F-2), virtual object 1102 is maintained in a fixed position within the user interface including the field of view 6036 of one or more cameras. Displaying the virtual object concurrently with the calibration user interface object provides visual feedback (eg, to indicate the object on which calibration is being performed). Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device (e.g., by helping the user provide a calibration input corresponding to the plane on which the virtual object is to be placed) and makes the user-device interface more efficient; This additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the request to display an augmented reality view of the physical environment (eg, the physical environment surrounding the device including the one or more cameras) within a first user interface area that includes a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras may include the one or more cameras. Without requesting display of a representation of any virtual three-dimensional object (eg, a virtual object having a three-dimensional model) in the physical environment that is captured within the field of view of the cameras (eg, one or more user interface objects and/or controls ( and a request to display ( 17016 ) a representation of the field of view of one or more cameras (eg, with outlines of planes, objects, pointers, icons, markers, etc.). In some embodiments, the request is a selection of an augmented reality affordance that is displayed following the representation of the virtual object in the two-dimensional user interface. In some embodiments, the request is activation of an augmented reality measurement application (eg, a measurement app that facilitates measurement of the physical environment). Requesting to display a representation of the field of view of one or more cameras without requesting display of a representation of any virtual three-dimensional object (e.g., to indicate that a virtual object needs calibration whether or not the virtual object is displayed is displayed by the same calibration user). by using interface objects) to provide feedback. Providing improved feedback to the user improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, in response to receiving a request to display an augmented reality view of the physical environment, the device displays a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, the field of view of the one or more cameras when calibration criteria are not met) displaying a blurred shape of the physical environment within); Because there is sufficient amount of image data (eg, from different viewing angles) to generate dimensional and spatial relational data for the physical environment (eg, captured within the field of view of one or more cameras), the plane corresponding to the virtual object is Because they have been detected within the field of view of one or more cameras, and/or because there is sufficient information to initiate or proceed with plane detection based on image data available from the cameras) the calibration criteria are applied to the augmented reality view of the physical environment. Upon determining that it is satisfied, the device suspends display of the calibration user interface object (eg, a scan prompt object such as a flexible cube or wireframe object) ( 17018 ). In some embodiments, scanning of the physical environment for planes is initiated while a virtual three-dimensional object is displayed within the staging user interface, which causes the device (eg, the field of view of the cameras to detect one or more planes in physical space). In some circumstances (which has moved sufficiently to provide sufficient data to do so), it may be possible to detect one or more planes in physical space prior to displaying the augmented reality view, so that the calibration user interface does not need to be displayed. Withholding display of a calibration user interface object in accordance with a determination that the calibration criteria are met for the augmented reality view of the physical environment (eg, that the absence of a calibration user interface object indicates that the calibration criteria have been met and that movement of the device is required for calibration provide visual feedback to the user indicating that it is not Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device (e.g., by helping the user avoid moving the device unnecessarily for calibration purposes) and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which Additionally, it reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the device concurrently with a calibration user interface object (eg, following a calibration user interface object) that provides information regarding actions that may be taken by the user to improve calibration of the augmented reality view. 1 Insert a text object (eg, a text description that describes the currently detected error condition and/or a text prompt requesting a user action (eg, to correct the detected error condition)) within the user interface area (eg, the calibration criteria are before being satisfied) display (17020). In some embodiments, the text object provides a prompt for movement of the device, such as "excessive movement", "low detail", "move closer", etc. (eg, the current along with the detected error status) to the user. In some embodiments, the device updates the text object according to the user's actions during the calibration process and new error conditions detected based on the user's actions. Displaying text concurrently with the calibration user interface object provides visual feedback to the user (eg, providing a verbal indication of the type of movement required for calibration). Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating and/or interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally enables users to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting that calibration criteria are met (eg, that the criteria are met before the calibration user interface object is even displayed, or that the criteria are met after the calibration user interface object is displayed and animated for a period of time) Thus, the device displays a visual representation of a plane detected in the physical environment captured within the field of view of one or more cameras (eg, after stopping displaying the calibration user interface object if the calibration user interface object was initially displayed). (eg, display a contour around the detected plane, or highlight the detected plane) 17022 . For example, in FIG. 12J , a plane (floor surface 5038 ) is highlighted to indicate that the plane was detected in the physical environment 5002 as captured within the displayed field of view 6036 of one or more cameras. Displaying a visual indication of the detected plane provides visual feedback (eg, indicating that a plane was detected in the physical environment captured by the device camera(s)). Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating/interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally enables users to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life.

In some embodiments, in response to receiving a request to display an augmented reality view of the physical environment, in accordance with a determination that the calibration criteria are not met and prior to displaying the calibration user interface object, the device (eg, a display creation component An animated prompt object (eg, a representation of a device moving through and with respect to a representation of a plane) in a first user interface area that includes a representation of the field of view (eg, a blurred form of the field of view) of one or more cameras. , a scan prompt object, such as a bouncy cube or wireframe object) (eg, movement of the representation of the device relative to the representation of the plane indicates a desired movement of the device to be made by the user) 17024 . For example, the animated prompt object includes a representation 12004 of the device 100 moving relative to a representation 12010 of a plane, as described with respect to FIGS. 12B-12D . In some embodiments, the device stops displaying the animated prompt object when the device detects movement of the device (eg, indicating that the user has begun moving the device in a manner that will enable the calibration to proceed) ). In some embodiments, the device replaces the display of the animated prompt object with a calibration user interface object when the device detects movement of the device and before calibration is complete to further guide the user regarding calibration of the device. do. For example, as described in connection with FIGS. 12C-12E , when movement of the device is detected (as shown in FIGS. 12C and 12D ), an animation comprising a representation 12004 of device 100 . The displayed prompt stops being displayed, and the calibration user interface object 12014 is displayed in FIG. 12E . Displaying an animated prompt object that includes a representation of the device moving relative to the representation of the plane provides visual feedback to the user (eg, illustrating the type of motion of the device needed for calibration). Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and further enhances the user-device interface (eg, by helping the user move the device in a manner that provides the information needed to meet calibration criteria). efficient, which additionally reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, adjusting the at least one display parameter of the calibration user interface object according to the detected change in pose of the one or more cameras in the physical environment is dependent on a first magnitude of movement of the one or more cameras in the physical environment. moving the calibration user interface object according to the first amount; and moving the calibration user interface object by a second amount according to a second magnitude of movement of the one or more cameras in the physical environment, wherein the first amount is distinct from (eg, greater than the second amount) the second amount; The first magnitude of movement is distinct from (eg, greater than the second magnitude of) a second magnitude of movement (eg, the first and second magnitudes of movement are measured based on movement in the same direction in the physical environment) (17026). Moving the calibration user interface object by an amount corresponding to the magnitude of the movement of the one or more (device) cameras may result in visual feedback (eg, indicating to the user that the movement of the calibration user interface object is a guide to movement of the device required for calibration). provides Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating and/or interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally enables users to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life.

In some embodiments, adjusting the at least one display parameter of the calibration user interface object according to the detected change in the pose of the one or more cameras in the physical environment comprises: the detected change in the pose of the one or more cameras of the first type Determining that it corresponds to a movement (eg, a left-to-right movement, such as a leftward, rightward, or back-and-forth movement) (and does not correspond to a second type of movement (eg, a vertical movement such as an upward, downward, or up-and-down movement)) to move a calibration user interface object based on a first type of movement (e.g., moving a calibration user interface object in a first manner (e.g., a calibration user about a vertical axis passing through the calibration user interface object); to rotate the interface object)); and in accordance with a determination that the detected change in pose of the one or more cameras corresponds to (and does not correspond to) the second type of movement, moving the calibration user interface object based on the second type of movement. withholding (eg, withholding moving the calibration user interface object in the first manner or keeping the calibration user interface object stationary) ( 17028 ). For example, lateral movement of device 100 including one or more cameras (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 12F-1 and 12G-1 and FIGS. 12F-2 and 12G-2) is calibrated. Vertical movement of device 100 (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 12G-1 and 12H-1 , and FIGS. 12G-2 and 12H-2 ) while causing user interface object 12014 to rotate does not cause the calibration user interface object 12014 to rotate. Withholding movement of the calibration user interface object in accordance with a determination that the detected change in pose of the device camera(s) corresponds to a second type of movement (eg, a second type of movement of one or more cameras is not required for calibration) provide visual feedback that indicates to the user that it is not. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device (eg, by helping the user avoid providing unnecessary input) and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition allows the user to It reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling faster and more efficient use of the device.

In some embodiments, adjusting the at least one display parameter of the calibration user interface object according to the detected change in the pose of the one or more cameras in the physical environment comprises: a characteristic display position of the calibration user interface object over the first user interface area. moving (eg, rotating and/or rotating a calibration user interface object according to a detected change in the pose of one or more cameras in the physical environment without changing (eg, the position of the geometric center or axis of the calibration user interface object on the display) tilting (eg, the calibration user interface object is fixed in a fixed position on the display, while the physical environment moves within the field of view of one or more cameras below the calibration user interface object) 17030 . For example, in FIGS. 12E-1 through 12I-1 , the calibration user interface object 12014 rotates while remaining in a fixed position relative to the display 112 . Moving the calibration user interface object without changing the characteristic display position of the calibration user interface object (eg, indicating that the calibration user interface object is distinct from a virtual object positioned relative to the displayed augmented reality environment) is a visual feedback provides Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs and reducing user input mistakes), which Additionally, it reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, adjusting the at least one display parameter of the calibration user interface object according to the detected change in the pose of the one or more cameras in the physical environment comprises an axis perpendicular to the direction of movement of the one or more cameras in the physical environment. Rotating the calibration user interface object about the center (e.g., the calibration user interface object rotates about the z-axis as the device (e.g., including cameras) moves back and forth on the x-y plane), or the calibration user interface object ( When a device (eg, including cameras) moves left and right along the x-axis, it rotates about the y-axis (eg, the x-axis is, for example, defined as a horizontal direction with respect to the physical environment and is within the plane of the touch screen display. placed)) (17032). For example, in FIGS. 12E-1 to 12G-1 , the calibration user interface object 12014 rotates about a vertical axis perpendicular to the left-right movement of the device shown in FIGS. 12E-2 to 12G-2 . Rotating the calibration user interface object about an axis perpendicular to the movement of the device camera(s) provides visual feedback (e.g., indicating to the user that the movement of the calibration user interface object is a guide to movement of the device required for calibration). do. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating and/or interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally enables users to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life.

In some embodiments, adjusting the at least one display parameter of the calibration user interface object according to the detected change in the pose of the one or more cameras in the physical environment comprises: a rate of change detected within the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, , moving the calibration user interface object at a speed determined according to the moving speed of the physical environment (17034). Moving the calibration user interface object at a rate determined according to a change in the pose of the device camera(s) provides visual feedback (eg, indicating to the user that the movement of the calibration user interface object is a guide to movement of the device required for calibration). provides Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating and/or interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally enables users to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life.

In some embodiments, adjusting the at least one display parameter of the calibration user interface object according to the detected change in the pose of the one or more cameras in the physical environment comprises: a change detected within the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, physical moving the calibration user interface object in a direction determined by the direction of the movement speed of the environment (eg, the device rotates the calibration user interface object clockwise for movement of the device from right to left and from the left Either rotate the calibration user interface object counterclockwise for movement of the device to the right, or the device rotates the calibration user interface object counterclockwise for movement of the device from right to left and rotates the calibration user interface object counterclockwise for movement of the device from right to left Rotate the calibration user interface object clockwise with respect to movement of the device (17036). Moving the calibration user interface object in a direction determined by a change in the pose of the device camera(s) may provide visual feedback (eg, indicating to the user that the movement of the calibration user interface object is a guide to movement of the device required for calibration). provides Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and reduces user errors (eg, by helping the user provide appropriate inputs when operating and/or interacting with the device) and user-device interface. more efficient, which additionally enables users to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life.

It should be understood that the specific order in which the operations in FIGS. 17A-17D are described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations may be performed. Those skilled in the art will recognize various ways of reordering the operations described herein. Additionally, details of other processes described herein in connection with other methods described herein (eg, methods 800 , 900 , 1000 , 16000 , 18000 , 19000 , 20000 ) are shown in FIGS. It should be noted that in a manner similar to method 17000 described above with respect to FIG. 17D is also applicable. For example, contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interface regions, fields of view, tactile outputs, movements, and/or animations described above with respect to method 17000 are optionally described herein. Contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interface areas, field of view described herein in connection with other methods described (eg, methods 800, 900, 1000, 16000, 18000, 19000, 20000) fields, tactile outputs, movements, and/or animations. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated here.

18A-18I are flow diagrams illustrating a method 18000 of constraining rotation of a virtual object about an axis. The method 18000 includes a display generating component (eg, a display, a projector, a heads up display, etc.), one or more input devices (eg, a touch-sensitive surface, or a touch that serves as both a display generating component and a touch-sensitive surface). a screen display), one or more cameras (eg, one or more rear-facing cameras on the side of the device opposite the display and touch-sensitive surface), and a pose of a device (eg, relative to the surrounding physical environment) including one or more cameras. Electronic device having one or more attitude sensors (eg, accelerometers, gyroscopes, and/or magnetometers) for detecting changes in orientation (eg, rotation angle, yaw angle, and/or tilt angle) and position) (eg, device 300 of FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device 100 of FIG. 1A ). Some operations in method 18000 are selectively combined and/or the order of some operations is selectively changed.

The device, by the display creation component, displays ( 18002 ) a representation of the first viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object within a first user interface area (eg, a staging user interface or an augmented reality user interface). For example, virtual object 11002 is shown in staging user interface 6010 , as shown in FIG. 13B .

While displaying the representation of the first viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area on the display, the device is configured to display a portion of the virtual three-dimensional object that is not visible from the first viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object. A first input (eg, on a touch-sensitive surface (eg, one finger or two A swipe input (by finger contacts), or a pivot input (eg, two-finger rotation, or one finger contact pivots about another finger contact) is detected ( 18004 ). For example, the request is an input as described with respect to FIGS. 13B and 13C or an input as described with respect to FIGS. 13E and 13F .

In response to detecting the first input, the first input is three-dimensional about a first axis (eg, a first axis that is horizontally parallel to a plane (eg, an x-y plane) of the display, eg, an x-axis). Upon determining that it corresponds to a request to rotate the object, the device determines the vertical axis (eg, the y-axis) of the magnitude of the first input (eg, the touch-sensitive surface (eg, the corresponding x-y plane to the x-y plane of the display)). ) by an amount determined based on the speed and/or distance of the swipe input along Rotate the three-dimensional object about a first axis (eg, rotation about the first axis is limited to a range of +/-30 degrees angle about the first axis, beyond which rotation is the magnitude of the first input is prohibited regardless) (18006). For example, as described with respect to FIGS. 13E-13G , the rotation of the virtual object 11002 is constrained by a limit. the first input instructs the three-dimensional object to rotate about a second axis different from the first axis (eg, a second axis, eg, y-axis, perpendicular to and parallel to the plane of the display (eg, the x-y plane)). Upon determining that it corresponds to the request, the device swipe along the horizontal axis (eg, the x-axis) of the magnitude of the first input (eg, the touch-sensitive surface (eg, the corresponding x-y plane to the x-y plane of the display)). rotates the virtual three-dimensional object about a second axis by an amount determined based on the speed and/or distance of the input; Rotate the virtual 3D object with respect to In some embodiments, for rotation about a second axis, the device imposes a constraint on rotation that is greater than the constraint on rotation about the first axis (eg, a three-dimensional object is 60 degrees instead of 30 degrees) allowed to rotate). In some embodiments, for rotation about a second axis, the device imposes no constraint on rotation, allowing the three-dimensional object to rotate freely about the second axis (eg, movement of one or more contacts). For inputs with sufficiently large dimensions, such as fast or long swipe inputs that include For example, in response to the input described with respect to FIGS. 13E-13G , the amount of rotation of the virtual object 11002 about the x-axis is greater than the amount of rotation of the virtual object 11002 with respect to FIGS. 13B and 13C . Occurs around the y-axis in response to a described input. Depending on whether the input is a request to rotate the object about a first axis or a request to rotate it about a second axis, determining whether to rotate an object by an amount constrained by a threshold amount or to rotate an object by more than a threshold amount is different. Improves the ability to control types of rotational motions. Providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional controls displayed improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient.

In some embodiments, in response to detecting the first input, the first input is a first of a contact across the touch-sensitive surface in a first direction (eg, a y-direction, a direction perpendicular to the touch-sensitive surface). In accordance with a determination that comprises movement and that the first movement of the contact in a first direction meets first criteria for rotating the representation of the virtual object about a first axis - the first criteria are for the first criteria to be satisfied including a requirement that the first input comprises movement in a first direction greater than a first threshold amount (eg, the device is moved about the first axis until the device detects movement in the first direction greater than the first threshold amount). does not initiate rotation of the three-dimensional object), the device determines that the first input is three-dimensional about a first axis (eg, the x-axis, a horizontal axis parallel to the display, or a horizontal axis passing through the virtual object). determine to respond to the request to rotate the object; that the first input comprises a second movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface in a second direction (eg, an x-direction, a horizontal direction on the touch-sensitive surface) and that the second movement of the contact in the second direction in accordance with a determination that second criteria are met for rotating the representation of the virtual object about a second axis, wherein the second criteria cause the first input to cause movement in the second direction by more than a second threshold amount for the second criteria to be satisfied. includes a requirement that includes (eg, the device does not initiate rotation of the three-dimensional object about the second axis until the device detects movement in the second direction greater than a second threshold amount), the device Determine that one input corresponds to a request to rotate the three-dimensional object about a second axis (eg, a vertical axis parallel to the display, or a vertical axis passing through the virtual object), the first threshold being the second threshold greater than (eg, the user swipes in a horizontal direction to trigger rotation about a vertical axis (eg, to rotate an object)) to trigger rotation about a horizontal axis (eg, relative to the user). It is necessary to swipe in the vertical direction by a larger amount (to tilt the object forward or backward) (18008). Depending on whether the input is a request to rotate the object about a first axis or a request to rotate about a second axis, determining whether to rotate an object by an amount constrained by a threshold amount or to rotate an object by more than a threshold amount Improves the ability to control different types of rotation operations in response to input corresponding to a request to rotate an object. Providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional controls displayed improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient.

In some embodiments, the rotation of the virtual three-dimensional object about a first axis is a function value of a first input parameter of the first input (eg, a swipe distance, or a swipe speed) and a virtual 3 about the first axis. occurs with a first degree of correspondence between the amount of rotation applied to the dimensional object, and wherein the rotation of the virtual three-dimensional object about a second axis is a characteristic value of the first input parameter of the second input gesture (eg, the a second degree of correspondence between the swipe distance, or swipe speed) and the amount of rotation applied to the virtual three-dimensional object about the second axis occurs, the first degree of correspondence being more virtual for the first input parameter than the second degree of correspondence involves a smaller rotation of the three-dimensional object (eg, rotation about a first axis has greater friction or jamming than rotation about a second axis) ( 18010 ). For example, a first amount of rotation of virtual object 11002 is a swipe with swipe distance d ₁ for rotation about the y-axis (as described with respect to FIGS. 13B and 13C ). A second amount of rotation of the virtual object 11002 that occurs in response to the input and is less than the first amount of rotation is swipe, for rotation about the x-axis (as described with respect to FIGS. 13E-13G ). Occurs in response to a swipe input with distance d ₁ . Depending on whether the input is a request to rotate the object about a first axis or a request to rotate the object about a second axis, rotating the virtual object in response to the input to a greater or lesser degree rotates the object. Improves the ability to control different types of rotational motions in response to input corresponding to a request to do so. Providing additional control options without cluttering the user interface with additional controls displayed improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient.

In some embodiments, the device detects an end of the first input (eg, the input comprises movement of one or more contacts on the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting the end of the first input is from the touch-sensitive surface) detecting liftoff of one or more contacts) (18012). After detecting (eg, in response to) the end of the first input, the device based on the magnitude of the first input before detecting the end of the input (eg, based on the speed of movement of the contact just prior to liftoff of the contact) ) continue to rotate the three-dimensional object, which, in accordance with a determination that the three-dimensional object is rotating about the first axis, is rotated about the first axis by a first amount proportional to the magnitude of the rotation of the three-dimensional object about the first axis. slowing the rotation of the object with respect to (eg, slowing the rotation of the three-dimensional object about the first axis based on a first simulated physical parameter, such as simulated friction having a first coefficient of friction); and in response to determining that the three-dimensional object is rotating about the second axis, slowing the rotation of the object about the second axis by a second amount proportional to the magnitude of the rotation of the three-dimensional object about the second axis (eg, , slowing the rotation of the three-dimensional object about a second axis based on a second simulated physical parameter, such as simulated friction having a second coefficient of friction less than the first coefficient of friction, wherein the second amount is different from the first amount (18014). For example, in FIGS. 13C and 13D , virtual object 11002 continues to rotate after liftoff of contact 13002 that caused rotation of virtual object 11002 as described with respect to FIGS. 13B and 13C . In some embodiments, the second amount is greater than the first amount. In some embodiments, the second amount is less than the first amount. Slowing the rotation of the virtual object by a first amount or a second amount after detecting the end of the input, depending on whether the input is a request to rotate the object about a first axis or a second axis provides visual feedback indicating that rotational motions are applied to the virtual object differently for rotation about a first axis and a second axis. Providing the user with improved visual feedback helps the user to provide appropriate inputs (eg, prior to placement of the object in a second orientation corresponding to the plane) and avoid attempts to provide input for manipulating the virtual object. ) improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the device detects an end of the first input (eg, the input comprises movement of one or more contacts on the touch-sensitive surface, and detecting the end of the first input is from the touch-sensitive surface) detecting liftoff of one or more contacts) (18016). After detecting (eg, in response to) end of the first input, in accordance with a determination that the three-dimensional object has been rotated about the first axis beyond the respective rotation threshold, the device rotates the three-dimensional object about the first axis reversing at least a portion of; Upon determining that the three-dimensional object has not been rotated about the first axis beyond the respective rotation threshold, the device withholds reversing the rotation of the three-dimensional object about the first axis ( 18018 ). (e.g., stopping rotation of the three-dimensional object about the first axis and/or of the three-dimensional object about the first axis in the direction of motion of the input by a magnitude determined by the magnitude of the input prior to detecting the end of the input. to continue rotating). For example, as described with respect to FIGS. 13E-13G , after virtual object 11002 rotates beyond a rotation threshold, as illustrated by FIGS. 13G and 13H , rotation of virtual object 11002 . is reversed In some embodiments, the amount of reversal of rotation of the three-dimensional object is determined based on how far the three-dimensional object has rotated beyond the respective rotation threshold (eg, the rotation of the three-dimensional object rotates beyond the respective rotation threshold). 3 by a greater amount about the first axis if the amount by which the rotation of the three-dimensional object rotates beyond the respective rotation threshold is greater compared to the smaller amount that reverses the rotation about the first axis if the amount is smaller The rotation of the dimension object is reversed). In some embodiments, the reversal of rotation is driven by a simulated physical parameter, such as an elastic effect pulling with greater force, and further the three-dimensional object is rotated about a first axis beyond a respective rotation threshold. In some embodiments, the reversal of rotation is with a direction of rotation determined based on a direction of rotation about a first axis rotated beyond a respective rotation threshold (eg, a three-dimensional object is rotated so that the top of the object is displayed If moved backwards inward, reversal of rotation is to rotate the top of the object forward out of the display; and/or if the object has been rotated such that the top of the three-dimensional object is rotated forward out of display, reversal of rotation is rotate the top back into the display and/or if the three-dimensional object has been rotated so that the right side of the object has moved back into the display, reversing the rotation rotates the right side of the object forwardly out of the display; If the object has been rotated such that the left side of the three-dimensional object is rotated forward out of the display, then reversing the rotation is rotating the left side of the object back into the display). In some embodiments, similar rubberbanding (eg, conditional reversal of rotation) occurs in rotation about the second axis, for example when rotation about the second axis is constrained to a respective range of angles. is performed for In some embodiments, for example, when rotation about a second axis is not constrained to cause a three-dimensional object to rotate 360 degrees by the device (eg, the device sets a rotation threshold for rotation about the second axis) No rubber banding is performed for rotation about the second axis. Either reverse at least a portion of the rotation of the three-dimensional object about the first axis, or reverse the portion of the rotation of the three-dimensional object about the first axis after detecting the end of the input, depending on whether the object has been rotated beyond the rotation threshold. Pending reversing provides visual feedback indicating the rotation threshold applicable to the rotation of the virtual object. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and further enhances the user-device interface (eg, by helping the user avoid attempts to provide input to rotate the virtual object beyond a rotation threshold). efficient, which additionally reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the first input is about a third axis different from the first axis and the second axis (eg, a third axis perpendicular to the plane of the display (eg, the x-y plane), such as the z-axis). Upon determining that it corresponds to a request to rotate the three-dimensional object, the device withholds rotating the virtual three-dimensional object about a third axis (eg, rotation about the z-axis is prohibited, and the device about the The request to rotate the object with , is ignored by the device) (18020). In some embodiments, the device provides an alert (eg, a tactile output indicating failure of the input). Suspending rotation of the virtual object in accordance with a determination that the rotation input corresponds to a request to rotate the virtual object about a third axis provides visual feedback indicating that rotation about the third axis is limited. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and enhances the user-device interface (eg, by helping the user avoid attempts to provide input to rotate the virtual object about a third axis). making it more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the device displays a representation of a shadow cast by the virtual three-dimensional object while displaying a representation of the first viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object within a first user interface area (eg, a staging user interface). 18022). The device changes the shape of the representation of the shadow according to the rotation of the virtual three-dimensional object about the first axis and/or the second axis. For example, the shape of the shadow 13006 of the virtual object 11002 changes from FIG. 13B to FIG. 13F as the virtual object 11002 rotates. In some embodiments, the shadow is shifted and changed in shape to indicate the current orientation of the virtual object with respect to the invisible reference plane in the staging user interface supporting the predefined lower face of the virtual object. In some embodiments, the surface of the virtual three-dimensional object appears to reflect light from a simulated light source positioned in a predefined direction within the virtual space presented in the staging user interface. Varying the shape of the shadow according to the rotation of the virtual object provides visual feedback (eg, indicative of the virtual plane (eg, the stage of the staging view) in which the virtual object is oriented). Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device (eg, by helping the user determine an appropriate direction for a swipe input to cause rotation about a first axis or a second axis). and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, while rotating the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area, upon determining that the virtual three-dimensional object is displayed with a second viewpoint revealing a predefined underside of the virtual three-dimensional object, the device: Withholds displaying the representation of the shadow as the representation of the second viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object (18024). For example, the device does not display a shadow of the virtual object when the virtual object is being viewed from below (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 13G-13I ). Suspension of display of the virtual object's shadow in accordance with a determination that the underside of the virtual object is displayed (eg, indicating that the object has been rotated to a position that no longer corresponds to the virtual plane (eg, the stage of the staging view)) provide feedback. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby enabling the device's power usage. reduce and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, after rotating the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area (eg, staging view), the device provides a second input corresponding to a request to reset the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area. (eg, the second input is a double tap on the first user interface area) is detected (18026). In response to detecting the second input, the device configures a predefined original viewpoint (eg, a first viewpoint, or (eg, the first viewpoint within the staging user interface) of the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area. displays (eg, via rotation and resizing of the virtual object) a representation (eg, via rotation and resizing of the virtual object) (eg, in response to a double tap, the device Reset the orientation of the virtual object to a predefined original orientation (eg, upright, with the front face facing the user and the lower face seated on a predefined reference plane) 18028 . For example, FIGS. 13I and 13J show a view of the virtual object 11002 shown in FIG. 13A from a viewpoint at which the viewpoint of the virtual object 11002 has changed (as a result of the rotation input described with respect to FIGS. 13B-13G ). Illustrated an input that causes a change to the original viewpoint of FIG. 13j (same as viewpoint). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the second input corresponding to the instruction to reset the virtual three-dimensional object, the device also resizes the virtual three-dimensional object to reflect a default display size of the virtual three-dimensional object. . In some embodiments, the double tap input resets both the orientation and size of the virtual object in the staging user interface, while the double tap input only resets the size and not the orientation of the virtual object in the augmented reality user interface. In some embodiments, the device requires a double tap on the virtual object to re-size the virtual object in the augmented reality user interface, while the device requires double taps detected on the virtual object and double taps detected around the virtual object Resets the orientation and size of the virtual object in response to taps. In the augmented reality view, a single finger swipe drags the virtual object rather than rotating it (eg, unlike in the staging view). Displaying a predefined original viewpoint of the virtual object in response to detecting the request to reset the virtual object (eg, input provided to adjust properties of the object causes the object to return to the original predefined viewpoint) It improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient (by providing an option to reset objects rather than requiring the user to estimate when). Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an operation improves the operability of a device, which additionally enables a user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life. make it

In some embodiments, while displaying the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area (eg, the staging user interface), the device detects a third input corresponding to a request to resize the virtual three-dimensional object (eg, , the third input is a pinch or de-pinch gesture with respect to the virtual object presented on the first user interface area, and the third input is a criterion for initiating a resizing operation (eg, (see below with reference to method 19000 ) (18030). In response to detecting the third input, the device resizes ( 18032 ) the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area according to the size of the input. For example, in response to an input comprising a de-pinch gesture (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 6N and 6O ), the size of the virtual object 11002 is reduced. In some embodiments, the device displays an indicator to indicate the current zoom level of the virtual object when the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object is resized. In some embodiments, the device stops displaying the indicator of the zoom level at the end of the third input. Resizing a virtual object according to the size of an input for resizing the object improves the operability of the device (eg, by providing an option to resize the object by a desired amount). Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an operation improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables a user to use the device more quickly and efficiently by reduce power consumption and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, while resizing the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area (eg, the staging user interface), the device determines that the size of the virtual three-dimensional object is the predefined default value of the virtual three-dimensional object. It is detected that the display size has been reached (18034). In response to detecting that the size of the virtual three-dimensional object has reached a predefined default display size of the virtual three-dimensional object, the device causes a tactile sense to indicate that the virtual three-dimensional object is displayed at the predefined default display size. An output (eg, a separate tactile output) is generated ( 18036 ). 11O is provided in response to detecting that the size of virtual object 11002 has reached a previously predefined size of virtual object 11002 (eg, as described in connection with FIGS. 11M-11O ). An example of a tactile output 11024 is provided. In some embodiments, the device generates the same tactile output when the size of the virtual object is reset to the default display size in response to a double tap input. Generating a tactile output in accordance with a determination that the size of the virtual object has reached a predefined default display size (e.g., that no additional input is required to return the simulated size of the virtual object to the predefined size) to provide feedback to the user. Providing improved tactile feedback (e.g., by providing sensory information that makes the user aware that a predefined simulated physical size of the virtual object has been reached without confusing the user interface with the displayed information) It improves the operability of the device, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the power usage of the device and improving the battery life.

In some embodiments, a visual indication of the zoom level (eg, a slider indicating a value corresponding to the current zoom level) is displayed within the first user interface area (eg, the staging user interface). As the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object is resized, the visual indication of the zoom level is adjusted according to the adjusted size of the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object.

In some embodiments, while displaying a representation of a third viewpoint of a virtual three-dimensional object within a first user interface area (eg, a staging user interface), the device may use one or more cameras (eg, cameras embedded within the device). Detects ( 18042 ) a fourth input corresponding to a request to display a virtual three-dimensional object in a second user interface area (eg, augmented reality user interface) including a field of view of . In response to detecting the fourth input, the device, via the display creation component, displays a representation of the virtual object over at least a portion of the field of view of the one or more cameras included in the second user interface area (eg, of the one or more cameras). The field of view is displayed in response to a request to display the virtual object within the second user interface area), the field of view of the one or more cameras is a view of the physical environment in which the one or more cameras are located ( 18044 ). Displaying the representation of the virtual object includes moving the virtual three-dimensional object at a predefined angle about a first axis (eg, an axis horizontally parallel to the plane of the display (eg, the x-y plane), such as the x-axis). rotating (eg, at a default yaw angle such as 0 degrees; or at an angle that is aligned with (eg, parallel to) a plane detected in the physical environment being captured within the field of view of one or more cameras). In some embodiments, the device displays an animation in which the three-dimensional object gradually rotates at a predefined angle with respect to the first axis. Maintaining the current angle of the virtual three-dimensional object with respect to a second axis (eg, an axis perpendicular to the plane of the display (eg, the x-y plane), such as the y-axis). Pre-position the virtual object about a first axis in response to a request to display the virtual object within the field of view of one or more cameras (eg, without requiring additional input to reposition the virtual object to a predefined orientation relative to the plane). Rotating to a defined angle improves the operability of the device. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an operation improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables a user to use the device more quickly and efficiently by reduce power consumption and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, while displaying a representation of a fourth viewpoint of a virtual three-dimensional object within a first user interface area (eg, a staging user interface), the device is a two-dimensional user comprising a two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object. A fifth input corresponding to the request to return to the interface is detected (18046). In response to detecting the fifth input, the device renders the virtual three-dimensional object (eg, a two-dimensional user interface and a virtual three-dimensional before displaying the two-dimensional representation of the object); After the virtual three-dimensional object is rotated to show a representation of each viewpoint corresponding to the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object, the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object is displayed (18048). In some embodiments, the device displays an animation in which the three-dimensional object gradually rotates to show a representation of the viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object corresponding to the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object. In some embodiments, the device also resizes the virtual three-dimensional object during or after rotation to match the size of the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object displayed within the two-dimensional user interface. In some embodiments, a transition is displayed that is animated to show a rotated virtual three-dimensional object that moves toward and settles at a location of a two-dimensional representation (eg, a thumbnail image of a virtual object) within a two-dimensional user interface. do. Rotating the virtual three-dimensional object to a viewpoint corresponding to the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object in response to input to return to displaying the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object (eg, when the displayed object is two-dimensional) to provide visual feedback). Providing the user with improved visual feedback (eg, by helping the user to provide appropriate inputs and avoid attempting to provide input for rotating the two-dimensional object along an axis for which rotation of the two-dimensional object is unavailable) It improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which further reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, prior to displaying the representation of the first view of the virtual three-dimensional object, the device is configured to display a representation of the view of the virtual three-dimensional object from each viewpoint (eg, a two-dimensional image corresponding to the virtual three-dimensional object and A user interface including a representation (eg, a thumbnail or an icon) of a virtual 3D object including a static representation (such as a static representation) is displayed ( 18050 ). While displaying the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object, the device detects ( 18052 ) a request to display the virtual three-dimensional object (eg, a tap input or other selection input for the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object). In response to detecting the request to display the virtual three-dimensional object, the device replaces the display of the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object with the virtual three-dimensional object rotated to match respective viewpoints of the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object (18054). ). 11A-11E provide examples of a user interface 5060 that displays a representation of a virtual object 11002. In response to a request to display the virtual object 11002 , as described with respect to FIG. 11A , the display of the user interface 5060 displays the virtual object 11002 within the staging user interface 6010 , as shown in FIG. 11E . ) is replaced with the display of The viewpoint of the virtual object 11002 of FIG. 11E is the same as the viewpoint of the representation of the virtual object 11002 of FIG. 11A . In some embodiments, the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object is scaled up (eg, to a size that matches the size of the virtual three-dimensional object) before it is replaced with the virtual three-dimensional object. In some embodiments, the virtual three-dimensional object is initially displayed at the size of the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object, and then the scale is increased. In some embodiments, during transition from the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object to the virtual three-dimensional object, the device progressively enlarges the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object, and cross-fades the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object into the virtual three-dimensional object. (cross fade), and then progressively enlarge the virtual three-dimensional object to create a smooth transition between the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object and the virtual three-dimensional object. In some embodiments, the initial position of the virtual three-dimensional object is selected to correspond to a position of the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object. In some embodiments, the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object is shifted to the selected position to correspond to the position at which the virtual three-dimensional object is to be displayed. Replacing the display of a (two-dimensional) representation of a virtual three-dimensional object with a virtual three-dimensional object rotated to match the viewpoint of the (two-dimensional) representation (e.g., the three-dimensional object is equivalent to the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object) It provides visual feedback indicating that it is an object. Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby enabling the device's power usage. reduce and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, prior to displaying the first user interface, the device displays ( 18056 ) a two-dimensional user interface comprising a two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object. While displaying a two-dimensional user interface comprising a two-dimensional representation of a virtual three-dimensional object, the device determines preview criteria (eg, a preview criterion) at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object. require that the intensity of the press input exceeds a first intensity threshold (eg, a light press intensity threshold) and/or the preview criteria require that the duration of the press input exceeds the first duration threshold) A first portion of the touch input (eg, an increase in the intensity of the contact) is detected ( 18058 ). In response to detecting the first portion of the touch input that meets the preview criteria, the device displays a preview of the virtual three-dimensional object that is larger than the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object (eg, the preview is virtual three-dimensional). Animated to show different viewpoints of the object (18060). In some embodiments, the device displays an animation in which the three-dimensional object is progressively enlarged (eg, based on a duration or pressure of the input or based on a predetermined speed of the animation). Displaying a preview of the virtual three-dimensional object (eg, without replacing the display of the currently displayed user interface with a different user interface) may affect (eg, the user displaying the virtual three-dimensional object and between user interfaces). improve the operability of the device) by making it possible to return to observing a two-dimensional representation of a virtual three-dimensional object without providing input for navigating. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an operation improves the operability of the device, which additionally enables a user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and conserving battery life. improve

In some embodiments, while displaying a preview of the virtual three-dimensional object, the device detects ( 18062 ) a second portion of the touch input (eg, by the same continuously maintained contact). In response to detecting the second portion of the touch input, the second portion of the touch input displays menu display criteria (eg, menu display criteria requiring the contact to move in a predefined direction (eg, upwards) by more than a threshold amount). Upon determining that it satisfies the share options); upon determining that the second portion of the touch input meets staging criteria (eg, the staging criteria require that the intensity of the contact exceeds a second threshold intensity (eg, deep press intensity threshold) that is greater than the first threshold intensity) , the device replaces the display of the two-dimensional user interface including the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object with the first user interface including the virtual three-dimensional object (18064). Depending on whether staging criteria are met, displaying a menu associated with the virtual object or replacing the display of a two-dimensional user interface comprising a two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object with a first user interface comprising the virtual three-dimensional object Doing enables performing a number of different types of operations in response to input. Enabling the performance of a number of different types of operations using a first type of input increases the efficiency with which a user can perform these operations, thereby improving the operability of the device, which additionally allows the user to perform these operations. By enabling the device to be used more quickly and efficiently, it reduces the device's power usage and improves battery life.

In some embodiments, the first user interface includes a plurality of controls (eg, buttons for switching to the real-world view, for going back, etc.) ( 18066 ). Prior to displaying the first user interface, the device displays ( 18068 ) a two-dimensional user interface comprising a two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object. In response to detecting the request to display the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface, the device displays the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface without displaying a set of one or more controls associated with the virtual three-dimensional object. do; After displaying the virtual 3D object in the first user interface, the device displays a set of one or more control units ( 18070 ). For example, as described with respect to FIGS. 11A-11E , the display of the user interface 5060 including the two-dimensional representation of the virtual object 11002 is displayed before the staging user interface 6010 . In response to a request to display the virtual object 11002 in the staging user interface 6010 (as described with respect to FIG. 11A ), the virtual object 11002 is configured to display the controls 6016 , 6018 of the staging user interface 6010 . , 6020) (as shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C ). 11D and 11E , the controls 6016 , 6018 , 6020 of the staging user interface 6010 fade in to view within the user interface. In some embodiments, the set of one or more controls is configured to display the virtual three-dimensional object in an augmented reality environment in which the virtual three-dimensional object is disposed at a fixed position relative to a plane in which the virtual three-dimensional object is detected within the field of view of one or more cameras of the device. control unit for In some embodiments, in response to detecting a request to display the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface, it is determined that the virtual three-dimensional object is not ready to be displayed within the first user interface (eg, the first user interface Upon determination that the three-dimensional model of the virtual object is not fully loaded at the time when is ready to be displayed (e.g., the loading time of the virtual object is longer than the threshold time (e.g., perceptible and significant to the user)), the device displays a portion of the first user interface (eg, a background window of the first user interface) without displaying the plurality of controls on the first user interface; Upon determining that the virtual three-dimensional object is ready to be displayed in the first user interface (eg, after a portion of the first user interface is displayed without controls), the device creates the virtual three-dimensional object in the first user interface ( eg, fade in); The device displays the controls (eg, fade in) after the virtual three-dimensional object is displayed in the first user interface. responsive to detecting a request to display the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface, and indicating that the virtual three-dimensional object is ready to be displayed (eg, of the virtual object when the first user interface is ready to be displayed); Upon determining that the three-dimensional model has been loaded (eg, the loading time of the virtual object is shorter than a threshold time (eg, not perceptible to the user and negligible)), the device displays the plurality of controls on the first user interface. display the first user interface in a state in ; The device displays the virtual three-dimensional object (eg, without fading in) in the first user interface together with the plurality of controls. In some embodiments, if a staging user interface exists to return to the two-dimensional user interface (eg, in response to a request to "go back"), the virtual three-dimensional object is transformed into a two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object. Controls are first faded out before the Displaying the controls after displaying the virtual three-dimensional object within the user interface provides visual feedback (eg, indicating that controls for manipulating the virtual object are unavailable for a time required to load the virtual object). Providing the user with improved visual feedback improves the operability of the device (eg, by helping the user avoid providing input to manipulate the object while manipulation actions are unavailable during load time for the virtual object). and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

It should be understood that the specific order in which the operations in FIGS. 18A-18I are described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations may be performed. Those skilled in the art will recognize various ways of reordering the operations described herein. Additionally, details of other processes described herein in connection with other methods described herein (eg, methods 800 , 900 , 1000 , 16000 , 17000 , 19000 , 20000 ) are shown in FIGS. 18A- It should be noted that in a manner similar to method 18000 described above with respect to FIG. 18I is also applicable. For example, contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interface regions, fields of view, tactile outputs, movements, and/or animations described above with respect to method 18000 are optionally described herein. Contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interface areas, field of view described herein in connection with other methods described (eg, methods 800, 900, 1000, 17000, 18000, 19000, 20000) fields, tactile outputs, movements, and/or animations. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated here.

19A-19H are flow diagrams illustrating a method 19000 of increasing a second threshold magnitude of movement required for a second object manipulation behavior in accordance with a determination that the first threshold magnitude of movement is satisfied for the first object manipulation behavior admit. Method 19000 includes a display generating component (eg, a display, a projector, a heads up display, etc.) and a touch-sensitive surface (eg, a touch-sensitive surface, or a touch screen serving as both a display generating component and a touch-sensitive surface). display) (eg, device 300 of FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device 100 of FIG. 1A ). Some operations in method 19000 are selectively combined and/or the order of some operations is selectively changed.

The device, via the display creation component, performs a first object manipulation behavior (eg, of a user interface object about a respective axis) performed in response to inputs that satisfy first gesture recognition criteria (eg, rotation criteria). rotation) and a second object manipulation behavior (eg, a translation of a user interface object or a user interface object) performed in response to inputs satisfying second gesture recognition criteria (eg, one of the translation criteria and scaling criteria). Display ( 19002 ) a first user interface region (eg, a user interface region including a representation of a virtual object) that includes a user interface object associated with a plurality of object manipulation behaviors including one of the scaling of For example, the displayed virtual object 11002 may rotate about a respective axis (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 14B-14E ), or rotate about a respective axis (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 14K-14M ). such) translation, and manipulation behaviors including scaling (eg, as described with respect to FIGS. 14G-14I ).

While displaying the first user interface region, the device detects a first portion of the input to the user interface object, including detecting movement of one or more contacts across the touch-sensitive surface (eg, the device detecting one or more contacts at locations on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the display location of the user interface object), while the one or more contacts are detected on the touch-sensitive surface, the device determines the first gesture recognition criteria and the second gesture Evaluate movement of one or more contacts relative to both recognition criteria ( 19004 ).

In response to detecting the first portion of the input, the device updates the appearance of the user interface object based on the first portion of the input, wherein the first gesture before the first portion of the input meets second gesture recognition criteria. changing the appearance of the user interface object according to a first object manipulation behavior based on the first portion of the input (eg, based on a direction and/or size of the first portion of the input) in accordance with a determination that the recognition criteria are met (eg, rotating a user interface object); and by increasing a threshold for the second gesture recognition criteria (eg, without changing the appearance of the user interface object according to the second object manipulation behavior) (eg, a movement parameter (eg, distance of movement) in the second gesture recognition criteria). and updating the second gesture recognition criteria (19006) by increasing the threshold required for , speed, etc.). For example, in FIG. 14E , the virtual object 1102 has been rotated in accordance with a determination that the rotation criteria are satisfied (before the scaling criteria are satisfied), and the threshold ST for the scaling criteria is increased to ST′. In some embodiments, before the criteria for recognizing a gesture for rotating an object are met (assuming the criteria for translation or scaling have not been met previously), It is relatively easy to initiate a translation or scale operation on an object by meeting the criteria. Once the criteria for recognizing a gesture to rotate an object are met, it becomes more difficult to initiate a translation or scale operation on the object (e.g., the criteria for translation and scaling are subject to increased thresholds for the movement parameter). ), object manipulation is biased towards manipulation behaviors corresponding to gestures already recognized and used to manipulate these objects. Upon determining that the input meets the second gesture recognition criteria before meeting the first gesture recognition criteria, the device is configured based on the first portion of the input (eg, based on a direction and/or magnitude of the first portion of the input). ) change the appearance of the user interface object (eg, translate the user interface object or resize the user interface object) according to the second object manipulation behavior; By increasing the threshold for the first gesture recognition criteria (eg, without changing the appearance of the user interface object according to the first object manipulation behavior) (eg, a movement parameter (eg, movement distance, update the first gesture recognition criteria) by increasing the threshold required for speed, etc.). For example, in FIG. 14I , the size of the virtual object 1102 is increased in accordance with a determination that the scaling criteria have been met (before the rotation criteria are met), and the threshold RT for the rotation criteria is increased to RT'. In some embodiments, before the criteria for recognizing a gesture for translating or scaling an object are met, the gesture for rotation (assuming that the criteria for recognizing a gesture for rotating the object have not previously been met) It is relatively easy to initiate a rotation operation on an object by satisfying the criteria for recognizing . Once the criteria for recognizing a gesture for translating or scaling an object are met, it becomes more difficult to initiate a rotation operation on the object (eg, the criteria for rotating the object are updated with an increased threshold for the movement parameter). ), object manipulation behaviors are biased towards manipulation behaviors corresponding to gestures already recognized and used to manipulate these objects. In some embodiments, the appearance of the user interface object changes dynamically and continuously according to the values of each movement parameter of the input (eg, showing different sizes, positions, viewpoints, reflections, shadows, etc.) ). In some embodiments, the device controls the movement parameter (eg, each movement parameter for each type of manipulation behavior) and the appearance of the user interface object (eg, each aspect of the appearance for each type of manipulation behavior). Predetermined correspondences between changes made to the system (eg, respective correspondences for each type of manipulation behavior) are followed. Increasing the first threshold for the input movement required for the first object manipulation when the input movement increases above the second threshold for the second object manipulation (eg, to provide input for performing the first object manipulation) improve the operability of the device) by helping the user avoid accidentally performing a second object manipulation during an attempt. Improving a user's ability to control different types of object manipulation improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient.

In some embodiments, after updating the appearance of the user interface object based on the first portion of the input, the device (eg, the same continuously maintained contacts within the first portion of the input, or within the first portion of the input) A second portion of the input is detected ( 19008 ) with different contacts detected after termination of the contacts (eg, liftoff). In some embodiments, the second portion of the input is detected based on successively detected inputs that are for a user interface object. In response to detecting the second portion of the input, the device updates the appearance of the user interface object based on the second portion of the input, wherein the first portion of the input met first gesture recognition criteria and the second portion of the input In accordance with a determination that the portion does not meet the updated second gesture recognition criteria (eg, regardless of whether the second portion of the input meets the first gesture recognition criteria or the original second gesture recognition criteria) (eg, , based on the second portion of the input without changing the appearance of the user interface object according to the second object manipulation behavior (e.g. changing the appearance of the user interface object according to the first object manipulation behavior (based on the direction and/or magnitude of the second portion of the input); and in accordance with a determination that the first portion of the input meets the second gesture recognition criteria and the second portion of the input does not meet the updated first gesture recognition criteria (eg, the second portion of the input meets the second gesture recognition criteria the user interface according to the first object manipulation behavior (eg, even if the second portion of the input satisfies the original first gesture recognition before being updated) changing the appearance of the user interface object according to the second object manipulation behavior based on the second portion of the input (eg, based on the orientation and/or size of the second portion of the input) without changing the appearance of the object do (19010).

In some embodiments, the second portion of the input changes according to the first object manipulation behavior based on the second portion of the input after the first portion of the input meets the first gesture recognition criteria, while the second portion of the input changes the appearance of the user interface object. The portion is the second gesture recognition before the second gesture recognition criteria are updated (eg, to the original threshold(s) for the movement parameter(s) of the input in the second gesture recognition criteria before the threshold(s) are incremented) includes input that meets the criteria (eg, the second portion of the input does not include the input that meets the updated second gesture recognition criteria) 19012 .

In some embodiments, the second portion of the input changes according to a second object manipulation behavior based on the second portion of the input after the first portion of the input meets the second gesture recognition criteria, while the second portion of the input changes the appearance of the user interface object. The portion is the first gesture recognition before the first gesture recognition criteria are updated (eg, to the original threshold(s) for the movement parameter(s) of the input in the first gesture recognition criteria before the threshold(s) are incremented) includes input that meets the criteria (eg, the second portion of the input does not include the input that meets the updated first gesture recognition criteria) 19014 .

In some embodiments, the second portion of the input changes according to the first object manipulation behavior based on the second portion of the input after the first portion of the input meets the first gesture recognition criteria, while the second portion of the input changes the appearance of the user interface object. The portion does not include ( 19016 ) an input that meets the first gesture recognition criteria (eg, with an original threshold(s) for movement parameter(s) of the input within the first gesture recognition criteria). For example, after the first gesture recognition criteria are met once, the input no longer needs to continue to satisfy the first gesture recognition criteria to cause the first object manipulation behavior.

In some embodiments, the second portion of the input changes according to a second object manipulation behavior based on the second portion of the input after the first portion of the input meets the second gesture recognition criteria, while the second portion of the input changes the appearance of the user interface object. The portion does not include ( 19018 ) an input that meets the second gesture recognition criteria (eg, with an original threshold(s) for movement parameter(s) of the input within the second gesture recognition criteria). For example, after the second gesture recognition criteria are met once, the input no longer needs to continue to satisfy the second gesture recognition criteria to cause the second object manipulation behavior. Performing the first object manipulation behavior when the second portion of the input includes a movement that increases beyond an increased threshold (eg, by meeting increased criteria without requiring the user to provide a new input) By providing the user with the ability to intentionally perform the second object manipulation after performing the first object manipulation), the operability of the device is improved. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an operation improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables a user to use the device more quickly and efficiently by reduce power consumption and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, updating the appearance of the user interface object based on the second portion of the input comprises: first gesture recognition in which the first portion of the input met second gesture recognition criteria and the second portion of the input was updated In accordance with a determination that the criteria are met, change the appearance of the user interface object according to the first object manipulation behavior based on the second portion of the input, and change the appearance of the user interface object according to the second object manipulation behavior based on the second portion of the input. to change the appearance of; and according to a determination that the first portion of the input meets the first gesture recognition criteria and that the second portion of the input meets the updated second gesture recognition criteria, according to the first object manipulation behavior based on the second portion of the input; changing the appearance of the user interface object, and changing the appearance of the user interface object according to a second object manipulation behavior based on the second portion of the input ( 19020 ). For example, after first gesture recognition criteria are first met and then the input meets updated second gesture recognition criteria, the input may now cause both first and second object manipulation behaviors. For example, after the second gesture recognition criteria are first met and then the input meets the updated first gesture recognition criteria, the input may now cause both the first and second object manipulation behaviors. Updating the object according to the first object manipulation behavior and the second object manipulation behavior in response to a portion of the detected input after the second gesture recognition criteria and the updated first gesture recognition criteria are met (eg, when the user improve the operability of the device) by providing the user with the ability to freely manipulate objects using first and second object manipulations after meeting an increased threshold without requiring providing input. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an operation improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables a user to use the device more quickly and efficiently by reduce power consumption and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, after updating the appearance of the user interface object based on the second portion of the input (eg, after both the first gesture recognition criteria and the updated second gesture recognition criteria are met, or after the second After both the two gesture recognition criteria and the updated first gesture recognition criteria are met), the device (eg, the same continuously maintained contacts in the first and second portions of the input, or the first portion of the input) and detect ( 19022 ) a third portion of the input ( with different contacts detected after termination (eg, liftoff) of the contacts in the second portion). In response to detecting the third portion of the input, the device updates an appearance of the user interface object based on the third portion of the input, wherein the user interface object is in accordance with the first object manipulation behavior based on the third portion of the input. to change the appearance of; and changing the appearance of the user interface object according to the second object manipulation behavior based on the third portion of the input (19024). For example, after both the first gesture recognition criteria and the updated second gesture recognition criteria are satisfied, or after both the second gesture recognition criteria and the updated first gesture recognition criteria are satisfied, the input may subsequently cause both the first and second object manipulation behaviors irrespective of thresholds in the original or updated first and second gesture recognition criteria. Updating the object according to the first object manipulation behavior and the second object manipulation behavior in response to a portion of the detected input after the second gesture recognition criteria and the updated first gesture recognition criteria are met (eg, when the user The ability to freely manipulate an object using a first object manipulation and a second object manipulation after demonstrating an intention to perform a first type of object manipulation by satisfying an increased threshold, without requiring input to be provided. to the user) to improve the operability of the device. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an operation improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables a user to use the device more quickly and efficiently by reduce power consumption and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, the third portion of the input does not include an input that meets the first gesture recognition criteria or an input that meets the second gesture recognition criteria ( 19026 ). For example, after both the first gesture recognition criteria and the updated second gesture recognition criteria are satisfied, or after both the second gesture recognition criteria and the updated first gesture recognition criteria are satisfied, the input may subsequently cause both the first and second object manipulation behaviors irrespective of thresholds in the original or updated first and second gesture recognition criteria. Updating the object according to the first object manipulation behavior and the second object manipulation behavior in response to a portion of the detected input after the second gesture recognition criteria and the updated first gesture recognition criteria are met (eg, when the user improve the operability of the device (by providing the user with the ability to freely manipulate objects using first and second object manipulations) after meeting enhanced criteria without requiring input to be provided; . Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an operation improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables a user to use the device more quickly and efficiently by reduce power consumption and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, the plurality of object manipulation behaviors include a third object manipulation behavior (eg, about a respective axis) performed in response to inputs that satisfy third gesture recognition criteria (eg, scaling criteria). rotation of the user interface object) (19028). Updating the appearance of the user interface object based on the first portion of the input indicates that the first portion of the input meets the first gesture recognition criteria before meeting the second gesture recognition criteria or meets the third gesture recognition criteria. According to the determination, change the appearance of the user interface object (eg, the user rotating the interface object); and by increasing a threshold for the second gesture recognition criteria (eg, without changing the appearance of the user interface object according to the second object manipulation behavior) (eg, a movement parameter (eg, distance of movement) in the second gesture recognition criteria). , speed, etc.) and updating the second gesture recognition criteria ( 19030 ). For example, before the criteria for recognizing a gesture for rotating an object are met, the criteria for recognizing a gesture for translation or scaling (assuming that the criteria for translation or scaling have not been met previously) It is relatively easy to initiate a translation or scale operation on an object by satisfying it. Once the criteria for recognizing a gesture to rotate an object are met, it becomes more difficult to initiate a translation or scale operation on the object (e.g., the criteria for translation and scaling are subject to increased thresholds for the movement parameter). ), object manipulation is biased towards manipulation behaviors corresponding to gestures already recognized and used to manipulate these objects. The device updates the third gesture recognition criteria by increasing the threshold for the third gesture recognition criteria (eg, by increasing the threshold required for a movement parameter (eg, movement distance, speed, etc.) in the third gesture recognition criteria). . For example, before the criteria for recognizing a gesture for rotating an object are met, the criteria for recognizing a gesture for translation or scaling (assuming that the criteria for translation or scaling have not been met previously) It is relatively easy to initiate a translation or scale operation on an object by satisfying it. Once the criteria for recognizing a gesture to rotate an object are met, it becomes more difficult to initiate a translation or scale operation on the object (e.g., the criteria for translation and scaling are subject to increased thresholds for the movement parameter). ), object manipulation is biased towards manipulation behaviors corresponding to gestures already recognized and used to manipulate these objects. Upon determining that the input meets the first gesture recognition criteria or meets the second gesture recognition criteria before meeting the third gesture recognition criteria, the device is configured based on the first portion of the input (eg, the first portion of the input) change the appearance of the user interface object (eg, translate the user interface object or resize the user interface object) according to the second object manipulation behavior (based on the direction and/or size of the user interface object); By increasing the threshold for the first gesture recognition criteria (eg, without changing the appearance of the user interface object according to the first object manipulation behavior) (eg, a movement parameter (eg, movement distance, update the first gesture recognition criteria) by increasing the threshold required for speed, etc.). For example, before criteria for recognizing a gesture for translating or scaling an object are met, recognize a gesture for rotating (assuming the criteria for recognizing a gesture for rotating an object have not been met previously). It is relatively easy to initiate a rotation operation on an object by satisfying the criteria for Once the criteria for recognizing a gesture for translating or scaling an object are met, it becomes more difficult to initiate a rotation operation on the object (eg, the criteria for rotating the object are updated with an increased threshold for the movement parameter). ), object manipulation behaviors are biased towards manipulation behaviors corresponding to gestures already recognized and used to manipulate these objects. In some embodiments, the appearance of the user interface object changes dynamically and continuously according to the values of each movement parameter of the input (eg, showing different sizes, positions, viewpoints, reflections, shadows, etc.) ). In some embodiments, the device controls the movement parameter (eg, each movement parameter for each type of manipulation behavior) and the appearance of the user interface object (eg, each aspect of the appearance for each type of manipulation behavior). Predetermined correspondences between changes made to the data are followed (eg, each correspondence to each type of manipulation behavior). The device updates the third gesture recognition criteria by increasing the threshold for the third gesture recognition criteria (eg, by increasing the threshold required for a movement parameter (eg, movement distance, speed, etc.) in the third gesture recognition criteria). . For example, before the criteria for recognizing a gesture for rotating an object are met, the criteria for recognizing a gesture for translation or scaling (assuming that the criteria for translation or scaling have not been met previously) It is relatively easy to initiate a translation or scale operation on an object by satisfying it. Once the criteria for recognizing a gesture to rotate an object are met, it becomes more difficult to initiate a translation or scale operation on the object (e.g., the criteria for translation and scaling are subject to increased thresholds for the movement parameter). ), object manipulation is biased towards manipulation behaviors corresponding to gestures already recognized and used to manipulate these objects. Upon determining that the input meets the first gesture recognition criteria or meets the third gesture recognition criteria before meeting the second gesture recognition criteria, the device is configured to: based on the first portion of the input (eg, the first portion of the input) change the appearance of the user interface object (eg, resize the user interface object) according to the third object manipulation behavior (based on the direction and/or size of the ); The device increases the threshold for the first gesture recognition criteria (eg, in the first gesture recognition criteria without changing the appearance of the user interface object according to the first object manipulation behavior and the second object manipulation behavior) Update the first gesture recognition criteria by increasing a threshold required for a movement parameter (eg, movement distance, speed, etc.). For example, before criteria for recognizing a gesture for translating or scaling an object are met, recognize a gesture for rotating (assuming the criteria for recognizing a gesture for rotating an object have not been met previously). It is relatively easy to initiate a rotation operation on an object by satisfying the criteria for Once the criteria for recognizing a gesture for translating or scaling an object are met, it becomes more difficult to initiate a rotation operation on the object (eg, the criteria for rotating the object are updated with an increased threshold for the movement parameter). ), object manipulation behaviors are biased towards manipulation behaviors corresponding to gestures already recognized and used to manipulate these objects. In some embodiments, the appearance of the user interface object changes dynamically and continuously according to the values of each movement parameter of the input (eg, showing different sizes, positions, viewpoints, reflections, shadows, etc.) ). In some embodiments, the device controls the movement parameter (eg, each movement parameter for each type of manipulation behavior) and the appearance of the user interface object (eg, each aspect of the appearance for each type of manipulation behavior). Predetermined correspondences between changes made to the data are followed (eg, each correspondence to each type of manipulation behavior). The device updates the second gesture recognition criteria by increasing the threshold for the second gesture recognition criteria (eg, by increasing a threshold required for a movement parameter (eg, movement distance, speed, etc.) in the second gesture recognition criteria). . For example, before the criteria for recognizing a gesture for rotating an object are met, the criteria for recognizing a gesture for translation or scaling (assuming that the criteria for translation or scaling have not been met previously) It is relatively easy to initiate a translation or scale operation on an object by satisfying it. Once the criteria for recognizing a gesture to rotate an object are met, it becomes more difficult to initiate a translation or scale operation on the object (e.g., the criteria for translation and scaling are subject to increased thresholds for the movement parameter). ), object manipulation is biased towards manipulation behaviors corresponding to gestures already recognized and used to manipulate these objects. Updating the object according to the third object manipulation behavior in response to a portion of the input detected only when corresponding third gesture recognition criteria are met (eg, receiving input for performing a first object manipulation or a second object manipulation) improve the operability of the device) by helping the user avoid inadvertently performing a third object manipulation while attempting to present. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an operation improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables a user to use the device more quickly and efficiently by reduce power consumption and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, the plurality of object manipulation behaviors comprises a third object manipulation behavior performed in response to inputs meeting third gesture recognition criteria, wherein the first portion of the input comprises the first gesture recognition criteria or the first gesture recognition criteria the third gesture recognition criteria have not been met before meeting the second gesture recognition criteria, and the device is configured to: updated the third gesture recognition criteria by increasing the threshold, and the second portion of the input did not meet the updated third gesture recognition criteria before meeting the updated first gesture recognition criteria or the updated second gesture recognition criteria (eg, the device updated the third gesture recognition criteria by increasing a threshold for the third gesture recognition criteria after the first portion of the input met one of the first or second gesture recognition criteria) (19032) . In response to detecting the third portion of the input, a third portion of the input (eg, regardless of whether the third portion of the input meets first or second gesture recognition criteria (eg, updated or original)) Upon determining that the portion meets the updated third gesture recognition criteria, the device may (eg, (eg, even if the third portion of the input does not meet the original first and second gesture recognition criteria) the first and second gesture recognition criteria) to the third object manipulation behavior based on the third portion of the input (eg, based on the direction and/or magnitude of the third portion of the input) while changing the appearance of the user interface object according to the second object manipulation behaviors. Accordingly, the appearance of the user interface object is changed (19034). Upon determining that the third portion of the input does not meet the updated third gesture recognition criteria, the device (eg, (eg, the third portion of the input does not meet the original first and second gesture recognition criteria) withhold changing the appearance of the user interface object according to the third object manipulation behavior based on the third portion of the input) while changing the appearance of the user interface object according to the first and second object manipulation behaviors). In response to the portion of the input detected after the second gesture recognition criteria, the updated first gesture recognition criteria, and the updated third gesture recognition criteria are satisfied, the first object manipulation behavior, the second object manipulation behavior, and Updating an object according to a 3 object manipulation behavior (eg, after establishing an intention to perform all three object manipulation types by meeting increased thresholds without requiring the user to provide a new input is the first , by providing the user the ability to freely manipulate objects using second and third object manipulation types) to improve the operability of the device. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an operation improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables a user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reduce power consumption and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, the third portion of the input met the updated third gesture recognition criteria (19036). After updating the appearance of the user interface object based on the third portion of the input (eg, after both the first gesture recognition criteria and the updated second and third gesture recognition criteria are satisfied, or after a second gesture recognition After both the criteria and the updated first and third gesture recognition criteria are met), the device (eg, the same continuously maintained contacts in the first, second and third portions of the input, or of the input) A fourth portion of the input is detected ( 19038 ) with different contacts detected after termination (eg, liftoff) of the contacts in the first portion, the second portion, and the third portion. In response to detecting the fourth portion of the input, the device updates an appearance of the user interface object based on the fourth portion of the input, wherein the user interface object is in accordance with the first object manipulation behavior based on the fourth portion of the input. to change the appearance of; changing the appearance of the user interface object according to the second object manipulation behavior based on the fourth portion of the input; and changing the appearance of the user interface object according to the third object manipulation behavior based on the fourth portion of the input (19040). For example, after first gesture recognition criteria and updated second and third gesture recognition criteria are satisfied, or after second gesture recognition criteria and updated first and third gesture recognition criteria are satisfied, the input may subsequently cause all three types of manipulation behaviors irrespective of thresholds in the original or updated first, second, and third gesture recognition criteria.

In some embodiments, the fourth portion of the input does not include an input that meets the first gesture recognition criteria, an input that meets the second gesture recognition criteria, or an input that meets the third gesture recognition criteria ( 19042 ). For example, after first gesture recognition criteria and updated second and third gesture recognition criteria are satisfied, or after second gesture recognition criteria and updated first and third gesture recognition criteria are satisfied, the input may subsequently cause all three types of manipulation behaviors irrespective of thresholds in the original or updated first, second, and third gesture recognition criteria. Requiring multiple concurrently detected contacts for a gesture (eg, by helping a user avoid inadvertently performing an object manipulation while providing input with fewer than the required number of simultaneously detected contacts) is operability of the device. to improve Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an operation improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables a user to use the device more quickly and efficiently by reduce power consumption and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, both the first gesture recognition criteria and the second gesture recognition criteria (and the third gesture recognition criteria) are met for a first number of simultaneously detected contacts (eg, two contacts). ) is required (19044). In some embodiments, a single finger gesture may also be used for translation, wherein the single finger translation threshold is lower than the two finger translation threshold. In some embodiments, the original movement threshold and updated movement threshold set for the two-finger translation gesture are movement by centroid of 40 points and 70 points of contacts, respectively. In some embodiments, the original movement threshold and updated movement threshold set for the two-finger rotation gesture are rotational movement by contacts of 12 and 18 degrees, respectively. In some embodiments, the original movement threshold and updated movement threshold set for the two-finger scaling gesture are 50 points (distance between contacts) and 90 points, respectively. In some embodiments, the threshold set for a single finger drag gesture is 30 points.

In some embodiments, the first object manipulation behavior changes the zoom level or displayed size of the user interface object (eg, a pinch gesture (eg, movement of contacts towards each other) (eg, the original or After being recognized based on first gesture recognition criteria (updated), then resizing the object by a pinch gesture), the second object manipulation behavior changes the rotation angle of the user interface object (eg, twist/ After a pivot gesture (eg, movement about a common trajectory of contacts) is recognized by second gesture recognition criteria (eg, original or updated), the user uses a twist/pivot gesture about an external or internal axis change the viewpoint of the interface object) (19046). For example, the first object manipulation behavior changes the displayed size of the virtual object 11002 as described with respect to FIGS. 14G-14I , and the second object manipulation behavior is described with respect to FIGS. 14B-14E . As described above, the rotation angle of the virtual object 11002 is changed. In some embodiments, the second object manipulation behavior changes the zoom level or displayed size of the user interface object (eg, a pinch gesture (eg, movement of contacts towards each other) (eg, the original or After being recognized based on second gesture recognition criteria (updated), then resizing the object by the pinch gesture), the first object manipulation behavior changes the rotation angle of the user interface object (eg, twist/ After a pivot gesture (eg, movement about a common trajectory of contacts) is recognized by (eg, original or updated) first gesture recognition criteria, the user uses a twist/pivot gesture about an external or internal axis change the viewpoint of the interface object).

In some embodiments, the first object manipulation behavior changes the zoom level or displayed size of the user interface object (eg, a pinch gesture (eg, movement of contacts towards each other) (eg, the original or After being recognized based on first gesture recognition criteria (updated), resizing the object by a pinch gesture), the second object manipulation behavior changes the position of the user interface object within the first user interface area (eg, For example, after a one-finger or two-finger drag gesture (eg, movement in each direction of contacts) is recognized by (eg, original or updated) second gesture recognition criteria, the user dragging an interface object) (19048). For example, the first object manipulation behavior changes the displayed size of the virtual object 11002 as described with respect to FIGS. 14G-14I , and the second object manipulation behavior is described with respect to FIGS. 14B-14E . As described above, the position of the virtual object 11002 in the user interface is changed. In some embodiments, the second object manipulation behavior changes the zoom level or displayed size of the user interface object (eg, a pinch gesture (eg, movement of contacts towards each other) (eg, the original or after being recognized based on the updated) second gesture recognition criteria, resizing the object by the pinch gesture), the first object manipulation behavior changes the position of the user interface object within the first user interface area (eg, For example, after a one-finger or two-finger drag gesture (eg, movement in each direction of contacts) is recognized by (eg, original or updated) first gesture recognition criteria, the user dragging the interface object).

In some embodiments, the first object manipulation behavior changes the position of the user interface object within the first user interface area (eg, a one-finger or two-finger drag gesture (eg, in each direction of the contacts) movement) is recognized by the first gesture recognition criteria (eg, original or updated), then dragging the user interface object by the drag gesture), the second object manipulation behavior changes the rotation angle of the user interface object (eg, after a twist/pivot gesture (eg, movement about a common trajectory of contacts) is recognized by (eg, original or updated) second gesture recognition criteria, the twist/pivot gesture (19050). For example, the first object manipulation behavior changes the position of the virtual object 11002 within the user interface as described with respect to FIGS. 14B-14E , and the second object manipulation behavior changes with respect to FIGS. 14B-14E . to change the rotation angle of the virtual object 11002 as described above. In some embodiments, the second object manipulation behavior changes the position of the user interface object within the first user interface area (eg, a one-finger or two-finger drag gesture (eg, in each direction of the contacts) movement) is recognized by the second gesture recognition criteria (eg, original or updated), then dragging the user interface object by the drag gesture), the first object manipulation behavior changes the rotation angle of the user interface object (eg, after a twist/pivot gesture (eg, movement about a common trajectory of contacts) is recognized by (eg, original or updated) first gesture recognition criteria, the twist/pivot gesture by changing the viewpoint of the user interface object around an external or internal axis).

In some embodiments, the first portion of the input and the second portion of the input are provided ( 19052 ) by a plurality of continuously maintained contacts. The device sets the first gesture recognition criteria and the second gesture recognition criteria (eg, the original thresholds) to initiate additional first and second object manipulation behaviors after detecting liftoff of the plurality of continuously maintained contacts. to) re-established (19054). For example, after liftoff of contacts, the device re-establishes gesture recognition thresholds for rotation, translation, and scaling for the newly detected touch input. Re-establishing a threshold for input movement after the input is terminated by liftoff of contacts reduces the amount of input required to perform object manipulation (eg, by resetting increased movement thresholds each time a new input is provided). ) to improve the operability of the device. Reducing the amount of input required to perform an action improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reduce power consumption and improve battery life.

In some embodiments, the first gesture recognition criteria correspond to rotation about a first axis and the second gesture recognition criteria correspond to rotation about a second axis orthogonal to the first axis (19056). In some embodiments, instead of updating thresholds for different types of gestures, the update also includes different subtypes of manipulation behavior within a type of manipulation behavior corresponding to the recognized gesture type (eg, twist/pivot gesture) eg rotation about a first axis versus rotation about a different axis). For example, once rotation about a first axis is recognized and performed, thresholds set for rotation about a different axis are updated (eg, incremented) and triggered by subsequent input to trigger rotation about a different axis. must be overcome Increasing the threshold for input movement required to rotate the object about the first axis when the input movement increases above the threshold for input movement required to rotate the object about the second axis (eg, a first improve the operability of the device) by helping the user avoid accidentally rotating the object about a second axis while attempting to rotate the object about an axis. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an operation improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reduce power consumption and improve battery life.

It should be understood that the specific order in which the operations in FIGS. 19A-19H are described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations may be performed. Those skilled in the art will recognize various ways of reordering the operations described herein. Additionally, details of other processes described herein in connection with other methods described herein (eg, methods 800 , 900 , 1000 , 16000 , 17000 , 18000 , 20000 ) are shown in FIGS. 19A- It should be noted that in a manner similar to method 19000 described above with respect to FIG. 19H is also applicable. For example, contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interface regions, fields of view, tactile outputs, movements, and/or animations described above with respect to method 19000 are optionally described herein. Contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interface areas, field of view described herein in connection with other methods described (eg, methods 800, 900, 1000, 16000, 17000, 18000, 20000) fields, tactile outputs, movements, and/or animations. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated here.

20A-20F are flow diagrams illustrating a method 20000 of generating an audio alert upon determining that movement of the device causes the virtual object to move outside the displayed field of view of one or more device cameras. The method 20000 includes a display generating component (eg, a display, a projector, a heads up display, etc.), one or more input devices (eg, a touch-sensitive surface, or a touch serving as both a display generating component and a touch-sensitive surface). screen display), one or more audio output generators, and one or more cameras (eg, device 300 of FIG. 3 , or portable multifunction device 100 of FIG. 1A ). Some operations in method 20000 are selectively combined and/or the order of some operations is selectively changed.

The device responds to a request to place the virtual object (eg, in an augmented reality view of the physical environment surrounding the device including the camera (eg, in response to a tap on a “real world” button displayed along with a staging view of the virtual object) )), via the display creation component, a first user interface area that includes a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, the first user interface area displays an augmented reality view of the physical environment surrounding the device including the camera) displaying a representation of the virtual object within a user interface, wherein displaying includes maintaining a first spatial relationship between the representation of the virtual object and a plane detected in the physical environment captured within the field of view of one or more cameras. , the virtual object is displayed on the display in an orientation and position such that a fixed angle between the representation of the virtual object and the plane is maintained (e.g., the virtual object remains in a fixed position on the plane or appears to roll along the plane of view) )) (20002). For example, as shown in FIG. 15V , virtual object 11002 is displayed within a user interface area that includes field of view 6036 of one or more cameras.

The device detects ( 20004 ) movement of the device that adjusts the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, lateral movement and/or rotation of the device including the one or more cameras). For example, as described with respect to FIGS. 15V and 15W , movement of device 100 adjusts the field of view of one or more cameras.

In response to detecting movement of the device adjusting the field of view of the one or more cameras, the device is configured to include a first spatial relationship (eg, a first spatial relationship (eg, , orientation and/or position); adjust the display of the representation of the virtual object within the first user interface area (eg, between the representation of the virtual object and a plane detected in the physical environment captured within the field of view of one or more cameras); Because the spatial relationship remains fixed during movement of the device relative to the physical environment), movement of the device causes more than a threshold amount (eg, 100%, 50%, or 20%) of the virtual object to be displayed in the displayed field of view of the one or more cameras. Upon determining to move out of the portion, the device generates, via the one or more audio output generators, a first audio alert (eg, a voice alert indicating that the virtual object above a threshold amount is no longer displayed within the camera view). Do (20006). For example, as described in connection with FIG. 15W , in response to movement of device 100 causing virtual object 11002 to move outside of a displayed portion of field of view 6036 of one or more cameras, an audio alert (15118) is generated. Generating the audio output in accordance with a determination that movement of the device causes the virtual object to move outside of the displayed augmented reality view may provide feedback indicating the degree to which the movement of the device affected the display of the virtual object relative to the augmented reality view. provided to the user. Providing improved feedback to the user (eg, making the user aware whether the virtual object has moved away from the display without confusing the display with additional displayed information and without requiring the user to view the display) It improves the operability of the device (by providing information that improve lifespan

In some embodiments, outputting the first audio alert comprises generating an audio output indicating an amount of a virtual object that remains visible on the displayed portion of the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, virtual remains visible). The amount of object is measured relative to the total size of the virtual object from the current observation point (eg 20%, 25%, 50%, etc.) (eg, the audio output is "object x is 20% visible" visible)" (20008). For example, as described with respect to FIGS. 15X and 15Y , movement of the device 100 causes the virtual object 11002 to move partially outside of the displayed portion of the field of view 6036 of one or more cameras. In response, an audio alert 15126 is generated that includes a notification 15128 indicating "chair is 90 percent visible, occupying 20 percent of the screen". Generating an audio output indicative of the amount of virtual object visible within the displayed augmented reality view provides feedback to the user (eg, indicative of the degree to which movement of the device changed the degree to which the virtual object was visible). Improved feedback (eg, by providing information that makes the user aware whether the virtual object has moved away from the display without confusing the display with additional displayed information and without requiring the user to view the display) Providing the user with the device improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life. to improve

In some embodiments, outputting the first audio alert comprises generating an audio output indicating an amount of the displayed portion of the field of view obscured by the virtual object (eg, augmented reality of the physical environment occupied by the virtual object). Amount of view (e.g. 20%, 25%, 50%, etc.)) (e.g. audio output says "object x occupying 15% of the world view") including) (20010). In some embodiments, the audio output also includes a description of the action performed by the user that causes changes in the display state of the virtual object. For example, the audio output is "device moved to the left; object x is 20% visible, occupying 15% of the world view" occupies)". For example, in FIG. 15Y , an audio alert 15126 including a notification 15128 indicating "chair is 90 percent visible, occupying 20 percent of the screen" is generated. Generating the audio output indicative of the amount of the augmented reality view occluded by the virtual object provides feedback to the user (eg, indicative of the extent to which movement of the device changed the extent to which the augmented reality view was obscured). Providing improved feedback to the user (eg, information that allows the user to perceive the size of the virtual object relative to the display without confusing the display with additional displayed information and without requiring the user to view the display. to improve the operability of the device (by providing improve

In some embodiments, the device detects input by contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface that corresponds to a representation of the field of view of one or more cameras (eg, tap on a portion of the touch screen to display an augmented reality view of the physical environment) input or double-tap input) (20012). In response to detecting the input, and in response to determining that the input is detected at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to a first portion of the field of view of the one or more cameras not occupied by the virtual object, the device is configured to: An alert (eg, a click or buzz indicating that the virtual object was not located within the tapped area) is generated (20014). For example, as described in connection with FIG. 15Z , in response to input detected at a location on the touch screen 112 that corresponds to a portion of the field of view 6036 of one or more cameras not occupied by the virtual object 11002 , Thus, the device generates an audio alert 15130 . In some embodiments, in response to detecting the input, generate a second audio alert in accordance with a determination that the input is detected at a second location corresponding to a second portion of the field of view of the one or more cameras occupied by the virtual object. withhold to do In some embodiments, instead of generating a second audio alert indicating that the user did not locate the virtual object, the device generates a different audio alert indicating that the user has located the virtual object. In some embodiments, instead of generating a second audio alert, the device provides an audio notification describing the action being performed on the virtual object (eg, “Object x selected”, “Object x is resized to a default size", "Object x is rotated to a default orientation", etc.) or an audio notification describing the state of the virtual object (such as , which prints "Object x, 20% visible, occupying 15% of the world view"). Generating an audio output in response to an input detected at a location corresponding to a portion of a displayed augmented reality view not occupied by the virtual object may include: provide feedback to the user indicating that it must be provided in a different location) to perform Providing improved feedback to the user (eg, allowing the user to recognize whether an input was successfully associated with the virtual object without confusing the display with additional displayed information and without requiring the user to view the display) It improves the operability of the device (by providing information that enables Improves battery life.

In some embodiments, outputting the first audio alert comprises an action performed on the virtual object (eg, prior to generating the audio output, the device determines the currently selected action and indicates the user's intention to execute the currently selected action) performing an action in response to a confirming input (eg, a double tap) and generating an audio output representing the resulting state of the virtual object after performing the action (20016). For example, the audio output is "device moved to the left; object x is 20% visible, occupying 15% of the world view", "object x is rotated clockwise by 30 degrees; object is 50 degrees rotated around the y-axis" (object x is rotated clockwise by 30 degrees; object is rotated 50 degrees around the y-axis)", or "object x enlarged by 20% and occupies 50% of the world view. zoomed in and take up 50% of the real-world view)". For example, in response to performing a rotation operation on virtual object 11002 , as described with respect to FIGS. 15A and 15AI , “Chair is rotated by five degrees counterclockwise. Chair is now rotated by zero degrees relative to An audio alert (15190) is generated with a notification (15192) indicating the screen (the chair is rotated 5 degrees counterclockwise. The chair is now rotated 0 degrees relative to the screen). Generating an audio output representative of an action performed on the virtual object provides feedback to the user indicating how the provided input affects the virtual object. Providing improved feedback to the user (eg, information that allows the user to perceive how the action changed the virtual object without confusing the display with additional displayed information and without requiring the user to view the display) to improve the operability of the device (by providing improve

In some embodiments, the resulting state of the virtual object after performance of the action is described (eg, as an audio output in the first audio alert) in relation to a frame of reference corresponding to the physical environment being captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras. After manipulating the object (eg, in response to a touch-based gesture or movement of the device), the device rotates the virtual object at 30 degrees to the initial position/orientation of the virtual object (eg, when the virtual object is initially placed into an augmented reality view of the physical environment). Creates a voice over describing the new state of the object (rotated, rotated 60 degrees, or shifted to the left) (20018). For example, in response to performing a rotation operation on virtual object 11002 , as described with respect to FIGS. 15A and 15AI , “Chair is rotated by five degrees counterclockwise. Chair is now rotated by zero degrees relative to An audio alert 15190 is generated that includes a notification 15192 indicating "the screen". In some embodiments, the action comprises movement of the device relative to the physical environment (eg, causing movement of the virtual object relative to a representation of a portion of the physical environment captured within the field of view of one or more cameras), and the voice over is Describes the new state of a virtual object in response to movement of the device relative to the physical environment. Generating an audio output that indicates the state of the virtual object after an action has been performed on the object provides feedback to the user that makes the user aware of how the action has changed the virtual object. Providing improved feedback to the user (eg, information that allows the user to perceive how the action changed the virtual object without confusing the display with additional displayed information and without requiring the user to view the display) to improve the operability of the device (by providing improve

In some embodiments, the device detects a further movement of the device (eg, lateral movement and/or rotation of the device including the one or more cameras) that further adjusts the field of view of the one or more cameras after generating the first audio alert. Do (20020). For example, as described with respect to FIGS. 15W and 15X , movement of device 100 is an adjustment of the field of view of one or more cameras that occurs in response to movement of device 100 from FIGS. 15V and 15W . later) further adjust the field of view of one or more cameras. In response to detecting further movement of the device that further adjusts the field of view of the one or more cameras, the device is configured to further adjust the field of view of the one or more cameras between the detected plane and the virtual object as the field of view of the one or more cameras is further adjusted. 1 adjust the display of the representation of the virtual object within the first user interface area according to a spatial relationship (eg, orientation and/or position); Further movement of the device causes the virtual object to exceed a second threshold amount (eg, 50%, 80%, or 100%) because the spatial relationship between representations of the object remains fixed during movement of the device relative to the physical environment. Upon determining to cause movement of the one or more cameras into the displayed portion of the field of view, the device, via the one or more audio output generators, sends a third audio alert (eg, an alert indicating that a virtual object exceeding a threshold amount is moved back into the camera view) Audio output including ) is generated (20022). For example, in response to movement of device 100 causing virtual object 11002 to move into a displayed portion of field of view 6036 of one or more cameras, (eg, an alert, as described with respect to FIG. 15X ), as described with respect to FIG. 15X , , an audio alert (including "Chair is now projected in the world, 100 percent visible, occupying 10 percent of the screen") 15122) is created. Generating the audio output in accordance with a determination that movement of the device causes the virtual object to move into the displayed augmented reality view may provide feedback to the user indicating the degree to which the movement of the device affected the display of the virtual object relative to the augmented reality view. to provide. Providing improved feedback to the user (eg, making the user aware that a virtual object has moved into the display without confusing the display with additional displayed information and without requiring the user to view the display) information) improves the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition reduces the device's power usage and battery life by enabling users to use the device more quickly and efficiently. to improve

In some embodiments, the device displays a representation of the virtual object within the first user interface area and, while a first object manipulation type of a plurality of object manipulation types applicable to the virtual object is currently selected for the virtual object, the device detect a request to switch to another object manipulation type applicable to the object (eg, at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to a portion of the first user interface area that displays a representation of the field of view of one or more cameras (eg, in a horizontal direction) detecting a swipe input by a contact (including movement of the contact to) (20024). For example, as described with respect to FIG. 15Ag , while the clockwise rotation control 15170 is currently selected, the counterclockwise rotation control 15180 (to rotate the virtual object 15160 counterclockwise). ) is detected. In response to detecting the request to switch to another object manipulation type applicable to the virtual object, the device generates an audio output naming a second object manipulation type of the plurality of object manipulation types applicable to the virtual object (eg, the audio output is "rotate object around x-axis", "resize object", or "move object on the plane", etc. ), wherein the second type of object manipulation is distinct from the first type of object manipulation (20026). For example, in FIG. 15Ah , in response to detecting the request described with respect to FIG. 15Ag , an audio alert 15182 including a notification 15184 (“selected: rotate counterclockwise”) is generated. In some embodiments, the device iterates through a predefined list of applicable object manipulation types in response to successive swipe inputs in the same direction. In some embodiments, in response to detecting a swipe input in the opposite direction from an immediately preceding swipe input, the device causes a previously known object manipulation type applicable to the virtual object (eg, an object manipulation known just before the last). Produces an audio output containing a notification naming the type). In some embodiments, the device does not display a corresponding control for each type of object manipulation applicable to the virtual object (eg, actions initiated by gestures (eg, rotate, resize, translate, etc.) There are no buttons or controls displayed for Generating an audio output in response to a request to switch the object manipulation type provides feedback to the user indicating that a switch operation has been performed. Providing improved feedback to the user (e.g., by providing information confirming that the switching input was performed successfully without confusing the display with additional displayed information and without requiring the user to view the display) ) improves the operability of the device, and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

An audio output naming a second object manipulation type of a plurality of object manipulation types applicable to the virtual object (eg, the audio output is "rotate object around x-axis", "resize object", or "move object on the plane") After generating a notification such as, etc.), the device detects a request to perform an object manipulation behavior corresponding to the currently selected object manipulation type (eg, a first user interface that displays a representation of the field of view of one or more cameras) detecting double-tap input by contact at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to a portion of the region (20028). For example, a double tap input to rotate the virtual object 11002 counterclockwise is detected, as described with respect to FIG. 15Ah. In response to detecting the request to perform the object manipulation behavior corresponding to the currently selected object manipulation type, the device executes the object manipulation behavior corresponding to the second object manipulation type (eg, rotates the virtual object 5 about the y-axis rotate the object by a degree, increase the size of the object by 5%, or move the object by 20 pixels on the plane (eg, display the representation of the virtual object in the first user interface area according to the second type of object manipulation) adjusted) (20030). For example, in FIG. 15AI , in response to detecting the request described with respect to FIG. 15Ah , the virtual object 11002 is rotated counterclockwise. In some embodiments, the device, in addition to executing the object manipulation behavior corresponding to the second object manipulation type, provides an object manipulation behavior executed on the virtual object and a notification indicating a result state of the virtual object after execution of the object manipulation behavior Outputs an audio output containing For example, in FIG. 15AI , audio output 15190 is generated that includes notification 15192 (“Chair rotated by five degrees counterclockwise. Chair is now rotated by zero degrees relative to the screen”). Performing an object manipulation action in response to a detected input while the action is being selected provides additional control options for performing the action (eg, by providing a tap input rather than requiring a two-touch input to allow the user to perform the action) to do). Providing additional control options for providing input without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls (eg, for manipulating objects to users with limited ability to provide multiple touch gestures) options) improve the operability of the device and make the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally enables users to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and battery life. to improve

In some embodiments, in response to detecting a request to switch to another object manipulation type applicable to the virtual object, upon determining that the second object manipulation type is a continuously adjustable manipulation type, the device: To indicate that the type is a continuously adjustable manipulation type, generate an audio alert with an audio output naming the second object manipulation type (e.g., an audio notification naming the second object manipulation type (e.g., “rotate object clockwise around the y axis") outputs an audio output that says "adjustable"; The device is configured to: detecting a request to perform an object manipulation behavior corresponding to a second type of object manipulation, including detecting a swipe input at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to a portion of the first user interface area that displays the representation; In response to detecting the request to execute the object manipulation behavior corresponding to the second object manipulation type, the device executes the object manipulation behavior corresponding to the second object manipulation type by an amount corresponding to the magnitude of the swipe input (eg, , rotates the virtual object around the y-axis by 5 degrees or 10 degrees, or scales the object by 5% or 10, depending on whether the magnitude of the swipe input is a first amount or a second amount greater than the first amount. %, or move the object by 20 or 40 pixels on the plane) (20032). For example, as described with respect to FIGS. 15J and 15K , while clockwise rotation control 15038 is currently selected, a swipe input for switching to zoom control 15064 is detected. An audio alert 15066 is generated that includes a notification 15068 (“scale: adjustable”). 15K and 15L , a swipe input to zoom in on the virtual object 11002 is detected, and in response to the input, a zoom operation is performed on the virtual object 11002 (FIG. In the illustrative example of 15K and 15L , input for continuously adjustable manipulation is detected while staging view interface 6010 is displayed, but in a portion of the first user interface area that displays a representation of the field of view of one or more cameras. It will be appreciated that a similar input may be detected at a location on the corresponding touch-sensitive surface). In some embodiments, the device, in addition to executing the second object manipulation behavior, provides an audio indicating an amount of the object manipulation behavior executed on the virtual object and a resulting state of the virtual object after execution of the object manipulation behavior by the amount Print a notification. Performing an object manipulation action in response to a swipe input provides additional control options for performing the action (eg, allowing the user to perform the action by providing a swipe input rather than requiring a two-contact input). Providing additional control options for providing input without cluttering the user interface with additional displayed controls (eg, for manipulating objects to users with limited ability to provide multiple touch gestures) options) improve the operability of the device and make the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition reduces the device's power usage and battery life by enabling users to use the device more quickly and efficiently. to improve

In some embodiments, prior to displaying the representation of the virtual object in the first user interface area, the device displays a representation of the virtual object in a second user interface area (eg, a staging user interface), wherein the second user interface area is does not include a representation of the field of view of one or more cameras (eg, the second user interface region is a virtual object that is manipulated (eg, It is a staging user interface that can be rotated, resized, and moved) (20034). While displaying the representation of the virtual object in the second user interface area and a first of the plurality of actions applicable to the virtual object is currently selected for the virtual object, the device (eg, the virtual object in the second user interface area) A type of object manipulation applicable to (e.g., resize, rotate, tilt, etc.) or a user interface action applicable to a virtual object within the second user interface area (e.g., return back to 2D user interface, object to augmented reality of the physical environment) detect a request to switch to another action applicable to the virtual object (including a request to switch falling into view) (eg, detecting the request at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the first user interface area) (including detecting a swipe input by a contact (eg, including movement of the contact in a horizontal direction)) (20036). For example, as described with respect to FIGS. 15F and 15G , for switching to clockwise rotation control 15038 while staging user interface 6010 is displayed and tilt down control 15022 is currently selected. A swipe input is detected. In response to detecting the request to switch to another action applicable to the virtual object within the second user interface area, the device generates an audio output naming a second action of the plurality of actions applicable to the virtual object (eg, the audio output is "rotate object around x-axis", "resize object", "tilt the object toward the display", or "display object in the augmented reality view" )", etc.), the second action is distinct from the first action (20038). In some embodiments, the device iterates through a predefined list of applicable actions in response to successive swipe inputs in the same direction. For example, in FIG. 15G , in response to detecting the request described with respect to FIG. 15F , an audio alert 15040 including a notification 15042 (“selected: rotate clockwise button”) is generated. Generating an audio output naming the selected action type in response to a request to switch the action type provides feedback to the user indicating that the switching input has been successfully received. Generating an audio output naming the selected action type in response to a request to switch the action type provides feedback to the user indicating that the switching input has been successfully received. Providing improved feedback to the user (e.g., providing information that makes the user aware when a selected control has been changed without confusing the display with additional displayed information and without requiring the user to view the display) to improve the operability of the device) and make the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby reducing the device's power usage and improving battery life. make it

In some embodiments, prior to displaying the representation of the virtual object in the first user interface area, a representation of the virtual object in a second user interface area (eg, a staging user interface) that does not include a representation of the field of view of one or more cameras. during display (e.g., the second user interface region is a staging user interface in which virtual objects can be manipulated (e.g., rotated, resized, and moved) without maintaining a fixed relationship to a plane within the physical environment); The device detects a request to display a representation of a virtual object within a first user interface area that includes a representation of the field of view of one or more cameras (eg, a currently selected action is "display the object in the augmented reality view"). display the object)" and after the device outputs an audio notification naming the currently selected action in response to a swipe input (eg, received just prior to the double tap input) (20040) (20040) ). For example, as described in connection with FIGS. 15P-15V , while a staging user interface 6010 is displayed and a toggle control 6018 is selected, a representation of the field of view 6036 of one or more cameras is included. A double tap input to display a representation of the virtual object 11002 in the user interface area is detected. In response to detecting the request to display a representation of the virtual object within the first user interface area that includes a representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras, the device is configured to display a plane and virtual object detected in the physical environment captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras. display a representation of the virtual object in the first user interface area according to a first spatial relationship between the representations of the object (eg, a rotation angle of the virtual object in the staging view when the virtual object is dropped into the physical environment represented in the augmented reality view); and the size is maintained within the augmented reality view, and the tilt angle is reset within the augmented reality view according to the orientation of the plane detected in the physical environment being captured within the field of view); The device generates a fourth audio alert indicating that the virtual object is placed in the augmented reality view relative to the physical environment being captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras. For example, in response to an input to display a representation of the virtual object 11002 within a user interface area that includes a representation of the field of view 6036 of one or more cameras, as described with respect to FIG. 15V , the virtual object ( A representation of 11002 is displayed within a user interface area that includes a field of view 6036 of one or more cameras, and a notification 15116 ("chair is now projected in the world, 100 percent visible, occupying 10 percent of the screen") is displayed. An audio alert 15114 containing Generating the audio output in response to a request to place the object within the augmented reality view provides feedback to the user indicating that the action of placing the virtual object has been successfully executed. Providing improved feedback to the user (eg, allowing the user to perceive that an object is displayed in the augmented reality view without confusing the display with additional displayed information and without requiring the user to view the display) information) improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition reduces the device's power usage and battery life by enabling users to use the device more quickly and efficiently. to improve

In some embodiments, the third audio alert indicates information regarding the appearance of the virtual object to a portion of the field of view of the one or more cameras (eg, the third audio alert indicates "object x is placed in the world, object x is 30"). (20042) contains an audio output that includes a notification saying "% visible, occupying 90% of the screen" . For example, as described with respect to FIG. 15V , an audio alert 15114 is generated that includes notification 15116 ("chair is now projected in the world, 100 percent visible, occupying 10 percent of the screen"). do. Generating an audio output representative of the appearance of the virtual object visible relative to the displayed augmented reality view provides feedback to the user (eg, indicating the degree to which placement of the object within the augmented reality view affects the appearance of the virtual object). . Providing improved feedback to the user (eg, making the user aware of how objects are displayed within the augmented reality view without confusing the display with additional displayed information and without requiring the user to view the display) It improves the operability of the device (by providing information that improve lifespan

In some embodiments, the device generates (20044) a tactile output with the placement of the virtual object in the augmented reality view relative to the physical environment captured within the field of view of the one or more cameras. For example, when an object is placed on a plane that is detected within the camera's field of view, the device generates a tactile output indicating the landing of the object on the plane. In some embodiments, the device generates a tactile output when the object reaches a predefined default size during resizing of the object. In some embodiments, the device is configured for each operation performed on the virtual object (eg, each rotation by a preset angle, dragging the virtual object onto a different plane, original orientation and/or to generate a tactile output (for resizing, etc.). In some embodiments, these tactile outputs are preceded by corresponding audio alerts describing the action being performed and the resulting state of the virtual object. For example, as described with respect to FIG. 15V , a tactile output 15118 is generated with placement of the virtual object 11002 within the field of view 6036 of one or more cameras. Generating a tactile output with placement of the virtual object relative to the physical environment captured by the one or more cameras provides feedback to the user (eg, indicating that an action to place the virtual object has been successfully executed). . Providing the user with improved feedback improves the operability of the device (eg, by providing sensory information that makes the user aware that the placement of the virtual object has occurred without confusing the user interface with the displayed information). and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which additionally reduces the power usage of the device and improves battery life by enabling the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently.

In some embodiments, the device, concurrently with the representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras, at a first location within the first user interface area (eg, among a plurality of controls displayed at different locations within the first user interface area) The first control unit is displayed (20046). Upon determining that the control fading criteria are met (eg, the control fading criteria are satisfied when the first user interface region is displayed for at least a threshold time while no touch input is detected on the touch-sensitive surface), the device configures the first user stop displaying the first control in the first user interface area (eg, along with all other controls in the first user interface area) while maintaining display of the representation of the field of view of the one or more cameras within the interface area (eg, Controls are not redisplayed when the user moves the device relative to the physical environment (20048). While displaying the first user interface area without displaying the first control within the first user interface area, the device receives a touch input at each location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to a first location within the first user interface area. detect (20050). In response to detecting the touch input, the device generates an audio output (eg, “go back to staging view” or “rotate object around the y-axis(y)” specifying an action corresponding to the first control. -Rotate the object around its axis)"), generate a fifth audio alert (20052). In some embodiments, the device also redisplays the first control in the first position in response to detecting the touch input. In some embodiments, redisplaying the control and upon touch input at the control's normal location on the display, making the control the currently selected control can be accomplished using a series of swipe inputs once the user knows the locations of the controls on the display. Provides a faster way to access controls than scanning through available controls. Automatically ceasing to display the control in response to determining that the control fading criteria are met reduces the number of inputs required to stop displaying the controls. Reducing the number of inputs required to perform an action improves the operability of the device and makes the user-device interface more efficient, which in addition enables the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently, thereby Reduces power usage and improves battery life.

It should be understood that the specific order in which the operations in FIGS. 20A-20F are described is merely an example and is not intended to indicate that the described order is the only order in which the operations may be performed. Those skilled in the art will recognize various ways of reordering the operations described herein. Additionally, details of other processes described herein in connection with other methods described herein (eg, methods 800 , 900 , 1000 , 16000 , 17000 , 18000 , 20000 ) are shown in FIGS. 20A- It should be noted that in a manner similar to method 20000 described above with respect to FIG. 20F is also applicable. For example, contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interface regions, fields of view, tactile outputs, movements, and/or animations described above with respect to method 20000 are optionally described herein. Contacts, inputs, virtual objects, user interface areas, field of view described herein in connection with other methods described (eg, methods 800, 900, 1000, 16000, 17000, 18000, 19000) fields, tactile outputs, movements, and/or animations. For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated here.

8A to 8E, 9A to 9D, 10A to 10D, 16A to 16G, 17A to 17D, 18A to 18I, 19A to 19H, and 20A to 20F. Thus, the above-described operations are optionally implemented by the components shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B . For example, display operations 802, 806, 902, 906, 910, 1004, 1008, 16004, 17004, 18002, 19002, 20002; detection operations 804, 904, 908, 17006, 18004, 19004, 20004; modify operation 910 , receive operations 1002 , 1006 , 16002 , 17002 ; stop operations 17008; rotation operation 18006; update operation 19006; adjustment operation (20006); and create operation 20006 , optionally implemented by event classifier 170 , event recognizer 180 , and event handler 190 . The event monitor 171 in the event sorter 170 detects a contact on the touch-sensitive display 112 , and the event dispatcher module 174 communicates the event information to the application 136 - 1 . The respective event recognizer 180 of the application 136 - 1 compares the event information to the respective event definitions 186 , and determines that a first contact (or rotation of the device) at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface occurs. Determines whether it corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selection of an object on a user interface, or rotation of a device from one orientation to another. When each predefined event or subevent is detected, the event recognizer 180 activates an event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or subevent. Event handler 190 optionally uses or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update application internal state 192 . In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses respective GUI updater 178 to update what is displayed by the application. Similarly, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art how other processes may be implemented based on the components shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B .

The foregoing description, for purposes of explanation, has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the illustrative discussions above are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Many modifications and variations are possible in light of the above teachings. To best explain the principles of the invention and its practical applications, thereby enabling those skilled in the art to best utilize the invention and various described embodiments with various modifications as are suited to the particular use contemplated, the practice Examples have been selected and described.

Claims (19)

As a method,
In a device having one or more input devices comprising a display generating component and a touch-sensitive surface:
displaying, by the display generating component, a representation of a first perspective of a virtual three-dimensional object in a first user interface area on a display;
displaying a respective portion of the virtual 3D object that is not visible from the first viewpoint of the virtual 3D object while displaying a representation of the first viewpoint of the virtual 3D object within the first user interface area on the display detecting a first input corresponding to a request to rotate the virtual three-dimensional object relative to the display to do so; and
In response to detecting the first input:
In response to a determination that the first input corresponds to a request to rotate the virtual three-dimensional object about a first axis, moving the virtual three-dimensional object to the first axis by an amount determined based on the size of the first input. a first portion of the virtual three-dimensional object that is not visible from the first viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object by rotating about constrained by a limit on movement that limits said rotation of an object;
Upon determining that the first input corresponds to a request to rotate the virtual three-dimensional object about a second axis different from the first axis, the virtual three-dimensional object by an amount determined based on the size of the first input. rotating an object about the second axis to display a second portion of the virtual three-dimensional object that is not visible from the first viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object - the first input having a size above a respective threshold , the device rotates the virtual three-dimensional object about the second axis by a rotation greater than the threshold amount. According to claim 1,
In response to detecting the first input:
that the first input comprises a first movement of a contact across a touch-sensitive surface in a first direction and that the first movement of the contact in the first direction is a movement of the virtual three-dimensional object about the first axis. in accordance with a determination that first criteria for rotating the representation of the first viewpoint are satisfied, wherein the first criteria are such that the first input is more than a first threshold amount of movement in the first direction for the first criteria to be satisfied. determining that the first input corresponds to a request to rotate the virtual three-dimensional object about the first axis; and
that the first input comprises a second movement of the contact across the touch-sensitive surface in a second direction and wherein the second movement of the contact in the second direction is the virtual three-dimensional object relative to the second axis. in accordance with a determination that second criteria for rotating the representation of the first viewpoint of comprising a requirement to include movement, determining that the first input corresponds to a request to rotate the virtual three-dimensional object about the second axis, wherein the first threshold is greater than the second threshold. - A method comprising According to claim 1,
The rotation of the virtual three-dimensional object about the first axis is a first degree of correspondence between a characteristic value of a first input parameter of the first input and an amount of rotation applied to the virtual three-dimensional object about the first axis. occurs with a degree of correspondence;
the rotation of the virtual three-dimensional object about the second axis occurs in a second degree of correspondence between a characteristic value of a first input parameter of a second input and an amount of rotation applied to the virtual three-dimensional object about the second axis, and ;
wherein the first degree of correspondence involves a smaller rotation of the virtual three-dimensional object with respect to the first input parameter than the second degree of correspondence. According to claim 1,
detecting an end of the first input; and
continuing to rotate the virtual three-dimensional object after detecting the end of the first input based on the magnitude of the first input before detecting the end of the first input - continuing rotating the three-dimensional object Is,
in response to a determination that the virtual three-dimensional object is rotating about the first axis, of the object about the first axis by a first amount proportional to the magnitude of the rotation of the virtual three-dimensional object about the first axis. slowing the rotation; and
according to a determination that the virtual three-dimensional object is rotating about the second axis, the second amount is proportional to a magnitude of the rotation of the virtual three-dimensional object about the second axis, the second amount different from the first amount. and slowing rotation of the object about an axis. According to claim 1,
detecting an end of the first input; and
After detecting the end of the first input:
in response to a determination that the virtual three-dimensional object has been rotated about the first axis beyond a respective rotation threshold, reverse at least a portion of the rotation of the virtual three-dimensional object about the first axis;
withholding from reversing rotation of the virtual three-dimensional object about the first axis in accordance with a determination that the virtual three-dimensional object has not been rotated about the first axis beyond the respective rotation threshold; Way. According to claim 1,
according to a determination that the first input corresponds to a request to rotate the virtual three-dimensional object about a third axis different from the first axis and the second axis, to rotate the virtual three-dimensional object about the third axis. How to withhold spinning. According to claim 1,
displaying a representation of a shadow cast by the virtual three-dimensional object while displaying a representation of a first viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area; and
varying the shape of the representation of the shadow according to rotation of the virtual three-dimensional object about the first axis and/or the second axis. 8. The method of claim 7,
while rotating the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area:
In accordance with a determination that the virtual three-dimensional object is displayed with a second viewpoint revealing a predefined lower portion of the virtual three-dimensional object, withholding displaying the representation of the shadow as a representation of the second viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object A method comprising steps. According to claim 1,
after rotating the virtual 3D object within the first user interface area, detecting a second input corresponding to a request to reset the virtual 3D object within the first user interface area; and
in response to detecting the second input, displaying a representation of a predefined original viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area. According to claim 1,
detecting a third input corresponding to a request to resize the virtual three-dimensional object while displaying the first viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area; and
in response to detecting the third input, resizing the representation of the first viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area according to the magnitude of the third input. 11. The method of claim 10,
while adjusting the size of the representation of the first viewpoint of the virtual 3D object within the first user interface area, the size of the representation of the first viewpoint of the virtual 3D object is determined by the size of the representation of the first viewpoint of the virtual 3D object. detecting that a predefined default display size of the representation of a viewpoint has been reached; and
In response to detecting that the size of the representation of the first viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object has reached a predefined default display size of the representation of the first viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object, the virtual three-dimensional object is generating a tactile output to indicate display at the predefined default display size. The method of claim 1 , wherein the device comprises one or more cameras, the method comprising:
a second corresponding to a request to display the virtual three-dimensional object in a second user interface area comprising a field of view of one or more cameras while displaying a representation of a third viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area 4 detecting the input; and
in response to detecting the fourth input, displaying, via the display generating component, a representation of the virtual three-dimensional object over at least a portion of the field of view of the one or more cameras included in the second user interface area; The field of view of the one or more cameras is a view of the physical environment in which the one or more cameras are located, and displaying the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object comprises:
rotating the virtual three-dimensional object at a predefined angle about the first axis; and
maintaining a current angle of the virtual three-dimensional object with respect to the second axis. According to claim 1,
receiving a fifth input corresponding to a request to return to a two-dimensional user interface comprising a two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object while displaying a representation of a fourth viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface area; detecting; and
In response to detecting the fifth input:
rotating the virtual three-dimensional object to show a viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional object corresponding to the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object;
displaying the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object after the virtual three-dimensional object has been rotated to show the respective viewpoints corresponding to the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object. According to claim 1,
before displaying a representation of the first viewpoint of the virtual 3D object, displaying a user interface comprising a representation of the virtual 3D object including a representation of the view of the virtual 3D object from each viewpoint;
detecting, while displaying a representation of the virtual three-dimensional object, a request to display the virtual three-dimensional object; and
In response to detecting the request to display the virtual three-dimensional object, replacing the display of the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object with the virtual three-dimensional object rotated to match respective viewpoints of the representation of the virtual three-dimensional object A method comprising the step of According to claim 1,
before displaying the first user interface, displaying a two-dimensional user interface including a two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object;
While displaying the two-dimensional user interface including the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object, a touch input that meets preview criteria at a location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object. detecting a first portion of and
and in response to detecting the first portion of the touch input that meets the preview criteria, displaying a preview of the virtual three-dimensional object that is larger than the two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object. 16. The method of claim 15,
detecting a second portion of the touch input while displaying a preview of the virtual three-dimensional object; and
In response to detecting the second portion of the touch input:
according to a determination that the second portion of the touch input meets menu display criteria, display a plurality of selectable options corresponding to a plurality of actions associated with the virtual object;
In accordance with a determination that the second portion of the touch input meets staging criteria, display of the two-dimensional user interface including a two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object the first user interface including the virtual three-dimensional object A method comprising replacing with The method of claim 1 , wherein the first user interface comprises a plurality of controls, the method comprising:
before displaying the first user interface, displaying a two-dimensional user interface including a two-dimensional representation of the virtual three-dimensional object; and
In response to detecting a request to display the virtual three-dimensional object within the first user interface:
displaying the virtual three-dimensional object in the first user interface without displaying a set of one or more controls associated with the virtual three-dimensional object;
after displaying the virtual three-dimensional object in the first user interface, displaying the set of one or more controls. A computer system comprising:
display creation component;
one or more input devices comprising a touch-sensitive surface;
one or more processors; and
A computer system comprising a memory storing one or more programs configured to be executed by the one or more processors, the one or more programs comprising instructions for performing the method of any one of claims 1-17. . A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium storing one or more programs, the one or more programs, when executed by a computer system having a display generating component and one or more input devices comprising a touch-sensitive surface, to the computer system A non-transitory computer-readable storage medium comprising instructions that cause the method of any one of claims 1 to 17 to be performed.

Images